/ 


THE  LIBRARY 

OF 

THE  UNIVERSITY 
OF  CALIFORNIA 

PRESENTED  BT 

PROF.  CHARLES  A.  KOFOID  AND 
MRS.  PRUDENCE  W.  KOFOID 


Nature's  Invisible  Forces 

The  Seven  Principles  or  Laws  of 
Nature  Analized  and  Expounded 


SOURCE  OF  COSMIC  ENERGY  AND  MATTER. 


NATURE'S  POTENTIALITIES— ILLUSTRATED' 


ARTRONOMICAL  SCIENCE. 

HOW  A  UNIVERSE  IS  CONSTRUCTED 

AND  MAINTAINED. 


FROM  ANIMAL  TO  THE  SPIRITUAL  MAN. 


ART  AND  THE  MORAL  LAW. 


FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  HUMAN  MIND. 


UNIVERSAL  CONSCIOUSNESS 
AND  KINDRED  SUBJECTS. 


BY 

THOS.  H.  ELLIS,  St.  Louis,  Mo.,  U.  S.  A. 
1917 

Price    $2.50 


COPYRIGHT 

1917 
By  THOS.  H.  ELLIS 


CONTENTS. 

Preface _--._._..       7 

Introduction  ------- 9 

CHAPTER  I. 
Seven  Principles  or  Laws  of  Nature  -----     13 

CHAPTER  II. 
Source  of  Cosmic  Energy     --------20 

CHAPTER  III. 
Nature's  Potentialities. — Illustrated    -----     46 

CHAPTER  IV. 
Four  Grand  Physical  Planes     -     -     -  -     75 

CHAPTER  V. 
The  Dual  Process,  or  Wake  and  Sleep  States  82 

CHAPTER  VI. 
Astronomical  Science       -  -94 

CHAPTER  VII. 
A  New  System  of  Astronomy     -------101 

CHAPTER  VIII. 
Every  Thing  the  Record  of  Its  Creation  -     -     -     -  147 

CHAPTER  IX. 
Every  Thing  a  Parasite    -          -------  151 

CHAPTER  X. 
The  Law  of  Heredity     ---------  156 

CHAPTER  XL 
Survival  of  the  Fittest     -----          -    -     -  183 

CHAPTER  XII. 
Uses  and  Abuses     ---------  193 

CHAPTER  XIIL 
From  Animal  to  the  Spiritual  Man     -     -     -     -     -197 

CHAPTER  XIV. 
Functions  of  the  Human  Mind     -     -     -     -     -     -221 

CHAPTER  XV. 
Art  and  the  Moral  Law     --------  240 

CHAPTER  XVI. 
Political  Economy  ---------  258 

CHAPTER  XVII. 
Universal  Consciousness  --- -265 


PREFACE. 

Having  passed  the  mile  stone  of  three  score  years  we 
have  patiently  given  close  attention  for  over  a  half 
century  to  humanity's  paramount  questions:  From 
whence  did  we  come  and  whither  are  we  drifting? 

Each  one  of  us  is  a  child  of  Nature,  a  part  of  the 
grand  whole,  and  in  our  normal  condition  must  neces- 
sarily be  in  touch  with  the  Universal  to  which  we 
belong.  So  in  a  purely  natural  condition,  stripped  free 
from  fear  and  prejudice,  we  are,  of  inherited  right, 
mental  units  of  Universal  Mind. 

With  these  undeniable  truths  as  our  guide  in  life  we 
have  but  to  cast  aside  erroneous  ideas  born  of  personal 
greed,  supported  by  conniving  art  that  clouds  our  men- 
tal vision,  and  place  our  personal  instrumentality  in 
harmony  with  the  Infinite  and  our  ability  to  understand 
is  complete. 

Every  individual  mind  is  a  receiving  center.  Nature's 
Akasic  record  is  open  to  all.  Ignorance  is  the  negative 
position.  Prejudice  is  the  bar.  Facts  only  are  the 
line  of  consistent  contact,  and  Reason,  unless  poisoned 
by  error,  revolts  at  any  other.  Each  individual  can  know 
the  truth  and  the  truth  will  make  him  free. 

In  the  compilation  of  the  contents  of  this  volume 
we  have  not  sought  the  opinions  of  Men,  but  whether 
or  not,  its  conclusions  conform  to  Nature. 


8  Preface. 

We  claim  no  superiority  over  others.  In  fact  we 
know  our  weakness.  What  we  are  proud  to  be  is  a 
student  of  this  boundless  Universe,  and  our  happiness 
is  expressed  to  the  degree  we  enjoy  the  mental  com- 
panionship of  our  fellow  creatures. 

THE  AUTHOR. 


INTRODUCTION. 

The  world  is  replete  with  books  dealing  on  every 
conceivable  subject,  and  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that 
there  are  numerous  interesting  questions  which  even 
the  educated  minds  claim  cannot  be  solved,  I  would 
not  undertake  to  present  this  volume. 

We  have  not  copied  after  the  works  of  other  authors, 
but  have  used  our  endeavor  to  rend  the  veil  of  mys- 
tery that  hangs  between  the  minds  of  Men  and  Nature's 
Laws  by  a  close  observation  of  Nature  and  the  Works 
of  Nature,  and  feel  that  we  have  accomplished  the 
work  to  a  considerable  degree  and  presented  it  in  a  man- 
ner that  a  child  can  enjoy  and  comprehend. 

There  are  many  problems  that  the  world  ought  to 
know  and  many  minds  ready  and  eager  to  grasp  them, 
but  so  far  as  the  author  knows  solutions  have  not  been 
presented;  at  any  rate  the  scientific  world  and  public 
press  boldly  claim  that  the  contents  of  this  work  are 
still  confined  in  the  realm  of  the  unknowable. 

It  will  readily  be  seen  that  to  copy  after  other  books 
or  express  the  opinions  of  other  men  would  not  solve 
the  questions,  nor  would  it  in  any  manner  enhance  the 
knowledge  already  presented. 

It  is  our  purpose  to  present  original  ideas  as  well  as 
lay  the  baseline  for  concrete  thinking:  by  presenting 


10  Introduction. 

premises  from  gleanings  of  Nature  from  which  can  be 
drawn  true  and  basic  conclusions. 

We  shall  attempt  to  introduce  Nature's  Laws  by 
illustrating  Nature's  Invisible  Forces.  Not  from  theory, 
but  by  direct  application  of  Mechanical  Law,  which 
will  place  us  in  actual  mental  touch  with  Nature  as 
no  other  process  can  do. 

It  will  dawn  upon  the  reader,  perhaps  for  the  first 
time,  that  our  universe  as  a  whole,  is  practically  invis- 
ible. That  not  one-millionth  part  is  visible  to  physical 
eyes.  That  creation  is  only  in  the  making  and  forever 
will  be,  and  with  increasing  propensity. 

The  work  will  cover  the  four  grand  Physical  Planes 
and  in  a  measure  reach  into  the  prospective.  It  will 
make  clear  and  in  a  concise  way  explain  the  Dual 
Process — the  wake  and  sleep  states  of  Nature.  It  will 
deal  in  an  analytic  way  with  the  process  of  creation, 
making  unmistakably  clear  the  basic  source  of  cosmic 
energy. 

The  work  will  cover  a  true  account  of  well  founded 
theories  on  Astronomical  Science  up  to  the  present 
time,  which  will  be  supplemented  by  treating  all  doubt- 
ful questions  in  a  manner  supported  by  knowledge  of 
the  Laws  of  Motion,  wherein  will  be  set  up,  not  a  the- 
ory, but  a  new  Astronomical  System.  One  that  shows, 
not  that  our  solar  system  came  into  being  and  motion 
and  is  dying  down;  but  that  the  force  creating,  is 
propelling  and  maintaining  it. 


Introduction.  11 

It  will  explain  why  and  how  the  Sun  shines.  Why 
stars  maintain  their  place  in  space.  Why  planets  revolve 
around  their  central  Suns.  Why  they  rotate  upon  their 
axes.  What  governs  the  speed  of  their  revolution  and 
rotation.  How  light  is  produced.  What  maintains 
the  rings  around  Saturn  and  why  the  moons  do  not 
rotate. 

It  will  illustrate  the  process  of  transposing  Energy 
to  Matter  and  Matter  to  Energy.  The  work  will  ex- 
plain in  unmistakable  terms  and  illustrate  the  process 
of  Nature  in  constructing  to  multiplicity  and  diver- 
sity— showing  why  no  two  things  are  alike  in  all  the 
World.  It  will  expound  the  dual  involuting  process 
of  concentration  of  Energy  into  the  seed  of  re-generat- 
ing Life  Lines  of  Heredity — or  the  Tree  of  Life.  That 
everything  in  existence  is  a  parasite  and  that  there  is  a 
Soul  within  everything. 

It  will  deal  with  the  questions  of  the  Survival  of 
the  Fittest,  the  gulf  and  tedious  route  and  struggle  of 
the  pre-Adamic  to  the  Spiritual  Man.  Including  the 
one  hundred  or  more  functions  of  the  Human  Mind, 
Art  and  the  Moral  Law,  and  The  Universal  Conscious- 
ness. 

We  do  not  claim  a  complete  solution  of  all  pos- 
sible knowledge,  or  that  we  can  think  for  others. 
If,  however,  in  our  humble  effort  we  can  be  instrumen- 
tal in  furnishing  food  for  thought  we  will  feel  that 
this  work  is  a  success. 


12  Introduction, 

With  that  idea  in  view  this  volume  is  dedicated  to 
my  companion  in  Life,  Margaret  Adams  Ellis  and  the 
Thinking  World. 

THOS.    H.    ELLIS. 


CHAPTER  I. 

THE  SEVEN  PRINCIPLES  OR  LAWS  OF 
NATURE  ANALYZED  AND  EXPOUNDED. 

In  order  to  enable  readers  to  fully  comprehend  the 
subjects  embraced  in  this  work,  we  ask  them  to  bear 
with  us  the  task  of  a  sincere  and  careful  analysis  of 
the  fundamental  Principles  of  Nature,  known  as 
Nature's  Laws. 

There  are  seven  notes  to  the  octave  in  what  are  known 
as  sound  waves.  There  are  seven  colors  produced  by 
the  waves  of  reflected  light.  There  are  also  seven  Im- 
mutable Fundamental  Principles  back  of  and  embrac- 
ing the  great  Cosmos — "Nature's  Invisible  Forces." 
For  the  want  of  better  names  we  call  them  TIME,  SPACE, 
CONSUMMATION,  AFFINITY,  NUMERICS,  EVOLUTION  and 
COMPENSATION. 

We  have  arranged  the  Principles  in  the  order  of  their 
relative  importance.  Not  one  of  the  Principles  is  in 
itself  operative.  There  is  not  a  single  phenomena  that 
ever  takes  place,  not  a  manifestation,  great  or  small, 
that  is  not  brought  about  without  the  conjunction  of 
the  seven  Principles — Nature's  Laws. 

Although  it  is  by  the  conjunction  of  the  seven  Prin- 
ciples that  manifestations  take  place,  we  can  neverthe- 
less discern  and  ascribe  to  each  its  particular  function 
or  agency  in  the  specific  as  well  as  general  cosmic 
process  of  establishing  Keys,  Planes,  States  of  existence, 
Energy  and  Matter.  The  Agency  is  a  combination;  the 
final  result,  like  unto  its  parental  source,  becomes  a 
combination.  We  will  now  endeavor  to  determine  each 
of  the  seven  Principles  separately,  giving  them  in  order 


14  Chapter  I. 

of  their  relative  importance,  briefly  ascribing  to  each 
its  particular  agency  or  function. 

TIME  is  an  Immutable  Law.  A  beginningless,  end- 
less and  motionless  Principle.  Time  is  an  ever  present 
staff  standing  midst  the  eternal  past  on  the  one  hand, 
and  the  eternal  future  on  the  other.  It  is  Nature's  im- 
movable Cross.  The  Principle  of  Time  determines  the 
two  states  of  existence:  the  active  and  rest,  the  wake 
and  sleep.  To  every  movement  it  gives  the  measure  of 
duration  and  embraces  within  its  bosom  non-activity  in 
silence  and  sleep.  Time  is  a  fixed  track  over  which 
every  thing  must  move  and  exist :  to  exist,  to  think,  to 
act  is  to  use  a  measure  of  Time.  Time  is  the  base  of 
existence  and  in  conjunction  with  the  other  Principles 
becomes  and  is  the  potent  factor,  the  mother  and  pro- 
tector of  the  endless  and  ceaseless  multiple  process  in 
the  establishment  of  Keys  and  Planes,  Energy  and  Mat- 
ter, as  well  as  to  the  memory  and  record  of  its  eternal 
progress.  There  never  was  a  time  when  Time  could 
have  had  a  beginning,  nor  a  time  when  there  shall  be 
no  Time.  It  is  Things  that  have  beginning,  and  after- 
wards are  maintained  within  Time.  Time  is  distinctly 
a  measure  of  action  from  the  state  of  silence  to  the 
extreme  of  intensity ;  although  present  and  omnipresent, 
extended  to  endless  Space,  it  has  no  function  in  the 
measurement  of  Space. 

SPACE  is  a  geometrical  Principle  enveloping  all  things 
that  are  and  all  that  are  to  be.  It  is  a  leverage  of  Energy, 
a  measure  of  all  movement  and  all  form.  Every  point 
in  Space  is  an  infinitesimal  center,  fixed  in  the  mother 
of  Time,  and  every  movement  from  that  center  is  a 
movement  leading  outward  toward  endless  Space:  a 
movement  toward  diversity.  SPACE  like  TIME,  is  pres- 
ent, omnipresent,  motionless  and  fixed.  You  cannot 


Nature's  Seven  Laws.  15 

add  to  it  or  take  from  it.  Being  endless,  to  all  intents 
and  purposes  every  point  is  a  center,  and  every  thing 
has  its  center  indelibly  fixed  in  Time  and  Space.  To 
exist  is  to  consume  Time  and  Space,  to  move  is  to  pass 
over  Time  and  through  Space,  to  use  the  Principles 
is  to  manifest  them.  Time  and  Space  are  Principles 
co-jointly  extant!  They  embrace  every  other  Principle, 
Condition  or  Thing. 

CONSUMMATION  is  the  Principle  of  inherent  agency, 
the  Mill  of  Time  that  forever  grinds.  To  exist  is  to 
consume  Time,  whether  awake  or  asleep.  To  exist  is  to 
consume  Space,  though  ever  so  small.  To  consume  Time 
is  to  use  its  multiplicity  in  continuation.  To  consume 
Space  is  to  use  its  limitless  leverage.  Consumination 
is  the  ceaseless  process  of  chemical  transformation:  the 
one  thing  eternally  eating  the  other  and  vise  versa.  It 
is  the  track  leading  to  generation  and  re-generation  of 
potential  energy,  giving  rise  to  the  function  of  activity 
between  the  wake  and  the  sleep  states.  Consumination 
is  the  lever  that  crosses  the  fulcrum  of  the  Keys  of  mo- 
tion and  the  Planes  in  Space;  always  giving  advantage 
power  to  the  end  consuming  the  greatest  duration  of 
Time,  and  the  greatest  extension  over  Space.  It  is  the 
bridge  over  which  flows  the  energy  giving  frise  to 
Natures'  perpetual  motion  and  its  survival  of  the  fittest. 

AFFINITY  is  a  Principle  of  ceaseless  effort  to  bring 
all  things  to  a  common  center  generally  and  like  to  like 
specifically.  That  which  binds  elements  to  planets  we 
call  gravity.  The  same  Law  applying  from  planet  to 
planet  we  call  Attraction.  From  mind  to  mind  we  call 
it  love.  It  is  the  Principle  that  holds  planets  in  their 
orbits  by  balancing  the  centripetal  and  centrifugal 
forces.  Afrmity  is  Nature's  Mother  Love  whether  it  be 


16  Chapter  L 

in  binding  Star  to  Star,  Sun  to  Planets  or  Soul  to 
Soul.  The  Principle  itself  is  prior  to  and  back  of  all 
Things.  Each  and  every  particle  of  matter,  according 
to  the  Plane  it  belongs,  is  encompassed  with  the  Law 
of  Affinity  and  contributes  its  portion  in  making  up  the 
grand  total  of  what  is  known  as  the  Law  of  Gravity. 
Affinity  has  a  Dual  expression;  while  it  attracts  like  to 
like  it  also  has  a  repellent  force,  in  the  sense  that  ele- 
ments of  a  finer  Plane  are  less  and  less  attracted  to  the 
grosser  until  they  have  the  appearance  of  being  repelled 
entirely.  This,  however,  is  due  to  the  fact  that  the  finer 
and  rarer  matter  becomes,  the  less  the  force  of  the  Law 
appears  until  finally  it  is  lost  within  diversity  and  the 
Principle  itself.  Principles  are  known  only  as  they 
manifest  through  matter,  and  while  its  agency  is  easier 
traced  in  the  Law  of  Affinity  it  is  nevertheless  true  with 
all  the  Principles.  This  feature  of  a  lesser  and  lesser 
attraction  of  Gravity  will  be  fully  explained  under 
Chapter  X,  "The  Law  of  Heredity." 

NUMERICS  is  a  Principle  that  is  universally  expressed 
within  every  thing.  It  is  present  and  omnipresent :  not 
a  motion,  expression  or  environment  ever  escapes  or 
can  escape  its  indelible  register.  Every  thing  that  ever 
came  into  existence,  that  now  exists  or  ever  will  exist, 
is  and  must  come  under  the  agency  of  this  Immutable 
Principle.  Every  one  and  every  thing  is  numbered. 
Every  impulse,  thought  or  act  is  likewise  embraced  with- 
in the  annals  of  this  Law.  Numerics  is  the  agency  that 
establishes  Keys  to  motion,  Character  to  things,  and  a 
memory  and  Soul  within  every  Thing. 

EVOLUTION  is  the  Principle  of  gradual  development. 
Its  function  is  to  condense  potent  energy  from  Space 
toward  a  common  center,  and  from  that  center  to  grad- 


Nature's  Seven  Laws.  17 

ually  evolve  outward  to  that  of  a  higher  and  higher 
Plane.  It  is  a  vibratory  Process,  ever  pouring  energy 
into  a  common  center  and  evolving  energy  and  matter 
out.  It  is  not  confined  to  planets  and  heavenly  bodies 
alone,  but  is  also  the  principle  agency  operating  through 
all  animated  forms.  It  constantly  builds  up  forms,  and 
re-converts  them  to  their  original  source;  at  the  same 
time  continues  to  convert  potent  energy  to  its  specific 
centers,  a  re-vibration,  a  re-generation.  Each  time  the 
process  is  repeated  it  finds  a  higher  expression,  and  this 
higher  expression  when  again  condensed  to  its  original 
centers,  carries  this  greater  development,  intensifying 
it  at  the  point  of  re-generation  with  a  greater  potential- 
ity. The  Principle  itself  does  not  move:  it  is  a  fixed 
track  over  which  energy  constantly  vibrates  to  and  from 
the  wake  and  sleep  states.  Evolution  is  the  track  over 
which  energy  plays,  and  as  no  movement  can  escape  the 
Numerical  Law,  it  is  therefore  numbered,  registered, 
characterized  and  materialized.  It  is  characters  that 
are  evolved,  take  on  forms  in  units  of  higher  and  higher 
expression,  an  environment  fulcrum  that  again  confines 
its  added  development  to  its  specific  centers,  intensified 
with  all  its  potentiality,  there  again  to  repeat  the  method 
of  eternal  progress.  We  note  that  Matter  generated  over 
the  track  of  Evolution,  becomes  like  unto  its  creator,  a 
more  or  less  fixity,  having  no  other  place  to  go  it  re- 
mains in  the  rest  state,  a  basic  center  from  which  energy 
constantly  plays  to  and  fro.  Out  from  this  basic  center, 
higher  and  higher  Planes  evolve,  from  which  the  evolu- 
tionary tracks  are  to  be  found — a  compound  over  the 
Plane  beneath  it.  Evolution  is  not  only  the  Principle 
of  condensing  energy  and  building  and  re-building 
froms  in  a  higher  and  higher  expression,  but  is  con- 


18  Chapter  I. 

stantly  building  an  environment  upon  which  a  higher 
environment  is  created.  It  is  the  constructing  of  the 
to-day  upon  yesterday,  as  it  will  the  to-morrow  upon 
the  to-day.  Every  point  in  endless  Space  is  a  center; 
every  present  moment  is  the  center  of  eternity  with 
our  Universe  always  in  the  making. 

COMPENSATION  is  the  Law  of  Adjustment.  It  is  the 
Principle  over  which  an  equilibrium  is  established  with- 
in and  between  all  things,  more  particularly  noticeable 
in  the  operations  of  the  Moral  Law.  It  is  the  Law  that 
contributes  a  sense  of  satisfaction  for  energy  expressed, 
commensurate  with  the  effort  made  and  the  resistance 
overcome.  Compensation  is  a  Law  closely  allied  with 
the  Principle  of  Justice  in  the  Moral  Law,  with  this 
difference :  Justice  is  a  dictum  of  the  Mental  World, 
while  that  of  Adjustment  is  a  Principle  of  Nature.  Jus- 
tice is  relative;  while  Adjustment  is  the  expression  of 
the  Law  of  Compensation  and  belongs  in  the  Absolute. 
The  Law  of  Compensation  finds  its  equilibrium  to  the 
most  minute  detail,  just  as  the  pendulum  finds  its  cen- 
ter, and  there  it  stamps  its  dictum,  and  from  the  Abso- 
lute there  is  no  appeal.  Justice  has  its  functions  within 
the  Consciousness  of  Man,  and  as  man  is  constantly 
advancing,  it  is  possible  to  see  Justice  finally  reach  the 
Absolute. 

If  it  were  not  for  the  Law  of  Compensation  this  would 
be  a  dreary  existence  indeed,  for  if  effort  is  not  to  be 
compensated,  what  should  be  inducive  to  produce  the 
effort?  If  no  effort  be  made,  no  advance  is  to  be  at- 
tained. Thus  it  is  that  the  Law  of  Compensation  is  the 
agency  of  Hope,  and  Hope  the  motive  of  Effort,  and 
Effort  the  cause  of  Attainment. 

If  one  \?  to  find  a  true  analvsis  of  Nature's  Laws  he 


Nature's  Seven  Laws.  19 

must  constantly  keep  in  mind  the  dividing  line  between 
Nature's  Laws  and  the  Moral  Laws.  Nature's  Laws 
are  basic  Principles  within  the  Infinite  and  Absolute. 
The  question  of  Good,  Evil,  Eight  or  Wrong,  does  not 
enter  in.  Their  function  is  from  the  Cosmic  Infallible 
to  ultimate  ends.  The  Moral  Laws  are  the  expression 
of  Consciousness,  and  Concsiousness  is  a  function  of 
contact  that  is  traceable  through  matter  everywhere, 
which  advances,  step  by  step,  until  it  reaches  the  inde- 
pendent states  of  arbitrary  directivity,  like  the  flower 
that  grows  out  of  the  stem  and  afterward  produces  the 
perfume — The  Moral  Law  is  the  Perfume  of  arbritrary 
consciousness  that  stands,  rises  or  falls  with  the  source 
of  its  birth.  It  is  therefore  incumbent  in  the  study  of 
Nature's  Laws  that  you  free  your  mind  with  all  its 
virtues  for  the  time  being,  from  any  thought  of  the 
Moral  Laws.  You  will  then  be  enabled  to  get  a  clear 
Mental  vision  of  Nature,  pure  and  simple,  from  with- 
in and  from  without,  and  not  have  your  vision  biased 
by  the  coloring  of  the  relative  sense  of  the  mental  world. 
We  have  endeavored  to  analyze  the  Principles  of  Na- 
ture in  an  understandable  way,  and  at  the  same  time 
make  the  matter  interesting  enough  to  hold  the  atten- 
tion of  the  reader..  We  have  also  found  it  difficult  to 
find  words  enabling  us  to  convey  our  thoughts  in  clear 
and  concise  meaning.  But  difficult  as  it  is  we  must 
first  get  the  fundamentals  into  our  conception  as  a  base 
line,  for  in  order  to  arrive  at  true  conclusions  we  must 
first  start  at  true  and  basic  premises.  And  from  these 
premises  we  hope  to  show  how  "Nature's  Invisible 
Forces'" — Nature's  Laws,  collectively — become  creative 
factors  in  the  topic  of  our  next  chapter,  "The  Source  of 
Cosmic  Energy." 


CHAPTER  II. 
SOURCE  OF  COSMIC  ENERGY. 

In  the  first  chapter  we  dwelt  upon  the  Principles  of 
Nature  specifically,  that  the  reader  might  get  in  mind 
the  function  or  agency  that  each  Principle  separately 
plays  in  the  cosmic  process.  In  this  chapter  we  will  en- 
deavor to  expound  the  part  played  by  each  Principle  in 
their  co-joint  agency  in  bringing  into  existence  the 
extensive  manifestations  we  behold.  Not  only  what  has 
been  established,  but  what  is  still  being  established,  pro- 
jected and  maintained. 

It  will  be  readily  seen  that  we  can  trace  results  back 
to  their  primary  causes.  But  when  we  reach  the  Prin- 
ciples giving  rise  to  these  primary  causes  we  are  able 
to  discern  a  distinct  differentiation  in  their  respective 
agencies.  While  to  undertake  to  fathom  a  cause  back 
of  Fundamental  Principles,  to  say  the  least,  is  unthink- 
able. In  other  words  we  can  trace  matter  in  all  its 
forms  back  to  energy,  because  matter  is  a  tangible  sub- 
stance, and  in  that  substance  is  embraced  the  character 
and  record  of  its  creation.  In  fact  matter  is  expended 
Energy,  that,  when  conditions  demand,  may  be  and  at 
times  is  converted  back  to  Energy  again.  There  is 
this  difference :  Energy  is  a  potential  force  in  the  state 
of  action,  "while  matter  is  expended  Energy  in  the  state 
of  rest.  .  Matter  becomes  a  base  and  fulcrum  where 
Energy  expressed  gives  greater  results,  and  while  Matter 
and  Energy  are  both  embraced  by  the  Laws  and  Prin- 
ciples back  of  them,  we  note  the  fact  that  Energy  is 


. 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  21 


prior  to  Mattel  a  finer  composition  and  more  suscept- 
ible to  the  influence  of  the  leverage  and  evolutionary 
Principles  or  Nature's  Laws.  Beyond  this  point  we  can- 
not go  even  in  thought;  still  we  are  able  to  apply  the 
Principles  with  abstract  and  unerring  results. 

Principles  are  present  and  omnipresent  fixities,  and 
therefore  changeless  ano^  immovable.  Being  everywhere 
and  extant,  outside  of  themselves  they  could  not  he. 
Not  only  is  this  true,  sin<$e  nothing  can  take  place  out- 
side of  the  Principles,  or  after  coming  into  being  escape 
the  Law's  embrace,  it  follows  that  Principles  are  not 
only  the  primary  source  of  Energy,  but  are  the  fixed 
tracks  over  which  Energy  mufct  travel,  and  all  things 
are  projected,  extended  and  maintained.  . 

Within  the  grasp  of  the  Principles,  or  Laws  of  Nature, 
is  an  endless  sea  of  rarified  ma^ty.  Perhaps  to  call  it 
ether  or  electrical  energy  would  convey  a  better  under- 
standing of  what  is  meant.  It  is  through  the  action  of 
this  substance  that  the  Laws  find  expression  in  estab- 
lishing Keys,  Planes  and  States  of  existence,  and  from 
the  result  of  these  fulcrums  elements,  forms  and  com- 
binations are  condensed  and  builded.  But  we  must 
assume  that  the  Keys,  Planes,  Etc.,  are  within  the  Laws 
and  no  part  of  the  force  or  substance  that  go  into  build- 
ing the  constructed  forms,  but  is  the  determining  agency 
that  give  rise  to  the  results  that  follow.  In  other  words 
conditions  and  Energy  go  hand  in  hand  and  results  in 
a  specific  manifestation  following  the  line  of  their  di- 
recting force.  Within  this  sea  of  potent  Energy  or  rari- 
fied matter,  is  to  be  found  actual  invisible  lines  in  count- 
less numbers  and  diverse  directions,  or  else  all  the  rari- 
fied substance  is  a  track  over  which  sight  lines,  lines  of 
attraction,  lines  over  which  Energy  travels,  the  light 


22.  Chapter  II. 

energy  from  the  Sun  and  that  of  the  distant  Stars  reach 
us,  as  well  as  having  the  quality  of  being  a  boundless 
ocean  of  Life  and  a  home  where  Suns,  Stars  and  Planets 
float,,  exist,  grow  and  have  their  being. 

We  must  conclude  that  as  far  out  as  Stars  and  Planets 
exist,  the  Principle  we  call  Space,  is  teaming  with  Life, 
Energy  or  virgin  matter,  and  to  this  conclusion  there 
can  be  no  question.  Beyond  this  there  is  still  the  Prin- 
ciple with  its  endless  possibilities.  That  this  Life  or 
Virgin  Matter  is  a  direct  inheritance  of  the  Principles 
that  precede  and  encompass  all  things,  as  it  now  takes 
in  all  the  heavenly  bodies;  we  may  conclude  that  forms 
have  their  beginning,  and  out  of  this  substance  are  con- 
densed solidified  bodies.  The  solid  condensed  bodies  do 
not  come  in  direct  contact  with  the  Principles  but  are 
linked  up  by  graduated  Planes,  and  from  the  Planes 
back  step  by  step  to  the  primary  cause,  just  in  the  man- 
ner that  mind  is  enabled  to  move  matter;  which  is  not 
direct  but  by  an  intermedium  step  process. 

We  cannot  avoid  the  conclusion  that  in  all  past  time, 
Principles  have  been  operative  in  compounding  leverage 
and  multiple  energy;  so  there  has  been  no  lack  of  time 
in  which  to  have  filled  endless  Space  with  a  boundless 
ocean  of  Life,  potential,  or  whatever  you  choose  to  call 
it,  that  when  expending  its  force  goes  into  the  rest  state 
in  condensed  matter.  But  the  thought  of  endless  Space 
staggers  the  mind.  So  let  us  modify  it  by  assuming 
that  eternity  is  a  fixity,  and  that  it  is  events  that  come 
into  being  and  move.  Time  is  known  only  by  movements 
and  events.  Events  and  things  evolve  out  of  the  Abso- 
lute, that  from  which  thought  itself  is  barred,  while  that 
which  has  appeared,  comes  into  the  relative  and  is 
measured  by  relative  conditions.  We  know  that  things 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  23 

do  come  into  materiality,  and  having  come,  have  a  time 
of  their  beginning  and  a  center  to  which  their  forms  are 
builded.  In  other  words,  Energy  involves  to  a  center 
as  its  force  is  spent.  At  first  the  center  is  an  infinitesi- 
mal point  within  the  Absolute,  which  grows  to  mate- 
riality and  becomes  a  relative  manifestation.  To  some, 
this  would  be  the  beginning  of  creation,  whereas  it  is 
the  expended  Energy  passing  into  the  sleep  state. 

Let  us  take  into  consideration  what  is  meant  by  Cos- 
mic Energy.  In  order  to  do  so  we  have  to  note  the  fact 
that  no  Thing  exists  without  a  cause  preceding  if. 
While  the  primary  cause  is  bound  to  be  a  Princple,  and 
that  a  Principle  is  not  a  Thing.  Principles  produce 
agencies  or  factors  and  factors  express  Energy,  while 
Energy  expends  its  force  in  motion,  record  and  char- 
acter. 

There  are  two  kinds  of  Energy  which  is  expressed 
under  the  following  terms:  Efficient  and  Afferent,  Elec- 
tric and  Magnetic,  or  Masculine  and  Feminine.  It  is  a 
ease  of  moving  outward  or  moving  inward,  a  pendulu- 
matic  or  vibratory  movement.  To  expand  is  to  move 
outward,  taking  in  more  Space.  To  condense  is  to 
shrink,  taking  in  less  Space.  Masculine  or  Efferent 
Energy  therefore  presses  outward  and  expends  its 
Energy  to  a  condition  of  diversity.  When  Masculine 
force  is  expended  it  falls  back  unto  the  Feminine,  bring- 
ing into  its  center  its  diversified  expression  into  a  con- 
densed form — essense  of  diversity.  Each  time  the  vibra- 
tion takes  place  it  may  be  said  to  have  re-generated,  and 
each  swing  of  the  pendulum  has  the  advantage  of  in- 
creased development.  There  is  a  middle  ground  between 
the  unit  of  full  expression  and  its  center,  just  as  there 
is  a  middle  point  of  the  swing  of  a  pendulum.  That 


24:  Chapter  II. 

middle  ground  is  the  plane  of  equilibrium;  a  balance 
between  the  Masculine  and  the  Feminine.  Units  already 
in  existence  do  not  dissolve  into  potential  centers;  but 
instead  unite  forces  that  do  concentrate  to  come  back  a 
new  unit  of  the  duality  expressed.  The  Energy  thus 
used  is  always  the  surplus  Energy. 

Condensed  forms  are  but  an  exceedingly  small  part  of 
Space;  so  small  are  the  planets  compared  to  that  of 
Space  around  them  that  the  mighty  Suns  are  but  tiny 
specks  in  the  sky.  In  the  case  of  our  own  Sun  it  has 
taken  the  surrounding  potential  forces  inscribing  a 
scope  of  over  six  billions  of  miles  in  diameter  to  con- 
dence  its  central  Sun  and  Planets.  All  this  Space  is 
occupied  by  Energy  and  but  a  small  part  occupied  by 
solid  matter.  It  is  therefore  safe  to  conclude  that  solid 
matter  is  as  short  of  being  in  rapport  with  the  cosmic 
Principles  as  they  are  short  of  occupying  the  Space  that 
was  necessary  to  condense  them.  While  on  the  other 
hand  the  Energy  surrounding  the  planets  fills  all  the 
Space.  We  can  trace  matter  back  to  Energy,  because 
matter  is  always  encompassed  and  maintained  by  Energy 
and  carries  within  a  record  of  its  past  conditions.  We 
can  likewise  trace  Energy  back  to  Principles  by  their 
functions  and  agencies ;  here  the  analysis  must  cease,  for 
the  reason  that  while  matter  is  tangible,  Energy  is  less 
expressive,  and  from  that  we  arrive  at  agencies  acting 
under  fixed  and  unlimited  Principles.  When  we  get  this 
line  of  the  action  of  the  creative  forces  in  our  minds  the 
mystery  of  the  Universe  fades  away,  for  to  understand 
the  Laws,  the  facts  determine  that  it  could  not  be  other- 
wise. 

Energy  expressed  in  motion  finds  its  environment  as 
it  crosses  Space  and  Time,  while  the  Principle  of  Nu- 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  25 

merics  establishes  its  record  and  key.  For  illustration, 
sixteen  vibrations  within  one  second  of  Time,  gives  the 
record  and  Note  of  "C."  If  it  should  be  just  double 
that  number  it  would  still  remain  the  Note  of  "C,"  but 
one  octave  higher.  If  it  should  be  any  other  number 
given  within  the  same  measure  of  time  it  would  produce 
another  record,  another  Note.  If  the  motion  should  be 
rotary  instead  of  vibratory,  traveling  over  a  given  meas- 
ure of  Space  within  a  given  measure  of  Time  instead  of 
the  establishment  of  a  Note  there  would  be  a  Plane. 
The  Plane  would  be  an  equilibrium  of  motion  over 
Time  and  over  Space,  according  to  the  fineness  of  the 
Energy  expressed  and  that  can  be  anywhere,  between 
the  Absolute  silence,  and  that  of  the  speed  of  light, 
which  is  over  186,000  miles  per  second.  A  straight  line 
movement  must  come  to  a  stop  when  the  Energy  is  ex- 
pended, then  return  on  the  line  it  came ;  and  when  this 
movement  is  taking  place,  the  time  of  pause  is  equal  to 
the  time  of  travel,  because  it  becomes  a  perfect  balance 
with  the  resistance  it  must  overcome.  Thus  we  have 
the  equilibrium  of  the  dual  process,  the  record  and  key. 
In  the  case  of  a  rotary  motion,  the  fineness  of  the  sub- 
stance revolving  determines  the  degree  of  resistance,  and 
an  equilibrium  is  the  dual  process  between  a  silent  cen- 
ter and  its  revolving  circumference.  In  the  case  of 
rotary  motion,  the  Law  of  Affinity  in  attraction  and  re- 
pulsion expresses  its  agency,  by  giving  to  each  Plane  its 
specific  attraction  as  well  as  its  own  specific  momentum 
or  repellent  force,  together  with  a  general  expression 
over  the  whole.  While  in  the  case  of  the  motion  of  vibra- 
tion momentum  must  break  off  at  each  pause,  and  the 
Law  of  Numerics  expresses  the  greater  function  or 
agency.  Keys  and  Planes  are  to  a  degree  states  of  exist- 


26  Chapter  II. 

ence,  or  in  other  words  conditions.  They  are  like  rings 
within  rings,  waves  within  waves,  vibrations  within 
vibrations,  tones  and  semi-tones.  This  is  not  a  condition 
that  confines  itself  alone  to  matter,  but  it  is  the  agency 
that  places  worlds  within  worlds;  beginning  within  the 
lower  stratums  it  is  never  lost  sight  of  as  it  penetrates 
deeply  into  the  highest  mental  spheres. 

Energy,  although  ever  so  potent,  in  itself  cannot  mani- 
fest without  a  fulcrum  or  base  of  resistance.  The  base 
of  resistance  may  be  a  Key,  a  Plane,  or  inertia  embraced 
in  matter.  At  any  rate  Energy  expressed  in  motion 
over  a  given  resistance,  which  implies  the  crossing  of  a 
certain  amount  of  Space  within  a  given  measure  of 
Time,  determines  the  net  result  under  the  Law  of  Com- 
pensation. The  greater  the  resistance  that  Energy  over- 
comes, the  greater  the  record  made,  the  greater  is  the 
measure  of  Compensation.  If  upon  the  other  hand 
Energy  moves  and  all  things  move  along  with  it,  to  all 
intents  and  purposes  there  would  be  no  movement,  no 
record,  no  Compensation.  The  clock,  if  a  perfect  time 
keeper,  must  move  in  perfect  unison  with  the  move- 
ment of  the  planet  it  happens  to  be  on;  not  Time,  for 
Time  does  not  move.  If  Time  moved  then  the  clock 
would  not  have  to  move.  The  fact  is  the  clock  does  not 
measure  Time  but  the  movement  of  the  planet  in  its 
rotation  on  its  axis  as  the  planet  revolves  through  Space. 
If  the  planet  did  not  move,  or  Space  should  move  along 
with  the  planet,  the  clock  would  not  need  to  move  as 
there  would  be  no  movement  to  measure,  all  would  be 
eternal  monotony,  silent  sameness.  Happily  this  is  not 
the  case,  for  all  Things  move,  although  they  manifest  a 
state  of  rest  or  sleep  within  themselves.  A  thing  in  the 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  27 

rest  state  means  silence  in  relation  to  its  own  center, 
but  in  motion  as  relative  to  other  Things. 

There  is  no  difficulty  to  trace  the  source  of  the  dual 
process  in  all  manifestations,  because  every  Principle 
has  its  Dual  function.  But  in  the  establishment  of  Keys 
and  Planes  it  becomes  more  than  a  function,  it  is  more 
than  a  function,  it  is  more  than  a  factor,  it  is  actually 
a  fulcrum.  It  is  by  virtue  of  this  fact  that  Nature  gives 
to  every  manifestation  its  gradual  step  progress.  The 
tuning  fork  illustrates  the  established  key  in  vibratory 
motion,  and  the  gyroscope  proves  beyond  question  how 
firmly  the  rotating  Planes  resist  being  diverted  from 
their  regularly  established  position  of  motion.  Matter 
does  not  however  remain  in  the  one  and  same  plane,  for 
all  elements  of  matter  have  their  own  centers  toward 
which  energy  expends  itself,  and  sooner  or  later  are 
attracted  to  a  more  condensed  Plane  to  that  of  a  more 
general  center,  as  is  the  case  of  the  working  out  of  the 
idea  generally  accepted  by  the  scientific  world,  relative 
to  the  nebulous  hypothesis  of  the  construction  of  planets. 
The  difference  between  the  nebulous  theory  and  the  one 
outlined  above  is  that  the  nebulous  process  ceases  when 
the  planet  is  formed  and  becomes  a  molten  mass;  while 
the  process  herein  outlined  is  a  never  ceasing — a  per- 
petual process.  The  process,  while  not  sudden,  is  grad- 
ual until  all  is  spent  in  the  sleep  state.  All  the  process 
finally  condenses  to  a  grand  center  where  Energy  is 
finally  transposed  to  heat  by  the  force  of  intensification. 
Then  the  heat  which  is  but  another  form  of  Energy 
finally  spends  itself,  becoming  crystallized  or  solidified 
matter.  In  the  solidified  matter  we  are  not  lost  to  the 
riddle  of  uncertainty,  for  every  rock  has  a  perfect  in- 
delible record  of  itself,  the  elements  of  its  own  particu- 


28  Chapter  II. 

lar  construction  and  character;  and  if  there  be  anj 
shortcoming  it  is  not  within  the  rock,  but  with  us,  in 
not  being  able  to  read  its  soul — the  memory  of  its  past. 

The  Universe  is  a  musical  instrument,  eternally  play- 
ing, part  of  which  is  a  statue,  music  of  the  past  in  the 
frozen  state  of  memory,  and  part  is  in  action:  the 
eye  can  catch  one  octave,  the  ear  can  catch  eight  octaves ; 
and  to  him  who  has  developed  his  mental  powers,  has 
the  symphony  of  the  spheres. 

Every  Plane  has  its  circumference  as  well  as  its  center 
toward  which  it  gravitates.  Each  Plane  is  in  itself  an 
octave,  which  divides  itself  not  alone  by  Space  but  by 
condition  and  relative  fineness.  The  coarser  Planes 
always  being  allied  nearest  to  the  common  center  with 
all  the  finer  Planes  interpenetrating  each  the  other,  with 
the  finest  extending  the  farthest  and  occupying  the 
greater  latitude  until  it  finally  becomes  a  general  field 
reaching  toward  that  of  endless  Space.  In  the  vibratory 
motion,  where  octaves  are  established,  we  note  that  each 
octave  in  the  scale  above,  doubles  up  by  two  or  divides3 
into  two  where  it  was  but  one  before,  which  like  the 
Planes  extending  outward  taking  in  more  Space,  the 
note  of  vibration  becomes  finer  as  in  each  octave  it  rises, 
and  in  a  like  measure  finds  less  and  less  resistance 
in  its  capacity  to  traverse  Space,  as  is  observed  in  the 
use  of  wireless  telegraphy.  The  key  or  plane  of  fineness 
in  the  texture  of  visible  or  invisible  matter  differs  in 
degree  to  the  extent  that  there  is  a  possibility  of  worlds 
being  within  worlds,  without  one  in  any  way  interfering 
with  the  other,  as  we  shall  try  to  show  in  our  work  later 
on.  At  this  time  we  call  your  attention  to  one  fact  only, 
and  that  is  the  readiness  with  which  steel  will  permit  a 
current  of  electricity  to  pass  through  it, 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  29 

It  is  necessary  to  repeat  at  times  in  the  handling  of 
these  subjects  concerning  Nature's  Laws,  because  they 
so  interwind,  one  with  the  other,  that  the  explanation 
of  the  one,  repeats  that  of  another.  However  the  repeti- 
tion will  not  injure,  but  rather  add  virtue  in  impressing 
the  conviction  clearer  and  deeper  into  the  mind.  If  you 
enjoy  the  subject,  it  is  because  you  are  in  harmony  with 
the  matter  in  which  it  treats.  If  it  is  tedious  to  you,  it 
is  because  you  are  not  mentally  in  tune  with  the  Laws 
of  which  the  subject  is  embraced.  Let  us  examine  the 
production  of  music  and  note  the  part  the  Laws  play 
in  this  wonderful  phenomena.  First  Energy  must  be 
expressed  in  vibratory  motion.  In  order  to  be  motion 
it  must  move  over  Space.  The  motion  must  consume  a 
measure  of  Time.  To  consume  Time  and  Space  is  to 
use  the  Law  of  Consummation.  And  as  no  expression 
can  escape  the  Law  of  Numerics,  the  motion  over  Time 
and  Space  registers  its  notes  according  to  the  number 
of  vibrations  consumed  within  a  given  measure  of  Time 
consumed  :  thus  sixteen  vibrations  to  one  second  of  Time 
records  the  Note  of  "C."  If  it  be  any  other  number  it 
would  register  some  other  note;  therefore  in  order  to 
produce  the  tones  required  you  have  to  keep  within  the 
fixed  Laws.  The  Principles  are  there  and  up  to  this 
point  are  followed,  but  we  are  still  short  of  the  manifes- 
tation. Energy  must  be  expressed  over  resistance  which 
in  expending  its  force  rolls  outward  under  the  Law  of 
Involution ;  while  the  volume  is  maintained  under  the 
Law  of  Affinity,  either  harmonious  or  discordant  as  the 
ca^e  might  be,  with  the  result  that  our  ears  receive  under 
the  Law  of  Compensation.  The  air  as  a  resistant  and 
conveyor,  with  the  ear  as  a  receiver  makes  the  manifes- 
tation complete,  under  the  expression  of  the  Laws.  The 


30  Chapter  II. 

Laws  as  applied  in  music  is  the  same  as  that  applied  to 
any  and  all  concrete  forms,  for  the  reason  that  no  Thing 
can  exist  without  consuming  Space,  though  it  be  ever 
so  small.  To  consume  Space  is  also  to  consume  Time 
either  awake  or  asleep.  To  have  form  is  to  have  ex- 
pressed the  Law  of  Consummation  and  to  be  maintained 
by  the  Law  of  Affinity  and  registered  by  the  Law  of 
Numerics,  which  is  to  be  keyed,  planed,  characterized 
and  materialized.  Once  a  Thing  is  in  existence  it  will 
forever  progress  under  the  Law  of  Evolution,  and  profit 
by  the  Law  of  Compensation. 

Principles  are  not  Things,  and  in  their  very  nature 
are  measureless,  beginningless  and  endless.  They  are 
immovable  fixities,  imponderable  in  extent,  and  beyond 
the  imagination  of  the  mind  to  follow.  Being  fixities 
they  are  changeless  and  immutable.  They  are  a  primary 
source  of  all  Energy,  and  as  such  are  beyond  the  reach 
of  any  power  to  change  or  annul.  Every  Principle  has 
its  dual  function  that  projects  its  effect  into  every  mani- 
festation. It  is  this  dual  function  that  contributes  to 
the  two  states  or  conditions  of  existence,  known  as  the 
efferent  and  afferent,  the  positive  and  negative,  the  elec- 
tric and  magnetic,  the  masculine  and  feminine,  the 
active  and  the  rest,  the  wake  and  the  sleep  states  of 
Nature. 

Principles  are  co- jointly  operative;  as  such  they  are 
the  fountain  of  all  coherent  potential  Energy.  This 
Energy  like  its  parental  source,  extends  throughout  end- 
less Space,  a  mass,  a  limitless  sea  of  life.  Here  in  this 
virgin  soil,  the  mills  of  Time  and  Eternity  ARE  con- 
stantly grinding  out  the  Universe  we  behold.  Our  rea- 
son says  there  never  has  been  a  time,  there  never  can 
be  a  time  when  Nature  will  cease  to  work.  Our  Uni- 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  31 

verse  will  always  be  in  the  making  with  an  ever  and 
ever  increasing  rapidity.  Every  Thing,  like  its  parental 
source,  inherits  Eternity  and  finds  its  abiding  place, 
pome  how,  some  where  in  this  endless  deep,  there  to  for- 
ever play  between  the  active  and  rest,  the  wake  and  the 
sleep,  and  forever  and  eternally  advance  toward  the 
ultimate. 

Every  Thing  has  it  beginning  in  an  infinitesimal 
center.  Slow  and  tedious  must  have  been  the  primordial 
movement  of  potential  Energy,  in  its  process  of  con- 
densing Energy  into  that  of  baser  matter,  before  the 
time  when  there  was  environment  to  offer  resistance  that 
should  be  contributive  to  the  breaking  down  of  Energy. 
But  when  environment  was  once  established  the  process 
would  naturally  increase  its  progress.  We  need  not 
disturb  our  minds  further  in  this  field,  for  all  past 
Paternity  was  there  to  accomplish  the  work. 

There  is  a  bridge  between  Energy  and  Matter  that  is 
invariably  used.  That  bridge  is  heat,  which  expresses  in 
result  according  to  Energy  applied,  resistance  met  and 
Time  consumed.  If  it  be  a  great  resistance  and  confined 
to  a  short  Time,  the  heat  will  be  intense;  if  it  be  a  lesser 
resistance  or  a  longer  period  of  Time  consumed,  the 
heat  will  in  like  ratio  be  reduced  or  extended.  Not 
because  there  is  a  less  quantity  of  heat,  but  because  it 
is  extended  in  keeping  with  the  greater  or  lesser  Time 
used.  Energy  crossing  the  bridge  of  heat  does  not  be- 
come all  expended,  but  only  a  small  portion  becomes 
transposed  to  matter.  When  there  is  an  effort  made  to 
break  up  matter  and  it  is  thereby  again  transposed  to 
Energy,  it  is  not  all  transposed,  for  the  reason,  like  that 
of  the  reverse  effort,  it  has  its  pro  ratio  of  resistance 
retaining  it  to  its  then  present  state  of  existence,  never- 


32  Chapter  II. 

theless  it  has  the  same  bridge  of  heat  to  cross.  In  other 
words  all  solidified  matter  becomes  so  through  the  pro- 
cess of  fire.  And  in  the  breaking  down  of  the  same  mat- 
ter there  is  the  same  expression  of  heat,  because  heat  is 
the  expression  of  the  Law  of  Consummation,  in  its  con- 
suming of  matter  to  cross  the  bar  of  the  Numerical  Law 
to  that  of  Energy,  or  in  the  consuming  of  Energy  and 
forcing  it  across  the  Numerical  bar  again  to  that  of 
matter. 

Under  Chapter  III  on  "Nature's  Potentialities/'  we 
present  a  symbol  representing  Nature's  Laws  in  mono- 
gram. But  before  we  undertake  to  explain  the  symbol 
we  wish  to  convey  the  idea  that  Nature's  Laws  do  not 
work  by  design,  plan,  or  purpose,  but  by  process.  There- 
fore we  never  use  the  words,  plan  or  purpose,  for  the 
reason  that  it  would  necessitate  the  use  of  an  arbitrary 
directive  force  above  that  of  the  Laws  and  Principles, 
and  this  arbitrary  function  we  confess  we  cannot  find. 
With  this  explanation  we  will  proceed  to  detail  the 
monogram :  Time  is  the  staff  of  Eternity,  represented  in 
the  upper  left-hand  segment.  It  is  also  the  multiple  pro- 
cess of  Cosmic  Energy.  Space  is  the  trinity  of  Nature 
and  every  part  of  Space  is  a  center  and  each  center  is 
the  center  of  the  LTniverse.  From  every  center  is  a  dual 
triune  line  pointing  to  every  general  direction  into  end- 
less Space.  It  is  placed  in  the  lower  left-hand  segment 
of  the  monogram  with  the  Law  of  Consummation  oper- 
ating between  Time  and  Space  as  a  consuming  fire,  for- 
ever transposing  Time  and  Space  into  multiple  and 
leverage  potential  Energy.  Then  to  send  the  Energy 
across  the  Numerical  bar,  giving  to  each  agency,  func- 
tion, motion  or  thing  a  record,  character  and  materiali- 
zation. At  this  point  of  Nature's  manifestation  the  Law 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  33 

of  Affinity  finds  an  abiding  place  grasping  each  molecule 
of  spent  Energy  with  a  ceaseless  hold,  and  in  a  like 
measure  by  the  result  of  the  bar  of  Numerics  which  the 
molecule  passes  over,  is  added  the  expression  of  con- 
tinual extension,  and  with  each  added  molecule  is  added 
the  further  expression  of  the  Law  of  Affinity.  Having 
reached  the  constructive  stage  of  molecules  and  elements, 
the  Law  of  Evolution  comes  into  the  process  of  mani- 
festation, and  a  process  of  a  compound  continuation  of 
evolving  outward  goes  on.  In  which  case  the  Law  of 
Evolution  constantly  constructs  the  present  upon  the 
past,  by  the  results  attained  over  the  bar  of  Numerics, 
Consummation,  Time  and  Space.  For  the  reason  that 
Evolution  is  the  culmination  resulting  from  the  work  of 
all  the  Principles  before  expressed,  and  from  that 
toward  an  ultimate,  there  to  attain  a  final  registr}^  under 
the  Law  of  Compensation,  commensurate  with  Energy 
expressed  and  resistance  overcome. 

Affinity  plays  the  most  important  part  in  the  process 
of  extending  potential  Energy.  Each  molecule,  element 
or  grain  of  sand  has  its  pro  ratio  of  Affinity  expression, 
with  each  molecule,  element  or  grain  added  in  the  con- 
struction of  a  body  is  therefore  in  a  like  measure  added 
Energy.  In  order  to  illustrate  we  will  presume  that 
you  are  holding  a  bucket  of  sand  that  is  constantly 
pulling  to  get  to  the  Earth;  we  note  that  each  grain 
does  its  part  in  the  pulling,  so  we  let  loose  one  grain  at 
a  time,  and  as  each  grain  becomes  released  from  the 
bucket  it  becomes  lighter  and  lighter  until  all  is  released 
and  the  gravity  itself  has  lost  its  effect.  That  which 
applies  in  the  case  of  a  bucket  of  sand  also  applies  to 
the  whole  planet  itself.  So  that  the  showers  of  meteors 
that  are  constantly  falling  into  our  atmosphere,  which 


34  Chapter  II. 

are  nothing  but  ether  vortices,  become  condensed  through 
atmospheric  friction  and  thereby  transposed  to  matter, 
fall  to  the  Earth  in  cinders  or  dust,  which  constantly 
add  to  the  body  of  the  planet  and  in  like  measure  extend 
its  force  of  gravity.  As  the  gravity  increases,  its  planet- 
ary attraction  (which  is  the  same  thing)  reaches  farther 
into  Space  and  thereby  extends  its  influence  toward  a 
greater  and  greater  supply  of  suspending  Energy.  Thus 
when  a  planet  becomes  a  center  of  attraction  it  auto- 
matically continues  with  increasing  capacity. 

There  are  other  sources  of  Energy  that  will  come 
plainly  to  view,  among  which  are  the  following:  A 
circle  is  three  times  greater  than  its  diameter,  in  which 
case  the  Energy  being  expressed  equally  the  circum- 
ference has  three  to  one  advantage  over  the  center.  A 
circle  when  in  vibratory  balance  with  its  center  is  a 
plane  or  equilibrium  with  all  outer  Space  as  surplus 
leverage.  A  man  gets  on  the  scales  to  be  weighed,  he 
immediately  moves  the  sliding  weight  out  on  the  beam 
until  it  comes  to  a  balance,  which  registers  his  weight, 
that  is  enough  Space  to  lift  him,  any  further  Space  is 
surplus  Energy.  A  constant  pressure  equivalent  to 
move  a  one-pound  weight  one  foot  per  second,  if  given 
sixty  seconds  would  move  the  same  resistance  sixty 
feet.  If  the  same  process  be  applied  and  the  Energy 
be  confined  in  storage  with  continuous  application,  in 
time  it  would  accumulate  force  enough  to  move  a  moun- 
tain. In  the  case  of  art  the  process  is  limited ;  hut  with 
Nature  it  has  no  limit. 

When  once  a  thing  comes  into  expression  it  cannot 
again  escape  the  Law's  embrace.  To  undertake  to  force 
a  thing  out  of  existence  it  would  need  to  be  forced  back 
through  the  door  it  had  entered,  that  of  the  infinitesimal 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  35 

center — the  absolute.  This  is  one  thing  to  which  the 
scientific  world  all  agree.  Even  Energy  as  fine  as  it  is, 
in  passing  toward  a  center  has  always  to  take  the  wind- 
ing process,  for  the  reason  that  its  movement  is  opposed 
from  the  opposite  sides  and  confining  center.  But  in 
going  outward  it  is  invited  to  diversity  in  Space.  In 
other  words  construction  requires  less  effort  to  accom- 
plish than  that  of  destruction.  Nature  has  its  accidents 
and  failures  in  abundance.  But  construction  having 
Space  as  a  welcome  receiver,  builds  all  things  from 
centers  toward  diversity  of  Space,  and  by  the  same 
process  becomes  a  multifarious  crop.  Nature  can  afford 
to  waste  ten  out  of  a  hundred  and  yet  succeed  with  its 
ninety  per  cent  increase  that  the  agency  of  Space  con- 
tributes. Aside  from  this  it  has  the  multiple  function 
that  Time  affords  in  its  re-generating  efforts  of  one 
generation  lapping  over  many.  Herein  lies  the  reason 
that  mankind  can  eat  ninety  grains  of  wheat  and  still 
keep  up  the  supply  by  re-planting  ten  grains.  If  con- 
struction had  no  advantage  over  destruction,  Nature 
Cuuld  not  afford  a  process  or  Consummation  or  accidents 
without  suffering  extinction. 

Many  bright  minds  have  concluded  that  anything 
that  has  a  beginning  must  in  like  manner  have  an  end- 
ing, for  the  reason  that  they  could  not  conceive  of  a 
stick  having  but  one  end.  That  would  be  good  logic 
were  it  so  that  things  had  an  abrupt  beginning;  but 
this  is  never  the  case.  Every  Thing  begins  in  infini- 
tesimal centers  and  ends  in  Space.  If  Space  is  endless, 
where  does  the  Thing  that  is  constructed  in  it  end? 
In  the  case  of  a  type  line  expression,  it,  too,  has  its  be- 
ginning in  infinitesimal  unit  centers  that  project  their 
Energy  in  dual  re-generation  to  new  centers  in  an  end- 


36  Chapter  II. 

less  and  multiple  line  of  inheritance.  Inheritance  is  an 
unbroken  line  of  continuity  with  each  generation — a 
masculine  and  a  feminine  Energy  focus.  Each  focus 
has  its  own  center;  each  center  is  a  link  or  junction  of 
continuity  of  character :  the  fruit  of  a  line  of  infinitesi- 
mal beginning  with  endless  continuity. 

Everything  that  takes  on  form  does  so  by  virtue  of 
and  in  conformity  with  the  encompassing  Laws.  Space, 
if  it  can  be  said  to  have  a  form,  is  a  trinity.  Every 
point  of  Space  is  a  center  from  which  there  are  three 
interpenetrating  lines.  Each  line  crossing  each  other 
at  right  angles,  thereby  pointing  to  six  general  ways  in 
Space.  In  Space  we  have  three  dimensions :  first,  second 
and  third.  A  line  is  the  first  dimension,  two  lines  are 
the  second  dimension,  and  three  lines  are  the  third  di- 
mension. The  first  represents  length;  the  second  rep- 
resents length  and  width;  the  third  represents  length, 
width  and  thickness.  As  forms  take  place  they  must 
conform  to  the  surrounding  condition  and  occupy  Space, 
at  the  same  time  yield  to  the  element  of  environment. 
All  condensation  of  spent  Energy  or  the  work  of  recon- 
struction of  matter  must  pass  over  the  bridge  of  heat 
in  a  greater  or  lesser  degree.  Vapor  by  being  chilled 
will  unite  into  globular  forms  under  rotary  influence 
as  it  falls  to  the  Earth.  A  lower  temperature,  slightly 
below  that  of  the  water  freezing  point,  will  freeze  the 
vapor  before  it  unites  into  drops.  The  frozen  particles  of 
vapor  become  attracted  to  each  other  and  as  the  forma- 
tion does  not  readily  submit  to  rotary  motion,  it  unites 
under  the  law  of  the  dimensions  of  Space,  taking  in 
every  conceivable  character  and  variety,  but  universally 
builds  to  the  third  dimension.  Three  right  angle  lines 
penetrating  a  common  center,  makes  it  have  six  sides  or 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  37 

six  points.  If  the  substance  be  of  the  mineral  or  vege- 
table kingdom  instead  of  the  liquid,  it  would  require  a 
greater  degree  of  heat  to  condense,  besides  in  its  forma- 
tion there  would  be  a  different  environment,,  which 
would  prevent  its  formation  as  frozen  vapor  free  to  act 
under  the  third  dimension  and  force  it  to  the  next  posi- 
tion, that  of  the  second ;  as  is  the  case  with  sugar  in  the 
vegetable  kingdom,  or  the  granite  rock  of  the  mineral 
kingdom,  which  always  forms  in  the  second  dimension 
series  of  flat  length-and-width  layers.  In  order  to  il- 
lustrate the  action  of  this  phase  of  the  Law  as  it  has 
relation  to  the  dimensions,  we  provide  a  drawing  repre- 
senting the  three  way  angle  of  Space,  which  regardless 
of  the  limitless  diversity  of  patterns,  Nature  uses  in 
forming  the  snow  flake.  We  have  never  observed  a  single 
instance  where  a  departure  has  been  made  from  the  first, 
second  and  third  dimensions  of  Space. 

Just  as  we  have  finished  the  article  on  the  formation 
of  the  snow  flake  our  attention  was  called  to  an  article 
in  the  St.  Louis  Post-Dispatch,  copied  from  the  Cleve- 
land Plain  Dealer,  entitled  the  "Hexagon."  The  article 
states : 

"Snow  crystals  obey  an  immutable  law  of  six; 
they  are  six-sided  jewels  or  six-pointed  stars.  They 
never  answer  to  the  law  of  four  or  five.  Snow  is  crysta- 
lized  water,  and  water  always  crystalizes  in  six-sided 
forms.  Why?  No  one  knows;  no  one  ever  will  know. 
There  is  no  more  apparent  reason  for  the  six-sidedness 
of  crystalized  water  than  there  is  for  the  monoclinic 
prisms  of  sugar  crystals.  Water  and  sugar  and  the  com- 
plex minerals  which  make  the  granite  rocks  all  follow 
laws  which  are  utterly  unchangeable,  but  which  are,  as 
far  as  we  can  see,  without  any  special  reason." 


38  Chapter  II. 

It  is  gratifying  to  us  that  the  leading  press  of  the 
country  makes  this  bold  statement.  It  is  all  the  more 
reason  that  the  world  needs  to  know,  and  why  our  work 
should  go  out  to  the  world.  What  the  noted  editor  sees 
as  six-sidedness  is  the  ends  of  three  lines  crossing  a 
center  at  right  angles.  There  is  no  other  number  to  be 
found  in  the  snow  flake  than  that  which  is  expressed  in 
the  dimensions  of  Space.  First  we  have  a  line ;  a  front 
spear :  the  first  dimension.  Next,  but  not  always,  a  fiat 
surface ;  the  prism ;  the  second  dimension.  Then  comes 
the  third  dimension,  which  is  three  lines  joining  at  a 
center,  or  three  lines  crossing  a  center.  Sometimes  the 
formation  twins,  gives  us  six  and  in  doubling  again  wo 
get  twelve  and  no  other  number.  The  reason  that  it 
never  conforms  to  four  or  five,  as  the  editor  finds,  ^ 
because  it,  like  Space,  belongs  to  the  architecture  of 
three,  the  third  dimension.  Snow  flakes  form  out  in 
Space,  and  the  Law  of  Space  governs  their  formation. 

The  Universe  is  a  great  stupendous  self  mechanism. 
The  world  Universe  expresses  all  that  there  is,  known 
and  unknown.  Man  has  been  slow  to  look  into  >the 
Universe  as  a  whole,  and  most  of  us  are  content  with 
examining  the  dense  visible  side  only.  This,  however, 
is  an  exceedingly  small  portion  of  the  whole.  But  we 
are  going  to  extend  our  views,  so  we  may  as  well  start 
now.  Matter  cannot  be  produced  without  expending 
Energy.  Matter  will  not  move  without  Energy  is  ap- 
plied from  within  or  from  without.  Energy  is  limited 
by  capacity  and  Space  only.  Small  as  matter  is,  com- 
pared to  that  endless  sea  of  Energy  everywhere  around 
and  about  us,  we  can  only  know  its  magnitude  as  it 
effects  matter.  So  we  will  take  into  consideration  a  few 
tilings  Energy  effects  just  as  a  starter.  The  constant 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  39 

Energy  stream  flowing  out  from  the  Sun,  at  our  Earth's 
orbit  which  is  ninety-three  millions  of  miles  out  from 
the  Sun,  takes  in  circumscribed  territory  in  Space  of 
eighty-one  quadrillions  of  miles  and  expresses  one  horse- 
power for  every  foot  of  that  space,  every  twenty-four 
hours,  while  its  reverse  influx  action  creates  at  the 
Earth's  orbit  a  constant  pressure  of  one  hundred  pounds 
to  the  square  inch  as  its  negative  force.  The  gravity  of 
the  Earth  constantly  pulls  on  our  atmosphere  to  the 
extent  of  one  ton  to  the  square  foot.  This  is  but  a  be- 
ginning of  the  subject  matter  in  question.  If  we  fol- 
low them  we  shall  soon  get  beyond  the  mind's  capacity 
to  calculate.  To  speak  therefore  of  Nature,  or  the  Uni- 
verse, and  omit  to  mention  Nature's  Invisible  Forces 
and  their  unlimited  extent  in  vastness  and  immensity  is 
like  a  title  to  a  subject  with  the  subject  left  out. 

Energy  in  order  to  become  suspended  to  matter  goes 
under  its  proportion  of  waste.  That  is  to  say  it  must 
condense  across  a  center,  and  in  doing  so  not  all  of 
Energy  becomes  Matter,  for  the  greater  part  remains 
Energy  still.  The  same  is  true  when  matter  is 
broken  down  and  transposed  to  Energy,  regardless 
what  the  process  used,  there  is  always  a  larger  element 
left  remaining  within  the  matter  plane.  For  instance 
in  the  consuming  of  fuel  by  combustion  a  large  portion 
goes  to  ash  and  a  much  larger  portion  goes  to  the 
gaseous  and  ether  planes.  There  is  a  bridge  between 
Energy  and  Matter  and  vice  versa;  that  bridge  is  heat. 
When  Energy  expends  into  Matter  it  crosses  the  bridge 
of  fire.  When  Matter  is  broken  down  it  crosses  the 
bridge  of  fire.  If  the  act  be  sudden,  the  heat  will  be 
intense,  if  prolonged  the  heat  will  be  in  a  like  measure 


40  Chapter  II. 

thinned  out  to  relative  mildness,  giving  the  appearance 
of  having  no  heat. 

If  you  would  know  how  Space  contributes  to  Energy 
you  have  the  answer  in  the  fact  that  a  circumference  is 
greater  than  its  center :  it  is  farther  around  a  body  than 
it  is  across  its  diameter.  And  as  a  like  expression  upon 
a  large  body  exceeds  the  same  expression  on  a  smaller 
body  the  circumference  exceeds  the  diameter,  which 
gives  the  multiple  leverage  advantage  to  the  forces  from 
the  without  to  the  intensification  of  the  construction 
within.  It  is  because  of  this  fact  that  in  all  condensa- 
tion of  Energy  in  the  construction  of  forms  that  Energy 
always  takes  the  winding  process,  which  is  always  three 
times  the  distance  that  a  straight  line  to  the  center 
would  be  and  with  which  it  contributes  three  times  the 
leverage  force,  and  the  multiple  advantage  of  consuming 
three  times  the  measure  of  Time  that  the,  straight  line 
to  the  center  would  require.  For  illustration,  let  us 
assume  that  one  pound  pressure  be  applied  for  a  space 
of  one  foot,  for  one  second  of  Time.  This  would  be 
called  one  pound  foot.  If  the  same  pressure  be  applied 
traveling  at  same  speed  around  the  circle  which  would 
be  three  feet,  it  would  require  three  seconds  of  Time 
instead  of  one  second  and  the  result  would  be  three 
pound  feet,  instead  of  one  pound  foot.  In  other  words, 
circular  action  toward  a  center  has  three  times  the 
advantage  that  operating  over  a  straight  line  would 
have.  In  the  case  of  artificial  means  or  personal  appli- 
cation there  would  be  no  advantage,  for  the  reason  that 
artificial  means  would  have  to  accumulate  its  Energy. 
But  in  the  case  of  Nature,  it  works  from  limitless  Prin- 
ciples. Time  has  no  limits,  Space  has  no  limits;  hence 
leverage  and  multiple  Energy  have  no  time  of  ending. 


Source  of  Coxiiiic  Energy.  41 

In    other    words    aitificial    means    become    exhausted. 
Nature  never  can  exhaust. 

There  is  still  another  very  important  source  of  Energy 
that  constantly  plays  to  and  fro  in  the  Law  of  Affinity. 
Everything  is  attracted  to  a  common  center;  but  some 
substances  more  than  others,  and  as  most  every  sub- 
stance is  transposable  from  one  plane  to  that  of  another 
under  the  Law  of  Consummation,  and  again  re-con- 
sumed or  re-transposed,  which  means  transposing  from 
one  plane  to  that  of  another,  and  again  re-converting, 
which  fact  means  that  in  one  plane  the  same  element 
takes  up  a  lesser  Space  than  in  the  one  from  which  it 
was  transposed.  We  see  this  in  the  process  of  the  con- 
densation of  vapor  into  water,  when  it  becomes  subject 
to  specific  gravity  and  falls  to  the  earth  to  evaporate, 
then  to  suddenly  arise  miles  high  in  the  air.  Sap  is 
forced  up  a  tree,  loaded  with  oxygen  through  the  exceed- 
ingly fine  tubes  within  the  wood  by  levity  until  it  reaches 
the  leaves  where  the  oxygen  is  thrown  out  and  carbon 
from  the  air  taken  on  to  which  it  again  becomes  sub- 
ject to  specific  gravity  to  stream  down  the  bark  of  the 
tree  depositing  its  character  into  the  construction  of 
the  carboniferous  wood.  What  is  true  with  water  is 
true  with  other  substances.  Four  cubic  inches  of  iron 
weighs  one  pound  and  will  drop  to  the  earth  at  the 
rate  of  sixteen  feet  per  first  second;  but  when  pulver- 
ized the  same  iron  will  float  in  the  atmosphere.  Every- 
thing is  subject  to  general  gravity  at  all  times.  But 
when  transposed  from  a  grosser  plane  to  that  of  a  finer 
plane  it  looses  its  former  specific  gravity  to  take  on  that 
of  general  gravity,  which  is  levity  to  the  former.  We 
are  indebted  to  this  process  of  Nature  in  the  propoga- 
tion  of  all  vegetable  and  animal  life. 


42  Chapter  II. 

Throughout  Nature  everywhere  is  a  ceaseless  process 
of  building  up  and  tearing  down  of  forms.  It  is  the 
Law  of  Consummation — the  Mills  of  Eternity  ever 
grinding  on.  It  is  construction;  not  destruction,  always 
from  a  lower  to  that  of  a  higher  formation. 

All  forms  grow  from  within  toward  the  without. 
Energy  flows  from  the  without  toward  the  within — the 
mother  state  of  silence  and  darkness — and  from  the 
within  develops  outward.  Not  only  does  formation  take 
place  from  the  within,  but  the  character  is  established 
from  the  within  and  develops  outward,  including  the 
effects  that  environment  plays  upon  same;  so  that  each 
form  has  within  it  the  capacity  of  developing  a  greater 
and  greater  formation.  All  animated  forms  take  this 
course  in  their  individual  growth.  The  tree  scuds  out 
its  buds  and  leaves  from  within  and  sheds  them  off  from 
without,  even  to  the  shedding  of  its  bark.  Animals 
shed  their  hair  to  send  out  a  new  growth.  The  birds 
shed  their  feathers  as  a  new  plumage  comes  forth.  The 
larva  leaves  its  wiggletail  to  become  a  mosquito.  The 
tadpole  sheds  its  tail  to  become  a  frog.  The  caterpillar 
sheds  its  grub  to  become  a  butterfly.  We  shall  shed 
our  mortal  coil  to  become  the  Immortal  Man. 

Just  to  exist,  Nature's  Laws  will  keep  you,  either  in 
the  wake  or  the  sleep  state.  While  in  the  sleep  state 
little  or  no  energy  is  required.  If  in  the  wake  state,  we 
must  move.  In  order  to  move  we  must  consume  an 
Energy  from  without,  that  we  might  express  a  motion 
from  within.  In  other  words  we  take  on  Afferent  force 
and  transpose  it  to  Efferent  force.  To  exist  we  consume 
Space,  though  we  be  ever  so  small.  Whether  we  move 
or  not  we  must  consume  Time.  And  were  it  not  for  the 
Law  of  Consummation  we  could  consume  neither  Time 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  43 

nor  Space.  To  be  we  are  numbered  by  the  La.w  of  Nu- 
merics, even  to  every  act  and  thought.  A  movement 
without  resistance  counts  for  nothing,  but  a  movement 
over  resistance  registers  construction  and  compensation, 
which  eternally  builds  from  the  within. 

Afferent  Energy  is  an  exhausting  force  aiming  to  pass 
to  a  state  of  rest.  This  is  the  most  natural  thing  it 
could  do.  Any  Energy  falling  into  a  center  always 
takes  the  winding  course  as  that  of  the  least  resistance. 
At  first  there  would  be  but  an  attenuated  vacuum,  but 
the  vortex  once  started  soon  constructs  a  nuclei;  and 
no  sooner  than  a  neuclei  is  established,  it  becomes  em- 
braced by  the  Law  of  Affinity  which  adds  its  force  of 
gravity  to  encourage  the  vortex  influx  and  increases  that 
force  as  fast  as  the  nuclei  or  core  is  builded.  The  Prin- 
ciple of  Affinity  as  a  matter  of  fact,  exists  prior  to  the 
building  of  even  the  first  nuclei.  It  is  because  of  the 
Law  of  Affinity  that  expended  Energy  falls  toward  a 
center,  and  it  is  by  virtue  of  the  Law  that  the  nuclei 
when  once  started  becomes  continuous  and  self  per- 
petual. There  is  still  another  and  very  pertinent  rea- 
son that  suspending  Energy  is  drawn  to  a  center.  That 
is :  because  of  the  fact  that  anything  in  motion  occupies 
more  Space  than  a  thing  in  the  state  of  rest.  When  the 
motion  ceases,  let  it  be  vibratory  or  rotary,  in  coming  to 
a  state  of  rest,  must  shrink  from  the  larger  field  of 
action  to  the  lesser  field  of  silence,  which,  by  the  way, 
is  attenuated  vacuum.  A  good  illustration  will  be  found 
in  the  vibrating  strings  of  a  musical  instrument  or  the 
vibrating  thread  of  an  incandesent  lamp,  where  you  can 
notice  that  the  thread  while  the  electrical  current  plays 
over  its  carbon  resistance,  occupies  about  sixteen  times 
as  much  space  as  it  does  when  in  the  state  of  inactivity. 


44  Chapter  II. 

Nature's  basic  forces  are  fixed  and  unchangeable. 
That  is  to  say  they  are  not  arbritrary  or  in  any  way 
subject  to  caprice.  In  other  words  Nature's  Laws  are 
mechanical :  they  are  not  subject  to  scheme,  plan,  design 
or  purpose.  They  work  by  process  with  ninety  per  cent 
constructive  advantage,  hence  have  Evolving  con- 
tinuity and  Eternal  Progress.  Men  copy  after  the  Laws 
of  Nature  in  the  works  of  art.  Mechanical  devices  are 
made  perfect  when  they  are  made  to  conform  to  Nature's 
Laws.  We  build  our  machines  to  either  utilize  the  Effer- 
ent or  Afferent  forces,  generally  the  Efferent  forces. 
When  the  machines  are  completed  they  are  tested  by 
Nature's  Laws.  Every  mechanic  knows  this  to  be  true, 
yet  there  are  but  few  of  them  who  take  the  trouble  to 
think  it  out  in  reality.  Machines  are  constructed  to 
consume  and  transpose  Energy.  To  be  a  machine  it 
must  exist  in  Time  and  be  able  to  move  in  Space,  carry- 
ing Energy  over  a  given  resistance,  over  a  given  Space 
for  a  given  Time.  The  number  of  surface  feet  that  the 
machine  moves  over  a  resistance  and  the  number  of 
minutes  it  is  made  to  maintain  the  movement  gives  its 
capacity  and  is  fixed  by  the  Numerical  Law.  The  re- 
sults attained  over  the  environment  resistance,  is  the 
respective  power  as  an  expression  of  the  Law  of  Com- 
pensation. The  machine  in  its  intricate  parts  is  a  con- 
struction of  Evolution  while  it  is  maintained  in  com- 
bination by  the  Law  of  Affinity.  There  can  be  no 
machine  where  a  single  Principle  is  left  out.  In  fact  a 
machine  cannot  exist  outside  of  the  Laws.  The  Universe 
itself  is  a  stupendous  machine.  With  a  Principle  left 
out,  the  machine  would  be  incomplete. 

Out  from  the  Eternal  Principles  of  Nature,  slowly 
and  tediously  the  endless  sea  of  cosmic  Energy  came 


Source  of  Cosmic  Energy.  45 

into  being.  Deep  down  in  the  Eternal  silence  and  dark- 
ness was  the  womb  that  give  birth  and  action  to  the 
ocean  of  Eternal  and  boundless  Life.  Darkness  is  the 
foundation  of  Light.  Silence  is  the  base  of  Life.  Prin- 
ciples of  Nature  are  the  levers  of  Energy.  Energy  in 
action  never  fails  to  fix  invisible  lines.  Energy  lines 
crossing  a  center  never  fail  to  intensify  at  the  focus 
into  heat  or  light  or  both.  Suspended  Energy  passing 
the  intensified  local  centers  become  fixed  in  a  state  of 
rest,  a  combination  of  character  and  record  materializes 
into  matter.  Matter  in  the  Sleep  state  becomes  the 
core  of  resistance  to  energized  influx  and  the  Suns  come 
into  being,  the  focal  centers  and  Arc  Lights  of  the  deep. 
Out  of  contact  came  mutuality  and  natural  intellect — a 
cosmic  Mental  world.  Contact  is  the  fountain  source 
of  consciousness,  arbritrary  directivity,  reason,  will, 
individual  consciousness,  art  and  the  moral  law.  The 
Universe  in  its  completeness  will  be  at  its  finished  end. 
Always  in  the  future.  In  all  constructivity  of  the  build- 
ing of  the  present  upon  the  past,  the  latter  surpasses 
the  former  in  gradual  development.  While  the  latter 
always  depends  upon  the  former,  in  a  sense  it  becomes 
independent  because  of  its  higher  and  higher  expres- 
sion. Invincible  forces  at  first,  automatically  worked 
out.  Followed  by  the  flower  of  Creation — the  Independ- 
ent Intellect — not  with  a  power  to  convert,  change  or 
annul  Nature's  Laws,  but  with  mental  directivity  have 
the  capacity  to  advantageously  utilize.-HVfen  no  longer/ 
are  concerned  with  the  exhaustion  of  the  coal  beds,  thef 
oil  and  gas  fields,  for  well  he  begins  to  know  that  Na-| 
hire's  boundless  source  of  Energy  is  waiting  to  supply] 
the  future  demands  of  ManH— - 


CHAPTER  III. 
NATURE'S  POTENTIALITIES. 

(Illustrated) 

Plate  No.  1  displays  a  monogram  of  Nature's  In-- 
visible Forces.  It  represents  the  Laws,  or  Principles  of 
Nature  as  nearly  as  art  can  describe  them.  Each  Law 
is  distinct  in  itself,  but  ineffectual  except  as  it  functions 
co-jointly  with  other  Laws  whereupon  they  become  the 
cosmic  forces  of  creation.  The  Laws  are  fundamental 
basic  potentialities.  They  are  measureless,  limitless 
functions  without  beginning  and  without  ending.  They 
in  fact  are  the  embodiment  of  their  own  dimension — 
the  base  and  encompassment  of  all  creation.  They  are 
not  THINGS,  but  the  Principles  through  which  all 
THINGS  come  into  being.  Although  fixed  and  motion- 
less they  are  the  source  of  Energy,  States  and  Planes, 
measures  of  Action,  Character  and  Form.  In  other 
words,  they  are  the  source  and  base  of  the  Eternal 
Process  from  which  and  through  which  we  (all 
THINGS)  live,  move  and  have  our  being. 

First,  in  order  to  exist  we  must  consume  Time,  and 
although  ever  so  small,  must  consume  Space.  In  order 
to  do  either  we  must  express  the  Law  of  Consumination, 
which  is  continually  consuming  without  annihilating. 
To  exist  we  must  cross  the  Numerical  bar,  be  numbered, 


Nature's  Potentialities. 


C  0  N  S  U  M 
I  N  A  T  I  0  N 


AFFINITY 


PLATE  No.  1. 

registered,  characterized  and  materialized.  Thus  we  are 
embraced  by  the  Law  of  Affinity  and  drawn  to  the  plane 
of  our  own  activity.  To  act  we  express  in  Time  and 
Space,  over  the  Numerical  Law  in  compound  addition 
and  thus  embrace  the  Law  of  Evolution.  Having  come 
into  being,  our  inherent  quality  is  expressed  by  energy 
expended  and  resistance  overcome,  and  we  become  quali- 
fied under  the  Law  of  Compensation. 

Every  Character  is  a  matrix  or  mold  through  which 
Nature's  Invisible  Forces  press  continually  the  endless 
variety  of  Things  we  behold. 


48 


Chapter  IIT. 


PLATE  No.  2. 


PLATE  No.  3. 


Plate  No.  2  represents  the  staff  of  Time.  It  is  a  fixed 
bar  over  which  all  events  and  things  move.  The  central 
staff  represents  the  ever  present,  from  which,  upon  the 
one  hand  we  point  to  the  eternal  past,  and  upon  the 
other  the  eternal  future.  Time  is  Nature's  immovahle 
cross. 

Plate  No.  3  represents  the  dimensions  of  Space. 
Every  point  is  an  infinitesimal  center  from  which  in- 
visible lines  extend  in  six  general  directions  toward  end- 
less Space.  The  six  dual  points  verge  as  they  meet  at 
three  right  angles  crossing  the  center,  expressing  the 
third  dimension — the  geometry  of  Space.  Space  is  a 
trinity  that,  in  conjunction  with  the  Law  of  Affinity  in 
the  frost  state,  forms  the  hexagon  snow  flake,  and  in  the 
heat,  or  liquid  state,  forms  the  rain  drop  or  globe. 

Plate  No.  4  represents  vibration  and  a  right  and  left 
inwind  motion.  The  upper  line  of  the  plate  shows  a 
vibratory  motion,  the  lower  left-hand  corner  represents 
a  right-hand  inwind,  the  one  at  the  right  corner  rep- 
resents a  left-hand  inwind. 


Nature  s  Potentialities.  40 


PLATE  No.  4. 

The  line  at  the  top  in  the  diagram  represents  a  hall 
vibrating  across  Space,  at  the  same  time  it  vibrates 
across  Space  it  vibrates  across  Time.  The  movement 
over  Space  creates  volume  and  the  movement  over  Time 
creates  key  or  character  cord.  The  movement  over  Time 
includes  the  expression  of  the  Numerical  Law,  which  at 
the  rate  of  sixteen  vibrations  to  the  second  creates  the 
note  of  "C."  If  any  other  number  be  produced  within 
the  same  measure  of  Time  under  the  same  Law  it  would 
create  another  and  different  note. 

The  vibrations  over  Space  create  volume  and  plane  of 
activity,  if  the  same  ingredient  substance  occupies 
greater  volume,  the  movement  would  express  itself  with- 
in another  plane. 

The  inwinding  motion  as  shown  by  a  right  and  left- 
hand  wind  represents  the  movement  always  taken  when- 
ever a  flowing  substance  is  effected  by  a  tentative 
vacuum,  which  when  set  in  motion  becomes  subject  to 
a  greater  influence  of  the  Law  of  Affinity  as  a  central 
core  of  the  inwind  accumulates  or  condenses. 

It  makes  no  difference  which  way  the  movement  of 
the  inwind  takes,  for  both  movements  are  the  same.  A 
difference  appears  only  from  which  end  the  movement 


50  Chapter  III. 

is  viewed.  Looking  at  the  movement  from  one  side  it 
winds  to  the  right;  and  upon  the  other  side,  it  winds 
to  the  left.  When  a  polar  vibration  takes  place  within 
the  rotary  motion,  a  right  or  left  wind  is  then  estab- 
lished. For  continuation  see  Plate  No.  5. 


PLATE  No.  5. 

Plate  'No.  5  represents  a  polar  view  of  an  in  wind 
toward  a  common  center  and  a  continuous  vibratory 
movement  to  its  circumferential  motion.  At  the  same 
time  the  revolving  movement  from  center  to  circum- 
ference is  expressed,  it  also  assumes  an  endwise  vibra- 
tion from  pole  to  pole  as  shown  on  the  right  side  of 
Plate  No.  5  where  both  poles  are  presented  to  view. 
For  equatorial  view  see  Plate  No.  6. 

Plate  No.  6  represents  an  equatorial  view,  with  one 
a  right-hand  wind,  the  other  a  left-hand  wind.  This 
illustration  shows  why  one  element  repels  another, 
which  is,  for  the  reason  a  right-hand  wind  will  not 
thread  up  with  a  left-hand  wind. 

At  the  bottom  of  the  plate  we  illustrate  the  inwind 
and  the  revolving  outward  together  with  the  polar  vibra- 
tion— screw  fashion — giving  to  Energy  the  principal 
modes  of  motion  which  constructs  the  Energy  element. 
This,  we  have  good  reason  to  believe,  represents  the 


Natures  Potentialities.  51 


PLATE  Xo.  6. 

finest  expression  to  which  elemental  substance  can  be 
traced. 

No  man  lias  ever  seen  the  element.,  but  the  drawings 
outlined  in  Plates  Nos.  4=,  5  and  6  are  made  in  accord- 
ance with  the  laws  of  motion,  and  the  principles  there 
involved  are  correct. 

Plate  Xo.  7  represents  how  Space  is  contributive  to 
leverage  energy  in  condensation  and  intensification  as 
elements  of  motion  are  pressed  across  focal  centers. 
The  process  of  intensification  creates  heat  or  fire,  liqui- 
dating energy  into  solidified  matter,  showing  that  each 
and  every  form  of  material  construction  grows  from 
the  center  outward  as  its  accumulating  center  verges 
into  matter.  We  can  only  give  a  sectional  view,  but  it 
must  be  understood  that  the  energy  verges  not  alone 
form  one,  but  all  sides  alike.  Matter  develops  outward 
in  all  directions  from  its  constructive  center  through 
which  energy  penetrates,  as  substance  from  another  plane. 


Chapter  III. 


PLATE  No.  7. 

All  Energy  is  not  transposed  to  matter  in  the  one 
crossing  of  the  center,  nor  can  all  matter  be  transposed 
to  Energy  in  one  circuit  of  motion  as  a  great  portion  in 
either  case  resists  change  and  passes  across  centers  with- 
out becoming  digested ;  in  the  same  manner  that  not  all 
the  current  of  electricity  crossing  the  arc  light  focus  is 
transposed  to  light,  but  much  of  the  current  returns  to 
the  dynamo  supplying  it  to  return  in  another  circuit. 

In  the  case  of  the  influx  Energy  winding  into  the 
Sun,  in  crossing  the  Sun's  focal  center  a  portion  of  the 


Nature's  Potentialities.  53 

force  is  expended  into  light  Energy  that  flows  out  into 
Space,  while  a  great  portion  is  converted  into  heat,  and 
from  heat  condensed  into  liquified  matter  of  the  Sun, 
so  that  in  this  way  the  central  hody  is  constantly  main- 
tained and  constructed. 

What  takes  place  in  the  Sun  takes  place  in  the  con- 
struction of  every  formation,  but  upon  a  smaller  scale. 

You  will  note  that  when  Energy  is  forced  across  a 
focal  center  in  constructing  matter,  that  building  from 


PLATE  No.  8. 

its  center  and  developing  outward  transposes  intensity 
to  diversity  and  multiplicity.  And  that  by  virtue  of 
diversity  no  two  things  are  created  exactly  alike,  and 
through  the  process  of  multiplicity  the  constructive 
forces  exceed  the  destructive  forces,  thereby  perpetuat- 
ing elements  of  creation  against  contingencies  or  anni- 
hilation. 

Plate  No.  8  represents  the  four  physical  planes  of  the 


54  Chapter  III. 

universe  which  are  composed  of  Solids,  Liquids,  Gases 
and  Ethers. 

The  Liquids  interpenetrate  the  Solids.  The  Gases 
interpenetrate  the  Liquids  and  Solids,  and  the  Ethers 
interpenetrate  the  Gases,  Liquids  and  Solids,  as  well  as 
extend  throughout  space. 


\ 


PLATE  Xo.  9. 

The  planes  that  constitute  Solids,  Liquids  and  Gases 
are  generally  considered  the  created  universe.  This 
part  of  Creation  forms  an  exceedingly  small  portion, 
wjien  compared  to  the  Ether  planes  out  of  which  the 
Solids,  Liquids  and  Gases  were  condensed. 

Nature's  Invisible  Forces  express  the  Laws  of  action 
and  the  results  are  to  act  upon  the  most  fluent  sub- 


Nature's  Potentialities.  55 

stance  first,  which  are  the  Ethers.  The  Gases  next, 
Liquids  next,  and  lastly  the  Solids. 

Ethers  are  the  electrical  elements  which  will  be 
treated  more  fully  under  the  head  of  electricity.  In  the 
case  of  Solids,  Liquids  and  Gases,  these  planes  unite  in 
composing  planetary  bodies  that  actually  float  in  Ether. 
So  that  when  Ether  is  acted  upon  and  is  moved  by  the 
Invisible  Forces  of  Nature,  the  planets  move  along  with 
the  Ether  currents  and  are  at  the  same  time  influenced 
by  the  Laws  of  motion  as  that  of  matter  of  denser 
planes,  giving  rise  to  their  orbital  action,  which  is  fully 
explained  under  the  head  of  "The  New  System  of 
Astronomy/'  Chapter  VII. 

Plate  No.  9  represents  an  Ether  vortex.  The  process 
of  concentration  followed  by  the  law  involving  all  Effer- 
ent Energy  in  the  construction  of  material  forms. 

Vortices  take  place  in  water,  in  the  air,  and  in  ether. 
A  vacuum  displacement  in  water  will  cause  them  in 
water,  and  a  displacement  in  the  air  will  cause  them  in 
air.  But  as  ether  is  more  fluent  than  water  or  air,  and 
much  more  flexible  than  air,  it  is  also  more  subject  to 
the  laws  of  motion  than  water  or  air.  And  since  air, 
together  with  the  planet,  floats  in  ether,  any  disturb- 
ance in  ether  causes  the  same  disturbance  in  the  air. 
An  etheric  cyclone  will  produce  an  air  cyclone,  and  at 
times  extend  its  motion  into  the  solid  crust  of  the  earth 
where  it  has  a  freer  access  than  it  has  in  air,  and  there 
give  rise  to  earthkuakes  along  with  the  air  storms,  as 
it  might  effect  the  melted  lava  beneath  the  earth's  crust. 

It  is  due  to  the  law  embraced  in  the  vortex  that  Suns 
and  Planets  are  constructed.  It  is  due  to  this  law  that 
Suns  and  Planets  rotate  and  revolve.  It  is  also  due  to 
this  law  that  the  Sun  shines. 


56  Chapter  III. 

The  vortex  has  a  zero  force  at  its  periphery  which 
intensifies  as  it  winds  inward  and  on  reaching  the  center 
pierces  the  ultimate.,  giving  rise  to  the  constructive 
fire  that  causes  ether  to  be  melted  into  Suns — creating 
the  star  specked  space — the  heavens  around  us. 


PLATE  No.  10. 

Plate  No.  10  represents  an  infinitesimal  center  ex- 
tending Efferent  Energy  toward  endless  Space  in  mul- 
tiple diversity.  This  is  the  expression  that  always  takes 
place  in  the  formation  of  a  vortex.  It  is  known  as  the 
evolution  that  follows  involution.  The  lines  running 
out  from  the  center  are  character  lines,  and  there  is  not 
a  Thing  in  all  creation  that  has  not  evolved  through  this 


Nature's  Potentialities.  57 

process;  and  in  doing  so  establishes  character  by  en- 
vironments met. 

Every  Thing  has  not  only  come  into  being  by  this 
process,  but  every  organic  formation  is  operated  and 
maintained  by  it. 

In  respiration  we  take  into  the  lungs  and  eliminate 
air.  The  blood  flows  out  through  the  arteries  and  re- 


PLATE  No.  11. 

turns  through  the  veins.  Ether  rolls  into  the  Sun  and 
is  cast  off  in  light  Energy .f  Vegetable  plants  take  on 
the  Energy  of  the  Sun  light  and  with  that  Energy  con- 
struct their  forms,  their  fruits  and  seeds.  The  sweet- 
ness of  the  fruit  or  the  perfume  of  the  flower  alike 


58  Chapter  III. 

depend  upon  the  light  rays  of  the  Sun.  Not  a  mole- 
cule is  constructed  unless  it  be  supplied  from  the  influx 
from  without. 

Nature's  Geometrical  Law  is  a  line  running  from 
and  to  an  infinitesimal  center. 

Plate  No.  11  represents  Afferent  and  Efferent  forces 
working  in  unison.  The  inwinding  lines  represent  the 
Ether  influx  and  the  diversified  lines  leading  outward 
represent  the  Sun  light  energy  flowing  into  Space.  All 
this  process  is  brought  about  by  the  Law  of  Affinity — 
Gravity — as  it  works  over  the  principle  of  space.  The 
power  of  a  circumference  exercising  leverage  over  a 
center.  By  reference  to  Chapter  No.  VII  a  full  explana- 
tion will  be  given,  showing  how  gravity  operates  to 
produce  perpetual  motion.  The  following  plate,  No.  12, 
will  illustrate  the  invisible  forces  operating  our  planet- 
ary system. 

Plate  No.  12  represents  the  Invisible  Forces  operat- 
ing a  Solar  System.  You  will  notice  the  inwinding 
Ether  that  carries  the  planets  around  the  Sun  at  the 
rate  of  19  J^>  miles  per  second,  which  gives  to  the  planets, 
on  account  of  their  denseness,  a  contrifugal  force  that 
holds  them  out  in  space  against  the  attraction  of  the 
Sun.  You  will  also  note  the  Sun  light  Energy  striking 
the  planets,  providing  a  resistence  upon  the  peripheries 
of  the  planets  exposed  to  the  Sun,  causing  the  planets 
to  rotate  as  they  float  around  the  Sun  within  the  Ether 
disc;  showing  the  two-point  contact  of  energy  express- 
ing itself  over  moving  bodies  in  line  with  the  move- 
ments made. 

Ether  being  less  dense  than  the  planets  is  also  less 
effected  by  centrifugal  motion,  and  winds  its  way  into 
the  Sim,  leaving  the  heavy  bodies  out  in  space  within 


Nature's  Potentialities. 


PLATE  No.  12. 

the  influence  of  their  centrifugal  forces.  So  it  will  be 
seen  that  the  gravity  of  the  Sun  that  draws  the  Ether 
into  it,  is  the  same  force  that  supplies  the  momentum 
to  keep  the  planets  out,  as  well  as  the  force  that  causes 
the  arc  light  of  the  Sun  and  through  the  light  rotates 
the  planets  upon  their  axes.  All  of  which  is  a  self- 
perpetual  mechanism  promoted  by  the  principle  that  a 
circumference  leverage  has  over  a  center. 

Plate  No.   13  represents  our   Solar  system,  without 
showing  the  Invisible  Forces. 


60  Chapter  HI. 

Plate  No.  14  represents  a  drawing  made  under  me- 
chanical law  to  determine  the  source  moving  a  body 
under  a  given  rotating  and  revolving  motion  from  a 


PLATE  No.  13. 

two-point  contact,,  the  result  of  the  application  deter- 
mining the  influx  of  Ether  and  the  resistance  of  Sun 
light  which  supplies  the  key  to  unlock  the  secrets  of  the 
whole  Astronomical  system  as  outlined  under  Chapter 
No.  VII. 

Plate  No.  15  represents  our  central  Sun  and  the 
planets  of  our  Solar  system  placed  upon  the  disc  of  the 
Sun  in  order  to  show  their  relative  sizes  compared  with 
each  other  and  that  of  the  Sun. 


Natures  Potentialities.  51 

Plate  No.  16  represents  the  old  theory  of  how  planets 
came  into  existence  by  being  cast  off  from  a  revolving 
Sun. 


PLATE  No.  14. 

If  planets  were  ever  cast  off  from  the  Sun  they  would 
rotate  directly  opposite  from  that  of  the  planet  casting 
them  into  space.  You  will  note  by  the  arrow  the  direc- 
tion of  the  revolving  Sun  and  the  effect  that  would  be 
produced  to  the  body  that  took  birth  if  such  events  could 
possibly  occur. 

Centrifugal  force  always  plays  to  straight  lines.  The 
revolving  motion  provides  a  tangent  at  first,  but  soon 


Chapter  III. 


PLATE  No.  15. 

assumes  a  straight  line,  as  that  of  the  Sun  light.  Jn 
order  for  the  Sun  to  cast  off  a  portion  of  its  own  body, 
it  must  be  supplied  by  an  energy  from  within. 

Before  a  Sun  could  throw  a  portion  of  itself  into 
space  at  the  rate  of  19^2  miles  per  second,  it  must  also 
revolve  upon  its  own  center  with  its  surface  traveling  at 
that  speed.  But  it  is  conceded  that  the  planets  travel 
at  least  twelve  times. the  speed  of  that  of  the  Sun's 
equator  which  is  supposed  to  have  set  them  in  motion. 
Furthermore,  if  the  planets  were  ever  cast  off  from  the 
Sun  they  are  bound  by  that  principle  to  rotate  opposite 
from  what  they  now  do. 

Plate  No.  17  represents  on  the  right,  the  shape  the 


Nature's  Potentialities. 


63 


Sun  now  appears  because  it  is  confined  under  the  pres- 
sure of  a  vortex  motion  where  the  energy  revolving  it  is 
supplied  from  without,  thereby  keeping  that  molten 
body  in  a  symmetrical  globe. 


PLATE  No.  16. 

If  the  Sun  rotated  upon  its  own  momentum — a  source 
from  within  it  would  take  on  the  shape  as  that  repre- 
sented in  the  left-hand  side  of  Plate  No.  17,  on  account 
of  centrifugal  force  governed  by  its  rotating  surface 
travel  of  4,500  miles  per  hour. 

Plate  No.  18  represents  the  motion  of  the  Earth  and 
Moon  as  the  Earth  rotates  upon  its  own  axis  and  semi- 
effectively  revolves  around  the  Moon. 

The  line  between  the  Earth  and  Moon  represents  the 
gravity  tie  between  the  two  planets,  and  the  point  of 
equilibrium  of  motion  between  the  Earth  and  Moon  as 
the  Moon  revolves  around  the  Earth!  This  motion 
causes  the  earth  to  take  a  zig-zag  route  in  its  revolving 


64 


Chapter  HI. 


motion  around  the  Sun,,  and  explains  the  cause  of  the 
moon  tide  and  the  centrifugal  motion  of  the  Earth  that 
gives  rise  to  the  tide  on  the  opposite  side  of  the  Earth 
from  that  of  the  Moon. 

Plate  No.   19  represents  how  the  light  of  the   Sun 
effects  the  tide  and  planetary  attraction. 


PLATE  No.  17. 

The  Sun  is  four  hundred  times  larger  in  diameter 
than  the  Moon.  But  the  Moon  is  four  hundred  times 
closer  to  the  Earth  than  the  Sun,  therefore  the  planetary 
attraction  should  be  about  equal.  The  Moon  tide,  how- 
ever., is  four-fifths  greater  than  the  Sun  tide,  which 
shows  the  effect  light  has  in  overcoming  attraction.  It 
also  shows  that  where  two  planets  are  brilliant  they 
would  entirely  overcome  gravity,  and  like  the  stars  in 
space,  press  apart  according  to  the  power  they  have  to 
shine — the  capacity  of  their  efferent  forces. 

Plate  No.  20  represents  the  Mineral,  Vegetable  and 
Animal  Planes.  The  object  of  which  is  to  show  the 


Nature's  Point I iufi I ir*. 


65 


reader  tlie  base  and  lineage  of  Organic  Life.  The  center 
represents  the  Physical  Plane.  Upon  the  Mineral  Plane 
we  show  the  Vegetable  Plane,  for  it  is  upon  the  Mineral 
Plane  that  the  Vegetable  depends.  Out  of  the  Vegetable 
Plane  came  the  Protoplasm.  Protoplasm  is  decomposed 
vegetable  substance.  It  may  also  be  considered  as  vege- 
tation under  the  process  of  digestion  or  chemical  action. 
Vegetation  in  that  state  or  condition  is  frutitious  for 


PLATE  ^To.  18. 

animated  activity.  Warmth,  moisture  and  darkness  fol- 
lowed by  light  is  the  essential  elementals,  with  the  Pro- 
toplasm as  a  base,  to  bring  into  being  the  little  animated 
form  known  as  the  Amoeba. 

Just  outside  of  the  Protoplasmic  Plane  is  represented 
a  single  Amoeba.  This  single  Amoeba  grows  and  di- 
vides into  two  creatures;  the  two  then,  like  the  first, 


66  Chapter  HI. 

grow  and  divide.,  and  then  we  have  four  creatures;  the 
four  grow  and  divide,  and  we  now  have  eight  creatures; 
the  eight  grow  and  divide,  making  thirty-two  creatures, 
and  thus  the  process  goes  on,  doubling  up  by  division 
ad  finitum.  This  illustration  explains  how  one  Amoeba 
by  growth  and  division,  in  five  generations  can  become 
thirty-two.  Each  of  the  thirty- two  are  equal  parts  of 
the  first  Amoeba,  each  the  eame  age,  with  each  bearing 
the  same  line  of  inheritance  and  character.  The  illustra- 


PLATE  No.  19. 

tion  also  makes  clear  what  is  meant  by  type  lines,  or  life 
lines. 

The  Amoeba  growth  and  division  process  illustrates 
how  paternal  inheritance,  when  impregnated  into  a 
single  cell  or  molecule,  grows  and  develops  into  a  full 
grown  character  unit  from  the  within,  toward  the  with- 
out. It  shows  that  new  cells  are  not  added  to  a  form 
in  order  to  construct  it,  the  newly  added  cells  would 
require  to  also  be  impregnated  like  that  of  the  first,  but 
the  character  grows  as  the  cells  grow,  to  suffer  division 
in  a  continuous  unbroken  line  as  the  cells  themselves 


Nature's  Potentialities. 


/4N7MAQ 


PLATE  No.  20. 

do  and  multiply  by  division.  All  warm-blooded  animals, 
including  man,  build  their  bodies  through  the  growth 
and  division  process  from  a  single  molecule.  This  first 
molecule  bears  the  primary  mind  and  character  inten- 
sified by  a  dual  parental  source — in  other  words  a  union 
process. 

The  manner  in  which  cells  or  molecules  grow  and 
divide,  shows  how  we  are  enabled  to  continue  our  men- 
tal existence  without  a  break,  from  childhood  to  old 
age,  that  is  to  say,  remain  constant  while  the  physical 


68  Chapter  HI, 

body  undergoes  continued  wearing  away  and  renewal. 

The  Animal  Plane  represented  in  the  drawing,  il- 
lustrates the  process  of  re-generation  under  the  union 
process  of  character  building,  wherein  thirty-two  parents 
through  the  law  of  inheritance  in  five  generations  cen- 
ters on  each  individual  born.  It  does  not  stop  at  five 
generations,  but  runs  back  through  the  ages,  doubling 
up  in  number  each  generation. 

WHY  THE  COMPASS  POINTS  TO  THE  NORTH. 

There  is  no  part  of  space  so  far  as  we  know  that  is 
not  filled  with  Ether.  When  a  planet  rotates  upon  its 
axis  it  throws  Ether  off  at  its  equator  and  takes  Ether 
on  at  its  poles,  and  as  the  planet  rotates,  one  pole  winds 
to  the  right  and  the  other  to  the  left,  which  gives  the 
polar  resistance  found  in  magnets. 

When  a  bar  of  steel  is  magnetized  it  gives  to  it  the 
effect  of  arranging  the  molecules  composing  the  steel 
all  to  the  right  or  all  to  the  left,  as  the  current  may  be 
applied,  so  that  when  the  bar  is  placed  upon  a,  point 
and  well  balanced  it  immediately  turns  the  bar  in  line 
of  the  Ether  flow  on  the  Earth's  surface,  in  a  line  with 
the  arranged  molecules  in  the  magnetized  steel.  The 
one  end  a  receiver,  the  other  a  resistance,  and  thus  the 
needle  or  bar  of  steel  takes  upon  itself  the  current  pass- 
ing from  the  planet's  pole  toward  the  equator  along  the 
line  of  least  resistance,  much  in  the  manner  a  weather- 
vane  would  be  in  a  current  of  air.  The  bar  of  steel  being 
a  better  conductor  for  Ether  than  air,  it  naturally  takes 
the  route  of  the  steel  as  that  of  least  resistance. 
WHAT  is  ELECTRICITY? 

Electricity  is  a  fluid,  finer  than  that  of  air.  It  is 
"ETHER,"  fine,  flexible  matter  of  our  fourth  physical 
plane.  ETHER  is  an  elastic  and  flexible  substance  and 


Nature's  Potentialities.  69 

being  finer  and  more  flexible  than  air,  moves  first  under 
impulse  of  motion  or  energy  expressed.  It  passes 
through  steel  very  readily,  but  is  resisted  to  a  great  de- 
gree by  air,  as  will  be  seen  by  its  manifestations.  Elec- 
trical Fluid  Pother  can  be  mechanically  propelled 
through  the  vacuum  process  commonly  called  magnetic 
voltage  or  through  the  centrifugal  force  as  dynamic  cur- 
rent pressure,  alternating  or  direct;  or,  it  may  be  pro- 
duced by  friction  or  a  chemical  process.  The  current 
is  compressible  according  to  the  mechanism  behind  it 
and  can  be  packed  or  stored  away  in  receiving  jars  or 
compositories,  called  Storage  Batteries,  and  there  held 
for  future  use,  provided  it  is  of  a  low  voltage;  or  in 
plainer  words,  coarse  enough  to  be  retained  without 
filtering  out.  A  very  high  voltage  cannot  be  confined. 

A  low  and  coarse  voltage  passes  through  the  air  with 
difficulty  and  thus  may  be  easily  kept  within  its  confines 
and  carried  miles  over  an  insulated  wire  with  little  loss 
by  leakage.  In  case  of  a  current  of  low  voltage  it  is 
necessary  to  use  low  current  motors  to  receive  and  utilize 
the  force  of  the  current;  in  which  case  the  energy  is 
transposed  from  the  low  current  motor  to  a  higher  speed 
dynamo  by  a  belt,  and  the  higher  speed  dynamo  pro- 
duces a  higher  and  finer  current,  depending  upon  the 
construction  of  the  dynamo  and  the  speed  maintained. 
When  the  current  is  high  enough  and  fine  enough  it 
will  pass  through  the  air  to  a  great  distance  (as  well 
as  through  Ether  in  the  normal  state),  whereas  the  low 
current,  such  as  is  used  for  running  machinery,  light- 
ing cities  or  running  street  cars,  cannot  jump  a  gap 
through  the  air  ta  exceed  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch. 

Where  the  current  is  reduced  to  a  fineness  or  very 
high  pulsation  it  can  be  sent  out  through  the  air  in  a 


70  Chapter  III. 

constant  stream,  such  as  is  the  case  in  wireless  plants 
to  distances  of  many  thousands  of  miles;  just  like  the 
Sun  throws  out  its  light  rays  to  exhaust  their  force  in 
space,  and  there  again  to  he  reabsorbed  in  the  Ether's 
endless  sea  surrounding  our  planet. 

The  Sun  rays  impregnate  any  object  that  they  hap- 
pen to  strike  and  reproduce  their  character  in  light  and 
heat,  while  the  artificial  Ether  current  from  our  wire- 
less plants  would  exhaust  its  force  unobserved,  but  for 
the  fact  that  we  disturb  the  current  by  agitation  which 
is  caught  up  by  receiving  instruments  within  the  radius 
of  its  force,  provided  said  receiving  instruments  are 
keyed  in  TUNE  with  the  agitating  instruments,  in 
which  case  the  agitation  is  reproduced ;  whether  it  be  of 
the  telegraphic  key  or  the  human  voice  through  the 
Etheric  current  flowing  in  all  directions  and  bearing 
the  character  of  agitation  in  the  most  minute  detail, 
giving  every  peculiarity  of  the  personal  voice  of  the 
operator.  It  is  the  voice,  the  sound,  the  agitation  that 
goes  out  with  the  flow  of  Ether,  like  chips  floating  out 
on  a  stream. 

Electricity  is,  therefore,  Ether  in  its  normal  state, 
240  degrees  below  zero,  manifesting  on  any  key  from 
that  of  substance  finer  than  air,  to  the  extreme  fine- 
ness of  heat  and  light.  Compressed  Ether  known  as 
Electricity  is  cold,  but  its  movement  over  resistance 
causes  agitation  and  heat,  if  it  be  forced  across  air,  as 
in  the  case  of  burning  out  a  safety  fuse  we  see  it  mani- 
fest in  fire -as  well  as  the  effect  of  explosion,  giving  vent 
to  its  compression.  We  must  note  also  that  Ether  can 
be  confined  to  an  extreme  pressure,  but  in  case  of  a 
steady  open  dynamic  supply  the  current  could  not  be 
produced  beyond  the  supply,  and  this  probably  is  about 


Nature's  Potentialities.  71 

100  pounds  to  the  square  inch  in  Ether  pressure.  It  is 
by  virtue  of  this  pressure  that  the  dynamo  is  enabled 
to  throw  into  a  receiving  field  by  centrifugal  motion 
the  amount  of  the  inflow  to  the  receiving  poles,  and 
no  more.  At  the  same  time  the  dynamo  driving  the 
current  extends  the  effect  of  the  current  in  coarseness 
or  fineness  according  to  the  construction  of  its  mechan- 
ism and  the  pulsations  made  in  a  given  space  of 
TIME. 

Water  is  supplied  to  a  pump  according  to  the  air 
pressure  behind  it.  A  tube  is  a  container  through 
which  the  air  is  excluded  and  in  which  the  water  flows. 

In  the  case  of  Ether  a  solid  bar  of  steel  becomes  a 
tube,  excluding  the  air;  but  open  to  Ether  which  en- 
ables it  while  thus  insulated  to  produce  an  etheric 
vacuum  (Magnetic),  or  to  charge  with  an  ether  pres- 
sure (Electric),  so  if  we  could  observe  the  current  as  it 
passes  along  the  wire  it  would  present  a  vision  re- 
pern  bl  ing  a  string  of  beads. 

Chemical,  or  in  fact,  any  heat  when  applied  to  Ether 
sets  up  an  activity,  and  when  it  is  applied  to  a  bar  of 
Fteel  suitably  proportioned  and  prepared  to  register  its 
activity,  and  that  bar  of  steel  be  plunged  into  cold 
water,  the  agitated  Ether  immediately  flies  out  of  the 
eteel  into  the  receiving  field  (Water)  and  leaves  in  so 
short  a  space  of  time  as  to  leave  a  perfect  imprint  of 
etheric  action,  which  we  call  temper  within  the  steel, 
and  this  record  will  remain  in  the  fixed  molecules  as 
memory,  characterizing  it  until  it  again  is  subjected  to 
a  change  by  repeating  the  process  in  a  greater  or  lesser 
degree. 

Agitation  of  the  elements  generate  Ether  to  a  finer 
condition  and  thus  like  water  turning  to  steam  requires 


72  Chapter  III. 

more  space,  and  when  this  takes  place  in  the  clouds 
place  separated  from  the  earth  by  space  of  air,  which  is 
a  non-conductor  in  normal  or  near  normal  Ether,  and 
confines  it  to  the  clouds  until  it  becomes  a  pressure  and 
subject  to  the  principle  of  Affinity,  where  it  is  attracted 
to  the  greater  body  within  the  confines  of  the  Earth  of 
a  like  vibratory  condition,  and  as  soon  as  the  charge 
within  the  cloud  becomes  agitated  to  a  high  enough 
pitch  to  enable  it  to  cross  the  air  space  between,  it  does 
so  taking  the  line  of  least  resistance  and  toward  the 
point  of  greater  attraction  within  its  scope.  When  it 
creates  the  effect  of  expansion,  if  the  object  or  point  of 
meeting  be  a  tree,  it  will  often  split  it  open.  If  the 
cloud  generating  the  Ether  energy  was  larger  than  the 
earth  the  current  would  flow  toward  the  cloud  instead, 
and  the  danger  of  lightning  strokes  would  be  transferred 
to  the  clouds. 

The  scientific  world  have  generally  recognized  that 
electrictiy  was  an  Ether.  The  fact  was  more  or  less 
vague  because  of  the  wide  scope  of  its  activities  and 
its  susceptibility  of  taking  on  so  many  keys  and  planes. 

In  its  lowest  state  it  is  dark  and  silent,  at  a  plane 
240  degrees  below  zero;  at  65  degrees  it  moves  particles 
of  matter  in  the  construction  of  the  fungus  growth  of 
plants,  acts  in  the  chemical  process  of  combustion  and 
decomposition,  as  well  as  becomes  subject  to  the  men- 
tal directivity  of  cold-blooded  animals.  At  98  degrees 
activity  it  becomes  subject  to  mental  directivity  of  warm- 
blooded animals  and  fatal  to  their  control  below  that 
of  90  degrees  or  higher  than  110.  When  at  an  agitation 
of  300  degrees  it  takes  on  the  ember,  next  the  flame 
and  on  upward  to  that  of  the  .immense  Heat  and  Light 
of  the  Sun. 


Nature's  Potentialities,  73 

How  MOTION  CONSTRUCTS. 

A  human  life  is  but  a  flashlight  scene  in  the  annals 
of  Nature.  Because  little  change  is  observed  does  not 
debar  us  from  a  wide  grasp  if  we  but  analyze  the  parts 
that  come  within  our  range  of  view.  To  know  a  grain 
of  sand  is  to  know  the  Solar  System;  to  know  Thyself 
is  to  know  All  Things. 

Energy  expressed  leaves  its  record  according  to  the 
resistance  overcome.  The  Law  of  Motion  leads  to  di- 
versity in  its  evolving  outward  and  to  intensity  in  its 
enrolling  inward,  thus  the  seed  is  the  sleep  state  of 
energy  expressed  in  potential  intensity.  A  motion  once 
made  becomes  the  life  line  of  endurance.  It  is  the 
record  of  the  act  performed,  and  characterizes  itself 
by  the  route  taken.  Character  once  established  moves 
in  the  potential,  ever  constructing  today  upon  the  yes- 
terday over  invisible  lines  within  forms. 

To  avoid  going  into  the  technical  work  we  will  call 
your  attention  to  but  a  few  facts,  namely :  The  line  that 
the  sap  travels  up  a  tree  gives  to  the  wood  of  the  tree 
fibers  of  endurance  and  strength;  the  start  and  stop 
of  the  sap  from  the  wake  to  the  sleep  state  marks  its 
time  in  the  grain  of  the  wood,  while  it  never  fails  to 
designate  its  specific  character  within  itself,  the  endur- 
ing  record  of  its  past  and  finally  intensify  its  poten- 
tialities in  its  focal  center — its  seed.  We  know  it  when 
we  see  it,  and  we  read  within  its  soul  the  memory  rec- 
ord of  its  past.  What  is  true  of  the  tree  is  true  with 
everything  from  the  fire-formed  rocks  to  the  plane  of 
animated  life.  Even  to  the  lowest  forms  of  matter — 
clay  pulled  out,  takes  on  a  grain  in  the  line  it  was 
forced  to  move;  iron  rolled  takes  on  grain  and  tensile 
strength;  glass  pulled  out  into  threads  may  be  woven 


74  Chapter  III. 

into  cloth,  as  with  all  elements  of  solidified  matter.  A 
beautiful  illustration  is  manifest  in  the  life  line  of 
energy  passing  from  bud  to  the  flower  in  the  cotton 
plant.  The  line  passed  over  in  the  cotton  boll  when  the 
milk  of  the  boll  is  absorbed  into  the  seed  becomes  the 
lint  we  so  highly  prize. 

Energization  and  Motion  is  Life.  Life  is  a  Prin- 
ciple, common  property  to  all  Things.  It  cannot  be 
taken  or  given.  It  is  character  that  takes  on  form  and 
moves  down  the  lines  of  Time  as  they  tediously  com- 
pound,, consume,  regenerate  and  evolve  from  the 
primordial  first  motion  to  the  exalted  combination  of 
an  arbitrary  force  of  mental  directivity. 


CHAPTER  IV. 
FOUR  GRAND  PHYSICAL  PLANES. 

There  are  four  grand  Physical  Planes  in  the  Material 
Universe,  namely:  Solids,  Liquids,  Gases  and  Ethers. 
Liquids  interpentrate  the  Solids;  Gases  interpenetrate 
the  Liquids  and  Solids,  while  Ether  interpenetrates 
Gases,  Liquids  and  Solids,  and  so  far  as  we  know,  extends 
to  all  interstellar  Space.  Solids  are  the  grossest  forms  of 
Matter,  the  most  condensed  and  inert,  and  are  the  closest 
allied  within  the  Sleep  State  of  Nature.  Liquids,  while 
Solid,  are  fluent,  Gases  are  fluent,  compressible  and 
expansible,  Ethers  are  more  fluent  than  Liquids  or 
Gases  and  are  a  thousand  times  more  compressible  than 
the  Gasesj  while  at  the  same  time  subsceptible  to  innu- 
merable divisions  into  sub-Planes  and  penetrating  ac- 
tivities. 

Ethers  condense  to  Gases,  Gases  condense  to  Liquids 
and  Liquids  condense  to  Solids.  The  three  grosser 
planes  form  the  solid  part  of  creation,  that  cling  to 
focal  centers,  and  in  the  aggregate  form,  the  visible 
Universe,  which  is  but  an  exceedingly  small  part  of 
the  whole,  and  this  small  part  of  the  whole  we  call  our 
solar  systems  which  floats  in  endless  Ether. 

Solid  matter  contains  some  ninety  odd  elements  which 
are  susceptible  of  separation  and  analyzation.  The 
elements  maintain  their  own  characteristics,  because  in 
their  very  nature  they  are  fixed  in  the  sleep  state,  which 
means  resistance  to  change,  or  in  other  words,  fixed 
within  the  grasp  of  the  Numerical  Law — characterized. 


76  Chapter  IV. 

All  the  elements  of  solidified  matter  may  be  combined 
in  one  mass  or  held  separate.  If  held  separate  may  be 
dissolved  and  reunited  without  losing  their  distinct  char- 
acters. Every  operation  to  which  matter  is  subjected, 
takes  within  itself  the  record  of  its  operation,,  so  that 
matter  always  maintains  the  memory  of  its  past.  It  is 
because  of  this  fact  that  stones  bear  their  distinct  char- 
acter and  are  distinguished  one  from  the  other  as  granite, 
flint  and  marble,  and  traceable  as  such  on  sight.  The 
same  is  true  of  metals,  for  when  melted  they  congeal  into 
globular  masses  under  the  law  of  rotary  motion,  but 
when  subjected  to  puddling,  stirring,  rolling  and  pulling, 
are  made  to  take  on  records  of  the  movements  to  which 
they  are  subjected,  and  in  this  manner  conveys  cast 
metals  into  what  are  known  as  wrought  metals.  Cast 
metals  have  the  molecular  form  of  globes,  and  wrought 
metals  have  the  form  of  fibers  of  endurance  and  strength, 
in  keeping  with  the  movements  the  working  of  the  metals 
have  been  subjected  to.  We  do  not  know  where  the 
limit  lies,  but  we  do  know  that  ordinary  metal,  worth 
two  cents  per  pound,  can  be  worked  and  refined  to  such  a 
degree  as  to  be  worth  several  dollars  per  pound,  which 
all  goes  to  prove  that  matter  bears  a  record  of  the  envi- 
ronment to  which  it  is  subjected;  that  record  established 
becomes  its  quality  and  character,  and  that  it  retains 
in  memory  that  which  it  has  acquired.  Grosser  matter 
lays  deepest  within  the  state  of  rest,  and  its  records  are 
most  easily  observed.  What  is  true  of  matter  in  one 
plane  is  true  in  all  planes  with  this  difference:  the 
grosser  the  plane  the  greater  the  resistance,  and  the 
greater  the  resistance  the  greater  the  compensation.  On 
the  other  hand,  the  finer  the  plane  the  less  the  resistance 
and  the  more  fluent;  hence  it  is  that  basic  and  concrete 


Four  Grand  Physical  Planes.  77 

construction  must  first  have  basic  foundation  as  a  base- 
line in  order  to  establish  a  firm  foundation  for  per- 
manent and  concrete  constructivity. 

Liquids  penetrate  solids,  but  as  their  planes  are  closely 
allied,  the  process  and  capacity  that  one  may  interpene- 
trate the  other,  is  slow  and  resisting.  Gases  interpene- 
trate the  liquids  with  the  same  difficulty,  and  for  the 
same  reason  that  they,  too,  are  closely  allied  in  fineness. 
Ethers  interpenetrate  the  gases,  but  as  gases  are  closely 
allied,  like  that  of  Gases  and  liquids,  the  one  resists  the 
other.  But  when  it  comes  to  Ether  interpenetrating 
the  Solids,  we  note  a  wide  difference  in  their  respective 
planes,  and  in  a  like  measure  a  lesser  resistance  is  of- 
fered. Ether,  in  its  process  of  interpenetrating  solid 
matter,  and  in  the  case  of  some  metals,  it  offers  little  or 
no  resistance,  as  is  shown  to  be  the  case  of  a  current  of 
Ether  passing  through  steel.  The  same  current,  how- 
ever, is  strongly  resisted  when  it  comes  in  contact  with 
air — the  plane  of  the  gases. 

The  four  grand  physical  planes  cannot  all  be  seen  by 
the  unaided  eye,  but  they  can  all  be  felt  by  the  sense  of 
touch.  There  are  elements  of  the  grosser  planes  of  matter 
that  are  quite  transparent,  such  as  those  allied  to  the 
glasses.  When  we  arrive  at  the  plane  of  liquids  they 
are  largely  transparent,  and  also  the  Plane  of  gases  are 
quite  transparent.  In  fact  we  should  not  be  able  to  see 
the  gases  at  all,  were  it  not  that  they  act  as  surface  or 
sight  line  refractors  which  are  plainly  noticeable  under 
heat  rays.  When  we  reach  the  Ether  planes  we  cannot 
see  Ether  at  all,  except  we  can  notice  its  effects  as  pro- 
duced, when  it  is  forced  across  air,  gas  or  carbon,  pro- 
ducing a  glow  of  light.  But  while  Ether  is  quite 
transparent  to  the  eye,  it  is  easily  felt  as  it  touches  our 


78  Chapter  IV. 

nervous  system,  giving  us  a  sense  of  cold,  which  sense  of 
cold  is  transposed  to  heat  if  the  vibratory  waves  of 
Ether  are  increased  in  intensity,  which  may  reach  many 
thousands  of  degrees,  like  that  expressed  in  Sun  light 
Energy. 

Our  physical  forms  are  made  up  very  largely  from  the 
Liquid  planes.  A  very  small  portion  is  constructed  from 
the  solids,  over  ninety  per  cent  is  water,  and  the  whole 
body  is  solidly  compressed  with  the  Ether,  to  which  we 
are  indebted  for  efferent  energy  that  readily  and  fluently 
yields  to  the  arbitrary  command  of  the  will  as  it  moves 
under  the  influence  in  filling  our  muscles  in  the  process 
of  moving  our  anatomies.  We  do  this  because  Ether 
can  be  directed  to  flow  over  them  at  our  command.  Were 
it  not  for  this  fluent  Ether  matter  we  could  not  feel, 
let  alone  move,  because  there  would  be  no  substance 
in  matter  that  would  be  fluent  enough  and  susceptible 
to  the  command  of  the  finer  forces  like  that  of  the  mind. 
Therefore,  while  it  appears  that  animated  forms  are  con- 
structed and  maintained  by  solid  matter,  it  is  evident 
that  the  most  important,  and  by  far  the  greatest,  uses 
and  utilities  are  supported  by  the  finer  planes  as  well  as 
through  these  planes  made  operative. 

While  animated  forms  are  capable  of  directing  the  use 
of  Ether,  the  forms,  in  order  to  do  so,  must  be  composed 
of  organs  of  consumption  of  Energy  and  storage  bat- 
teries, to  which  the  brain  and  spinal  cord  become  the 
principle  agents. 

When  every  part  of  the  form  and  mechanism  of  the 
body  is  in  a  normal  condition,  all  works  well,  but  if  it 
becomes  in  a  measure  unjointed,  the  keys  of  the  storage 
battery  at  times  turn  loose,  and  we  find  our  forces  work- 
ing involuntarily,  in  which  case  muscles  move  without 


Four  Grand  Physical  Planes.  79 

the  command  of  the  mind  and  at  times  lock  up  in 
cramps,  refusing  to  release  at  the  command  of  the  will. 

The  grosser  forms  of  matter  known  as  Solids  are 
composed  of  the  spent  matter  of  the  finer  planes;  so 
that  in  the  complete  analysis,  solid  matter  is  Energy 
condensed  to  a  state  of  rest.  Matter  is  therefore  record 
of  actions  expressed — it  is  not  motion,  but  is  the  record 
of  motion. 

Considering  the  fact  that  solid  matter  is  the  record 
of  motion  expended,  we  have  found  intellectual  minds 
ready  to  assume  that  matter  is  Mind.  They  think  so 
because  matter  holds  its  record  and  character.  When 
we  come  to  analyze  the  method  by  which  Matter  gets  its 
record,  we  note  that  automatic  action  and  environment 
are  the  principal  causes  of  all  Natural  records,  and  that 
wherever  arbitrary  directivity  is  applied  it  is  readily 
discerned  to  be  an  expression  of  art,  which  in  either 
case  is  but  memory  of  its  past.  Shall  we  concede  that 
Matter  is  Mind  because  it  bears  a  perfect  record  and 
maintains  its  character?  Furthermore  is  Matter  Mind 
because  it  maintains  fixed  invisible  lines  over  which  it 
is  enabled  to  reconstruct  ?  No !  It  has  but  one  func- 
tion :  that  of  Memory,  while  the  mind  has  no  less  than 
six  grand  functions,  with  some  eighty  odd  minor  func- 
tions. A  more  complete  analysis  will  be  given  under 
Chapter  XIV— "Functions  of  the  Human  Mind." 

Solid  matter  is  subject  to  transposition  from  the 
state  of  rest  to  that  of  a  higher  plane  through  the  process 
of  decomposition,  combustion  and  reconstruction  under 
the  chemical  process,  to  the  breaking  down  of  matter 
and  reconverting  it  into  other  planes  and  forms,  as  well 
as  converting  a  portion  of  that  of  Energy  which  in  turn 
becomes  matter  again.  Under  Chapter  X,  "The  Law  of 


80  Chapter  IV. 

Heredity,"  this  question  will  have  our  full  attention  and 
be  given  complete  analysis. 

Within  the  plane  of  the  solids  we  have  ninety 
elements  of  differentiation  which  to  a  degree  may  be 
termed  sub-planes.  In  the  Liquid  planes  are  to  be 
found  sub-planes.  In  the  gases  the  number  of  sub' 
planes  are  extended,  but  when  we  come  to  consider  the 
Ether  plane  we  are  safe  in  concluding  that  a  vast  field 
is  opened  up  to  separate  planes,  varying  from  a  normal 
state  of  say  240  degrees  below  zero  to  upward  of  18,000 
degrees  above — all  of  which  is  a  matter  of  fineness,  or  a 
rate  of  vibratory  activity.  Herein  lies  the  virgin  soil 
from  which  all  baser  matter  is  condensed. 

Within  the  four  physical  planes  of  Solids,  Liquids, 
Gases  and  Ethers,  are  other  worlds  commonly  called 
kingdoms,  which  are  known  as  Mineral,  Vegetable  and 
Animal.  In  each  of  these  Kingdoms  are  contents  of  all 
four  physical  planes  with  the  differentiation  that  the 
mineral  planes  contain  a  greater  portion  of  the  solids 
and  each  kingdom  above  that  of  the  minerals  contains 
less  minerals. 

A  great  part  of  vegetable  forms  are  composed  of  car- 
bon, the  balance  Liquids,  Gases  and  Ethers.  While  in 
the  animal  kingdom  a  very  small  amount  of  the  mineral 
formation  goes  into  their  bodies,  the  greater  part  being 
liquids,  gases  and  ethers.  Therefore  while  the  three 
kingdoms  are  separate  in  a  way  within  the  four  phy- 
sical planes,  they  are  nevertheless  compositions  made  up 
from  the  four  physical  planes,  which  also  comprise  a 
new  development  that  takes  root  in  the  base  line  of  the 
mineral  kingdom  and  evolves  to  vegetable  and  animal 
forms  of  life  and  through  these  formations  to  a  state 
of  consciousness. 


Four  Grand  Physical  Planes.  81 

The  universe  is  composed  of  the  Laws  of  Nature 
embodied  by  the  Pour  Grand  Physical  Planes.  We  are 
encompassed  by  the  Laws  of  Nature,  and  exist  in  the 
midst  of  the  four  grand  planes  of  matter.  We  stand 
upon  the  solids,  feed  upon  the  liquids  and  gases,  and  use 
the  Ether  as  a  fluent  substance  to  convey  energy  in  mov- 
ing our  muscles,  including  every  expression  of  sensation. 

How  little  credit  we  have  given  to  this  all  important 
substance,  without  which  we  could  not  move,  breathe, 
think  or  feel. 


CHAPTER  V. 

THE  DUAL  PROCESS— WAKE  AND  SLEEP 
STATES. 

Every  visible  manifestation  is  the  result  of  energy 
spent.  Everything  is  maintained  in  activity  by  energy 
expending  or  held  by  inertia  in  the  sleep  state.  Each 
and  everything  has  its  dual  expression,  and  each  and 
everything  in  existence  is  a  result  of  motion  expressed 
somewhere,  between  absolute  silence  on  the  one  hand 
and  extreme  intensity  of  action  on  the  other.  Silence 
is  the  mother  and  action  the  father.  Herein  lies  the 
causal  condition  for  everything;  the  thing  itself  being 
a  compound  of  dual  expression.  The  dual  process  is  a 
working  toward  the  infinitesimal  center,  and  from  the 
infinitesimal  toward  the  infinitude. 

Whatever  comes  into  being  must  exist  somewhere 
between  these  points  and  partake  of  them  both,  with 
the  generality  of  leaning  to  one  or  the  other  side,  and 
toward  that  side  it  is  closest  allied. 

Everything  therefore  has  a  dual  inheritance,  and 
records  its  movements  and  character,  and  carries  with 
it  the  record  of  its  creation.  In  other  words,  everything 
is  a  miniature  photograph  of  its  creation  and  character. 

Every  constructed  form  whether  it  be  of  gross  con- 
densed matter,  vegetable  or  animated  form  has  its  begin- 
ning within  the  absolute,  a  dark  and  silent  center,  and 
from  that  infinitesimal  point  must  develop  into  being, 
by  evolving  toward  outer  space.  Any  movement  leading 
outward  is  a  movement  toward  endless  diversity,  so  that 
each  and  everything  coming  into  material  expression 
traverses  the  route  that  propels  it  to  multiplicity  and 


Wake  and  Sleep  States.  83 

diversity.  This  is  the  law  of  growth  which  provides  that 
there  are  no  two  things  in  all  the  world  exactly  alike. 
In  fact  where  growth  adheres  to  the  law,  it  is  impossible 
that  any  two  things  should  be  alike.  No  two  things  can 
come  out  of  one  and  the  same  center,  although  they  may 
happen  to  grow  side  by  side  and  consume  the  same  given 
time.  For  no  two  things  can  have  the  same  and  exact 
center  while  occupying  the  same  and  exact  plane  of 
existence. 

In  the  chapter  on  the  "Four  Grand  Physical  Planes" 
we  endeavored  to  show  how  one  state  of  matter  inter- 
penetrated the  other,  in  which  case  it  is  readily  seen 
that  all  interpenetrating  planes  might  rest  upon  the 
one  center.  But  it  is  quite  another  thing  when  bodies 
of  the  same  plane  of  existence,  or  of  like  substances, 
grow  side  by  side,  for  it  is  impossible  for  two  like  sub- 
stances to  interpenetrate  each  other. 

Anything  that  comes  into  being  and  develops  to  a 
state  expressing  a  higher  plane  of  action,  such  as  having 
the  power  of  re-generation,  it  then  becomes  a  species  or 
type,  and  the  type  extends  its  growth  to  diversity.  Each 
re-generation  of  a  type  maintains  the  line  of  its  estab- 
lished diversity  as  a  fixed  characteristic,  and  each 
re-generated  individual  inherits  the  type  expression. 
Nevertheless  each  individual  develops  his  individual 
characteristics  to  that  of  diversity,  because  the  indi- 
vidual, like  the  type  itself,  expresses  the  same  law  of 
growth.  Therefore,  although  of  the  same  type,  no  two 
individuals  can  develop  the  same  and  exact  charac- 
teristics. 

For  illustration,  we  have  two  oak  trees;  they  may  be 
the  same  kind  of  oak,  at  the  same  time  the  leaves  on  the 
one  would  appear  like  the  leaves  on  the  other,  but  when 


84  Chapter  V. 

closely  scrutinized  it  will  be  impossible  to  find  one  leaf 
duplicating  the  other  in  detail,  and  this  is  true  although 
the  search  is  confined  to  one  tree  instead  of  the  two. 
They  are  alike  in  character  but  not  alike  in  detail. 

The  reason  that  type  lines  are  established  and  main- 
tained is  because  each  type,  like  each  individual,  moves 
toward  the  active  and  diversity  side  in  development, 
and  is  maintained  to  the  type  line  because  of  the  ten- 
tative function  of  silence  and  immovability  of  the  mother 
side  of  the  type  line  expression.  In  other  words  activity 
tends  to  development  and  diversity,  while  inactivity 
tends  to  stability  and  adherence  to  the  type  expression. 
The  father  side  of  constructivity  always  leads  to  develop- 
ment and  diversity,  the  mother  side  always  holding  fast 
to  the  lines  established,  and  so  it  is  that  while  all  things 
advance,  everything  maintains  itself  in  its  own  char- 
acter distinctions.  Thus  all  things  are  bound  to  the 
wake  or  sleep  states  of  Nature,  or  both. 

The  active  state  is  Masculine,  and  the  silent  state  is 
Feminine,  which  means  that  a  thing  to  exist  must  of 
necessity  imply  the  condition  of  duality.  But  duality 
plain  and  simple  is  the  condition  of  extremes,  and  each 
and  every  character,  form  or  type,  must  be  within  the 
limits  of  the  extremes,  so  while  we  have  Masculine  and 
Feminine  expressions  they  are  only  tentatively  so.  In 
this  sense  we  have  no  absolute  Masculine  being  nor  have 
we  absolute  Feminine  being.  What  does  exist  is  a  com- 
bination of  both  Masculine  and  Feminine  with  a  ten- 
dency to  one  or  the  other  in  greater  or  lesser  degree. 
And  why  is  it  so  ?  Because  every  individual  has  his  dual 
inheritance,  and  as  such  is  not  a  progeny  of  one,  but 
of  both  Father  and  Mother. 

Each  and  everything  that  occupies  space  as  an  indi- 


Wake  and  Sleep  States.  85 

vidual  must  have  a  form  and  a  combination  composing 
that  form.  To  have  form  is  to  have  a  center  and  a  cir- 
cumference. The  center  must  be  the  exact  opposite  of  a 
circumference,  and  thus  each  individual  is  a  duality  in 
form.  If  the  individual  should  adhere  closer  to  the 
Masculine  than  the  Feminine,  he  would  be  called  Mascu- 
line. If  the  individual  shall  lean  toward  the  Feminine, 
she  would  be  called  Feminine. 

Each  and  every  individual  is  a  dual  expression  because 
every  individual  is  an  inheritance  of  a  duality — Father- 
Mother.  Individuality  takes  berth  when  the  dual  life 
lines  meet  at  re-generation.  Every  individual,  mentally 
speaking,  is  not  only  a  duality,  but  every  individual  lives 
a  dual  life,  as  he  swings  too  and  fro  in  his  daily  activity, 
from  wake  to  sleep,  and  from  sleep  to  wake.  In  the  day 
he  moves  in  the  wake  state  and  at  night  passes  to  the 
sleep  state.  And  so  all  physical  lives  are  a  constant 
vibration  from  one  state  of  existence  to  that  of  the  other. 

In  the  vegetable  kingdom,  the  warmth  of  summer  sets 
up  activity  and  the  frosts  of  the  winter  put  that  activity 
to  sleep  again,  so  in  the  vegetable  kingdom  the  annual 
process  is  from  the  wake  to  the  sleep  and  from  sleep  to 
wake.  The  wake  state  means  development  out  from  the 
center  to  constructivity.  When  frost  calls  it  to  winter's 
sleep,  it  ceases  action  and  records  its  season's  activity  in 
its  constructed  form,  of  fiber  and  seed. 

Thus  season  after  season  and  layer  after  layer  the  con- 
structivity goes  on.  All  forms  of  nature  are  builded 
under  the  vibratory  process  between  the  two  states  of 
existence.  It  records  character  in  individual  formation 
into  matter  by  energy  expended  and  focally  centers  its 
essence  of  that  record  and  character  in  its  re-generative 
center — its  seed. 


86  Chapter  V. 

Dual  lines  reach  back  deep  into  the  eternal  past.  The 
lines,  though  invisible,  are  none  the  less  real,  and  it  is 
from  these  lines  that  form  the  thread  of  life  to  which 
each  individual  primary  mind  and  character  is  woven — 
whether  it  be  vegetable,  animal  or  man.  No  individual 
is  complete  in  himeslf  alone,  as  he  represents  but  one 
gender  of  an  expression  that  requires  the  other  and  op- 
posite side  before  it  be  a  complete  unit. 

Every  physical  form  is  a  gender.  But  every  mind  is  a 
unit,  and  has  its  connecting  lines  reaching  down  through 
the  ages  of  the  past.  The  type  of  which  each  mental  unit 
is  a  part  is  held  by  dual  threads  which  is  more  fully 
covered  in  Chapter  X.  under  the  "Law  of  Heredity." 

The  phenomena  of  action  is  a  manifestation  of  Life. 
The  phenomena  of  sleep  is  the  temporary  pauses  of  action 
of  Life.  Life  is  a  principle — it  is  Energy  in  expression. 
In  activity  it  demands  more  space,  and  to  all  intents  and 
purposes  makes  a  greater  use  of  Time.  For  the  greater 
amount  of  movements  and  changes,  the  greater  amount 
of  duration  is  expressed.  Action  consumes  time  and  con- 
structs character,  record,  memory  and  matter.  While  on 
the  other  hand,  silence  creates  no  duration,  no  change, 
no  record,  no  matter,  and  to  all  intents  and  purposes  is 
inert  within  space.  And  as  to  Time,  it  is  a  blank.  Ten 
hours  in  the  active  wake  state  goes  into  making  ten 
hours  of  record  building.  While  ten  hours,  if  in  perfect 
sleep,  is  but  an  instant  to  that  of  which  the  sleep  applies. 
Why?  because  it  ceases  to  act,  it  ceases  to  record,  it 
ceases  to  be  operative.  It  has  but  two  events,  going  into 
the  silence,  and  coming  out,  with  all  the  time  while  in 
the  silence  a  blank.  Having  now  laid  these  facts  before 
your  mind  we  wish  to  emphasize  the  further  fact  that  one 
part  of  a  combination  can,  and  does  go  into  the  sleep 


Wake  and  Sleep  States.  87 

state,  while  the  other  part  of  a  combination  remains  in 
the  wake  state.  Thus  the  mind  may  go  to  sleep  while 
the  physical  body  remains  active  under  the  magnetic 
energization  of  its  consuming  and  reconstructing  process. 

Taking  into  consideration  the  mind :  that  part  of  the 
organization  that  is  most  susceptible  to  the  state  of  sleep, 
we  must  keep  before  us  the  fact  that  the  mind  has  its 
center  and  circumference  and  that  that  function  of  the 
mind  which  constitutes  memory  is  always  over  ninety- 
nine  per  cent  in  the  sleep  state.  That  there  is,  on  the 
other  hand,  that  portion  of  the  mind  we  call  imagination 
that  is  most  active,  far  reaching,  and  extensive,  and  less 
subjected  to  the  state  of  sleep,  so  much  so  that  while  the 
memory  and  reason  are  enwrapped  in  sleep  the  imagina- 
tion is  ofttimes  still  very  active.  It  is  not  wholly  drawn 
into  the  state  of  silence  or  sleep,  and  while  thus  expres- 
sing we  call  it  dreaming.  Dreaming  is  always  going  on, 
but  in  the  wake  state  its  activities  must  be  sent  to  the 
state  of  memory  over  the  function  of  reason,  which  serves 
to  build  a  concrete  mental  construction.  Imagination  is 
the  forager  of  the  mind.  It  is  exceedingly  fluent  and 
active.  Its  activities  may  be  said  to  be  the  expending  of 
mind  energy,  and  if  reason  is  in  the  rest  or  sleep  state 
the  activities  of  the  imagination  will  be  greater  than 
where  reason  is  in  the  wake  state,  because  reason  acts  as 
a  bar  of  judgment  and  resistance,  thus  restraining  the 
activities  of  the  imagination. 

This  phase  of  the  subject  will  be  treated  more  fully 
under  the  head  of  the  "Functions  of  the  Human  Mind," 
Chapter  XIV. 

The  human  mind  proper  is  accustomed  to  rest  in  the 
state  of  sleep  about  one  third  of  the  time.  That  is  to  say, 
it  is  active  twice  as  much  as  it  is  in  the  state  of  rest.  In 


88  Chapter  V. 

the  case  of  the  physical  body  the  energy  is  acting  all  the 
time,  consuming  cells  or  molecules  of  one  kind,  then 
constructing  to  other  molecules,  which  in  their  construc- 
tion, are  silent  for  a  time  in  their  development  and  then 
broken  down  and  eliminated.  But  while  this  work  is 
going  on,  the  body  as  a  form  is  never  in  the  state  of 
sleep  so  long  as  its  animated  energy  is  vibrating  within, 
but  the  molecules  of  which  it  is  composed  are. 

In  the  case  of  many  insects  the  body  goes  into  the  sleep 
state  as  well  as  the  mind  and  remains  in  that  state  of 
existence  from  three  to  six  months  of  the  year.  This 
characteristic  is  also  common  with  cold  blooded  reptiles, 
frogs,  lizzards,  etc.  In  cases  of  the  sleep  of  the  physical 
body  along  with  the  mind,  we  note  that  it  is  due  to  a 
temperature  environment.  Whep  the  temperature  drops 
toward  the  water  freezing  point  these  creatures  go  into 
the  sleep  state  and  remain  there  until  again  aroused  by 
returning  heat  waves.  It  is  not  an  uncommon  thing  to 
see.  frogs  hop  out  of  melting  ice  that  have  been  im- 
prisoned there  by  the  previous  autumn  freeze  and  remain 
unharmed,  to  thaw  out  when  the  ice  melts.  If  they  can 
remain  in  that  condition  six  to  eight  months  without 
experiencing  any  inconvenience,  why  not  a  longer  period  ? 

The  six  months'  winter  sleep  of  cold  blooded  creatures 
has  no  more  effect  upon  them  than  the  eight  hours'  sleep 
of  the  warm  blooded  animals,  excepting  in  the  case  of 
warm  blooded  animals  the  body  does  not  go  to  sleep  with 
the  mind,  and  the  state  of  sleep  cannot  be  so  complete. 

In  the  case  of  mental  sleep  two  events  take  place.  One 
is  going  into  the  silence,  the  other  is  coming  out,  with 
all  the  time  between  the  two  events  a  blank.  And  when 
no  events  take  place,  no  change  takes  place,  and  when 
no  change  takes  place,  the  time  is  as  if  entirely  elim- 
inated. 


Wake  and  Sleep  States.  89 

If  there  is  no  change  to  the  mind  that  sleeps,  there 
certainly  is  no  change  to  the  body  during  its  winter's 
sleep ;  since  it,  like  the  mind  undergoes  but  two  events : 
passing  to  inactivity  and  coming  back  to  action  again. 
Furthermore  the  body  that  sleeps,  usually  sleeps  in  a 
frozen  condition,  which  further  insures  it  against  a 
process  of  decomposition.  In  the  case  where  a  perfect 
continuous  state  or  condition  is  maintained,  there  is  no 
reason  why  the  usual  six  months'  sleep  could  not  be  ex- 
tended into  years.  And  why  not,  for  perfect  sleep  means 
permanent  fixity  for  the  time  being.  In  other  words,  no 
change  means  no  disorganization. 

There  is  a  varied  difference  in  the  physical  bodies  of 
the  different  type  expressions  in  their  extent  and  manner 
of  wakefulness  while  the  mind  is  asleep.  The  physical 
bodies  of  warm  blooded  animals  do  not  sleep,  they  are 
ever  active.  The  heart  and  arteries  continue  to  pulsate. 
The  blood  and  nerve  fluid  constantly  flows.  The  respir- 
ation does  not  cease.  Strange  as  it  may  seem  the  physical 
body  is  always  on  guard  to  approaching  danger.  Most 
of  the  animals  lie  down  when  they  sleep,  some  can 
readily  sleep  while  standing  on  their  feet,  like  that  of 
the  horse  type. 

Rabbits  sleep  with  their  eyes  open  and  readily  see 
danger  as  it  approaches  them.  In  cases  of  this  kind  the 
physical  body  stands  guard  over  the  sleeping  mind  to 
arouse  it  when  danger  threatens.  Most  all  animals  have 
their  ears  on  guard  all  the  time  to  threatening  danger, 
and  seldom  fail  to  arouse  the  sleeping  soul  within.  The 
physical  body  can  even  be  charged  with  a  duty  to  arouse 
the  slumbering  mind  within,  at  any  given  time  that  the 
mind  might  suggest  on  entering  the  sleep  state,  and  it 


90  Chapter  V. 

seldom  fails  to  give  the  signal  at  the  time  fixed  upon. 
The  individual  mind  gives  the  suggestion  and  it  is  the 
individual  mind  that  is  aroused.  If  not  by  the  physical 
body,  then  it  certainly  is  by  the  immortal  soul  within. 

Before  departing  from  the  question  of  mental  sleep 
there  are  a  few  peculiarities  we  wish  to  mention.  Nature 
seems  to  favor  darkness  and  cold  for  natural  states  of 
sleep.  First  because  darkness  is  negative  and  cold  is  also 
negative.  But  not  all  creatures  live  strictly  to  that  rule. 
Some  animals  sleep  at  night,  others  at  day  time,  and  as 
a  usual  thing  animals  that  sleep  in  the  night  time  are 
more  peaceable  and  docile.  The  night  sleepers  usually 
raise  the  palms  of  their  feet  at  an  upward  inclination 
and  roam  about  during  the  day  time.  While  the  night 
roaming  animals  sleep  during  the  day  with  the  palms 
of  their  feet  flat  upon  the  ground,  and  are  momentarily 
prepared  to  spring  to  flight  in  self  defense,  or  to  jump 
upon  their  prey  that  may  happen  to  come  near  them. 
Calling  your  attention  now  to  the  material  world,  or 
more  strictly  speaking  basic  matter,  we  have  this  to  say : 

In  the  arts  and  sciences  our  endeavor  is  to  work  the 
metals  of  matter  by  refining  them  down  to  their  own 
specific  ingredients,  which  become  the  more  perfect  as 
such,  the  nearer  they  are  brought  to  the  state  of  sleep  or 
rest.  In  other  words  a  state  to  which  they  offer  the 
greatest  amount  of  resistance  to  change.  One  of  our 
precious  metals  when  reaching  that  state  we  call  pure 
gold.  Ordinary  iron  in  its  original  form  is  worth  one 
cent  per  pound,  but  when  refined  down  to  its  most  specific 
character  becomes  seven  hundred  times  its  original  value 
because  of  its  increased  power  of  resistance.  And  in  this 
increased  power  of  resistance  lies  the  virtue  of  its  utility 
in  the  manufacture  of  tools  that  may  be  used  to  chisel, 


Wake  and  Sleep  States.  91 

carve  and  work  down  other  materials  that  are  in  the  sleep 
state  of  Nature,  with  a  less  tenacious  resistance.  Such 
metals  are  susceptible  to  take  on  records  of  refinement 
known  to  the  arts  as  tempering.  A  piece  of  steel  passed 
through  the  process  of  high  tempering  and  toughening, 
which  is  a  still  deeper  state  of  sleep,  raises  its  power  of 
resistance  so  much  greater  as  to  enable  the  latter  metal 
to  cut  the  same  metal  with  this  temper  lacking. 

We  are  well  aware  of  the  fact  that  the  scientific  world 
claims  there  is  nothing  in  a  perfect  state  of  rest.  Regard- 
less of  what  they  have  fixed  in  their  minds  we  positively 
know  that  all  things  are,  to  a  greater  or  less  degree,  in 
a  state  of  rest  or  sleep.  If  this  were  not  true,  how  could 
we  place  temper  in  steel  and  keep  it  there?  Every 
mechanic  knows  that  steel  properly  prepared  to  take  on 
and  maintain  perfect  record  and  character,  is  susceptible 
to  any  state  of  vibratory  activity  under  heat  waves  and 
/when  suddenly  plunged  into  cold  water,  or  in  other 
words  suddenly  put  to  sleep,  it  locks  up  its  wave  motions 
and  keeps  them  permanently.  A  mechanic  also  knows 
that  temper  in  steel  is  solidified  waves,  and  that  they  can 
be  made  very  short  or  be  drawn  out  to  any  length,  and 
that  the  length  of  the  wave  records  in  the  steel  determines 
its  relative  toughness,  and  that  it  runs  down  over  the 
seven  colors  from  a  white  through  light  straw  color  to 
brown  and  blue. 

When  a  child  I  was  told  that  a  revolving  shaft  or  a 
locomotive  tire  would  crystallize  in  time  because  made  up 
of  constant  whirling  molecules  that  had  polar  activity. 
That  the  molecules  of  the  iron  would  always  point  north 
and  south  no  matter  how  fast  the  iron  itself  was  made 
to  turn.  That  because  of  the  movement  of  these  molecules 
to  keep  in  range  with  the  earth's  poles  caused  the  iron 


92  Chapter  V. 

to  crystalize,  and  that  they  had  to  be  subjected  to  heat  in 
order  to  restore  them  to  their  original  harmonious  and 
tenacious  position  again.  We  find  this  is  not  the  reason 
that  iron  is  crystalized,  but  that  the  fact  is  the  reverse. 

Iron  becomes  crystalized  when  it  is  disturbed  from  its 
state  of  rest — its  state  of  sleep.  It  is  not  because  it  re- 
volves, but  because  of  the  constant  vibration.  Its  con- 
stant state  of  activity  breaks  up  its  record  and  dis- 
organizes it  to  a  state  of  crystallization.  It  must  now  be 
reheated  and  restored  to  its  normal  state  of  rest,  for  it  is 
in  the  fact  of  its  resistance  to  change  that  gives  it  the 
value  for  what  it  is  used.  Leaving  the  metal  question  at 
this  point,  we  wish  to  call  your  attention  to  another 
phase  of  the  sleep  state,  as  found  in  vegetable  life. 

Energy  working  its  way  through  vegetable  life  con- 
structs carbon  and  carbon  is  found  to  be  very  closely 
allied  to  the  sleep,  state,  so  much  so  that  it  requires  great 
heat  to  break  it  up.  When  carbon  is  thoroughly  refined 
it  requires  more  and  more  heat  to  melt  it.  If  we  should 
continue  the  process  we  come  to  a  point  where  it  is  diffi- 
cult ta  break  down  or  change.  The  diamond  is  probably 
the  deepest  point  that  energy  passing  through  the  vege- 
table kingdom  is  susceptible.  We  admire  the  diamond 
as  the  sleep  state  of  vegetable  activity. 

Where  nature  has  been  instrumental  in  suspending 
energy  through  the  vegetable  lines  to  the  diamond,  we 
are  mindful  of  the  process  in  the  elements  of  its  construc- 
tion, for  we  are  always  enabled  to  note  that  the  greater 
duration  of  Time  that  is  consumed ;  in  other  words  the 
slower  the  process  the  closer  it  adheres  to  the  sleep  state, 
and  in  like  measure  offers  the  greater  amount  of  resist- 
ance to  change.  In  the  case  of  the  artificial  diamond, 
it  looks  like  the  natural  with  the  element  of  Time  lack- 


Wake  and  Sleep  States.  93 

ing.  The  evidence  is  that  Time  in  the  sleep  state,  even 
though  a  blank,  has  a  constant  tendency  to  deepen  the 
state  of  sleep  by  the  process  making  it  more  and  more 
enduring. 

Everything  is  in  motion  but  not  as  to  itself.  Strictly 
speaking,  everything  is  in  motion  relative  to  most  other 
things.  For  illustration,  a  ship  is  in  motion  relative  to 
the  water,  the  world  and  universe,  but  not  relative  to 
itself  or  it  would  not  long  remain  a  ship. 

Everything  that  comes  into  existence  has  moved  into 
being  out  of  its  nucleus  center,  and  everything  bears  its 
own  record  of  movement  and  character ;  thus  everything 
is  in  the  record  and  image  of  its  own  creator — creation. 

Record  and  character  is  always  in  the  sleep  state.  If 
record  or  character  changed  it  would  no  longer  be  record 
or  character.  The  sleep  part  of  a  thing  is  the  soul  of 
the  thing. 

The  seed  is  a  focal  junction  joining  one  generation  to 
the  next.  It  is  focal  because  it  is  a  point  at  which  the 
male  and  female  dual  lines  merge.  Seed  is  the  sleep 
state  of  record  and  character  it  represents,  brought  out 
of  surplus  energy  and  condensed  into  silent  intensity. 
It  is  potential  qualification  ready  to  express.  When 
placed  in  darkness  and  stimulated  it  awakens  to  a  state 
of  action  again.  This  process  goes  on  constantly  in  its 
work  of  maintaining  and  reconstructing  the  physical 
body,  as  well  as  having  started  it. 

In  the  process  of  regenerating  life,  we  note  how  im- 
portant it  is  to  resort  to  the  sleep  state.  The  successful 
hatching  of  an  egg  depends  upon  allowing  the  egg  to 
cool  down  at  intervals  that  the  embryo  chick  shall  have 
a  chance  to  rest.  Truly  speaking  living  is  a  pendulum  in 
action  always  swinging  between  points  of  rest. 


CHAPTER  VI. 
ASTRONOMICAL  SCIENCE. 

Astronomical  Science  is  the  most  perfect  of  all  the 
known  sciences.  It  is  the  aristocracy  of  all  sciences,  yet 
there  is  much  more  to  be  learned,  much  more  to  be 
accounted  for. 

Astronomical  calculations  give  us  undisputed  measure- 
ments of  planets,  their  distance  from  the  central  Sun, 
their  distance  from  each  other,  the  speed  at  which  they 
each  rotate  on  their  axes  as  well  as  the  speed  and  dis- 
tance each  travel  as  they  revolve  around  the  Sun.  And 
this  is  done  with  such  precision  and  accuracy  as  to  en- 
able the  calculators  to  tell  years  ahead  where  each  planet 
will  be,  when  they  shall  cross  in  conjunction  one  with 
the  other,  and  in  a  like  measure  of  accuracy  tell  when 
an  eclipse  will  occur  and  where  the  shadow  will  appear 
and  where  it  will  make  its  transit,  to  the  exact  place  and 
to  the  exact  moment  it  will  occur,  as  well  as  to  the 
elapsed  time  of  the  occurrence. 

To  the  Astronomical  Scientists  we  humbly  bow  in 
reverence  for  the  wonderful  truths  they  have  given  the 
world. 

The  statements  we  make  relative  to  the  size  of  planets, 
their  number  and  distance  from  each  other,  are  obtained 
by  reference  to  the  various  works  on  astronomical 
science,  wherein  they  all  practically  agree.  The  work 
they  have  done  and  the  amount  of  success  they  have  ac- 
complished is  of  untold  value  to  us  in  our  work.  The 
discoveries  they  have  made  in  viewing  the  heavens  and 
the  unerring  results  that  by  mathematical  calculations 
they  have  attained,  should  be  placed,  not  as  a  theory,  but 


Astronomical  Science.  95 

in  the  catagory  of  exact  science.  Therefore  we  head  this 
chapter  "Astronomical  Science." 

In  the  various  works  on  astronomy,  of  which  there  are 
nine  or  more,  aside  from  direct  observations  and  true 
mathematical  conclusions  and  subsequent  proofs,  the  best 
they  offer  are  theories,  which  they  later  abandon  giving 
assent  to  new  theories,  as  they  are  advanced. 

We  think  one  of  the  drawbacks  to  astronomical  work 
has  been  that  so  much  of  it  was  done  without  the  proper 
application  of  mechanical  law,  for  had  the  extended 
effort  been  made,  not  upon  the  application  of  theory  but 
upon  actual  test  and  with  an  understanding  of  the 
laws  of  motion,  it  would  have  found  its  way  to  facts  in- 
stead of  theories. 

Our  efforts  will  be  to  apply  the  laws  of  motion  to  facts 
already  attained,  and  by  an  analyzation  of  the  theories 
in  the  light  of  the  laws  applied,  determine  and  extend 
these  theories  into  actuality  or  eliminate  them  for  lack 
of  premises. 

It  is  conceded  by  all  astronomers,  whose  deductions 
are  entitled  to  bear  that  name,  that  suns  and  planets 
came  into  existence  through  a  nebulous  process.  But 
from  that  point  they  offer  several  different  theories  as 
to  the  formation  of  astronomical  systems.  When  the 
application  of  mechanical  law  is  understood  and  applied, 
it  at  once  rejects  a  theory  not  in  conformity  therewith, 
which  the  reader  will  recognize  as  we  pass  along. 

The  leading  scientists  agree  that  the  Sun  gives  off  its 
heat  and  light  by  gradual  shrinkage  in  size  and  that  its 
present  bulk  will  be  sufficient  to  maintain  Heat  and 
Light  for  twenty  million  years.  That  it  revolves  on  its 
axis  because  of  its  once  having  started  by  a  nebulous 
vortex,  which  set  up  a  revolution  as  the  nebular  mass 


96  Chapter  VI. 

approached  its  center  of  motion,  and  separated  into  rings 
at  various  distances  out  from  the  center  on  account  of 
the  inability  of  the  outer  rings  to  keep  up  with  the  inner 
rings  because  of  the  greater  distance  the  outer  rings 
must  travel,  each  ring  like  that  of  the  center,  or  parent 
ring,  rolls  itself  up  into  an  independent  unit,  and  pro- 
duces in  like  manner  satellites  or  mo'ons  that  revolve 
around  them,  and  these  planets  including  the  central 
Sun  having  once  come  into  motion  in  their  formation, 
ever  continue  to  move  without  ceasing.  It  is  upon  these 
questions  that  we  wish  to  draw  your  attention  and  at  the 
same  time  set  up  a  system  of  our  own  conclusion.  In 
the  first  place,  we  wish  to  state  that  the  movements  out- 
lined in  the  nebular  process  are  according  to  mechanical 
law,  but  when  we  confront  the  fact  that  planets  revolve 
in  the  direction  they  rotate,  we  have  a  new  thought  to 
consider.  Since  it  is  pointed  out  that  outer  rings  revolve 
slower  than  the  inner,  on  account  of  the  greater  distance 
to  travel,  it  also  logically  follows  that  the  outer  portion 
of  a  ring  of  a  flexible  mass  would  travel  slower  than  the 
inner  edge  of  the  ring,  so  that  where  a  planet  rolls  up 
out  of  a  nebulous  ring  the  inside  would  travel  faster 
around  the  common  center  and  roll  the  planet  in  an  op- 
posite direction  to  the  way  it  revolves.  But  this  move- 
ment the  planets  do  not  take;  in  fact,  they  rotate  op- 
posite to  what  such  a  formation  would  produce. 

It  is  conceded  that  all  space  is  filled  with  Ether  and 
that  the  planets  float  in  Ether,  but  if  Ether  does  not 
itself  move  there  would  be  a  continued  resistance  which 
Fould  constantly  reduce  the  movements  of  planets  to  a 
final  standstill,  and  this  is  the  principle  that  embraces 
facts  that  we  cannot  overlook. 

In  regard  to  the  shrinking  of  the  Sun,  being  the 


Astronomical  Science.  97 

source  of  continued  Heat  and  Light,  we  must  agree  that 
Heat  passing  off  from  a  body  will  shrink  it,  but  that  a 
shrinking  body  on  that  account  will  not  give  rise  to 
incandescent  heat.  Therefore,  we  need  give  our  reasons 
why  planets  revolve ;  why  they  rotate  in  the  same  direc- 
tion that  they  revolve;  why  each  planet  rotates  on  its 
own  and  different  time  from  that  of  every  other;  why  the 
Sun  gives  off  its  Heat  and  Light ;  and  why  it  rotates  on 
its  axis ;  how  Heat  and  Light  is  reproduced  and  the  part 
Light  plays  in  protecting  planets  as  well  as  maintaining 
their  respective  distances  in  space,  and  how  Light  per- 
forms its  part  in  rotating  planets  on  their  axes. 

WHAT  is  A  SOLAR  SYSTEM? 

A  Solar  System  is  a  Sun  with  its  group  of  planets 
revolving  around  it.  All  fixed  stars  are  Suns  and  there 
are  at  least  130,000,000  Suns  and  Solar  Systems,  some 
of  which  are  much  older  and  larger  than  our  own,  within 
the  reach  of  our  telescopes. 

A  Sun  is  always  the  center  of  a  system  and  it  re- 
volves on  its  axis  in  the  same  direction  as  the  planets 
within  that  system. 

All  planets  in  our  solar  system  revolve  on  a  plane  in 
line  with  the  equator  of  the  Sun,  and  vibrate  endwise 
and  about  two  per  cent  elliptical.  Each  planet  has  its 
own  path  or  orbit  to  revolve  and  rotate  in,  and  all 
planets  from  our  Earth  outward  have  from  one  to  eight 
moons  that  revolve  around  them  in  the  direction  the 
planets  rotate. 

SIZE  AND  MOTION  OF  OUR  SUN  AND  PLANETS. 

The  Sun  is  866,000  miles  in  diameter.  Eevolves  upon 
its  axis  from  west  to  east  in  25  to  28  days.  Its  surface 
travel  is  about  4,500  miles  per  hour. 


98  Chapter  VI. 

MERCURY. 

Mercury  is  the  first  planet  out  from  the  Sun,  a  dis- 
tance of  36,000,000  miles.  Is  3,000  miles  in  diameter 
and  revolves  from  west  to  east  around  the  Sun  in  88 
days  and  on  its  axis  in  the  same  direction  every  24  hours 
and  5  minutes. 

VENUS. 

Venus  is  the  second  planet  out  from  the  Sun,  a  dis- 
tance of  67,000,000  miles.  It  is  7,600  miles  in  diameter 
and  revolves  around  the  Sun  from  west  to  east  in  224 
days  and  on  its  axis  in  the  same  direction  every  23  hours 
and  16  minutes. 

EARTH. 

Earth  is  the  third  planet  in  order,  and  is  out  from 
the  Sun  93,000,000  miles.  Is  8,000  miles  in  diameter 
and  revolves  from  west  to  east  around  the  Sun  in  365  1-4 
days  and  rotates  on  its  axis  in  the  same  direction  in  23 
hours  and  56  minutes.  It  has  a  moon  which  stands  out 
from  the  Earth  240,000  miles  that  revolves  around  it  in 
about  28  days.  The  moon  does  not  rotate  upon  its  axis 
but  remains  fixed,  one  side  always  towards  the  earth  and 
in  its  trip  around  the  earth  has  its  center  of  motion  about 
15,000  miles  outside  the  surface  of  the  earth  nearest  the 
moon.  The  moon  falls  back  of  the  rotation  of  the  earth 
23  hours  and  10  minutes  per  day  on  account  of  the 
greater  distance  it  has  to  travel. 

MARS. 

Mars  is  the  fourth  planet  out  from  the  Sun,  a  distance 
of  141.000,000  miles.  It  is  4,200  miles  in  diameter. 
Revolves  around  the  Sun  from  west  to  east  in  687  days 
and  rotates  on  its  axis  in  same  direction  every  24  hours 
and  16  minutes.  Mars  has  two  moons. 


Astronomical  Science.  99 

ASTEROIDS. 

The  Ast«roids  are  a  group  of  small  planets  ranging 
from  228  miles  in  diameter  down  to  that  of  invisible 
objects.  They  constitute  a  broken  ring  which  in  all 
probability  failed  to  roll  up  into  a  planet  with  moons. 
The  Asteroids  lay  out  from  the  Sun  250,000,000  miles 
and  make  their  revolution  around  the  Sun  from  west 
to  east  in  about  5*/2  years.  The  Asteroids  represent 
that  Nature  has  its  failures  or  accidents  as  against  many 
successes.  Being  one  out  of  the  nine  rings  that  failed 
to  roll  up  into  a  planet. 

JUPITER. 

Jupiter  is  the  sixth  planet  in  order  and  is  out  from 
the  Sun  a  distance  of  480,000,000  miles.  It  is  86,000 
miles  in  diameter  and  revolves  around  the  Sun  from 
west  to  east  in  12  years  and  rotates  on  its  axis  in  the 
same  direction  every  9  hours  and  45  minutes.  Jupiter 
has  four  moons. 

SATURN. 

Saturn  is  the  seventh  planet  in  order  and  is  out  from 
the  Sun  882,000,000  miles.  It  is  70,000  miles  in  diam- 
eter and  revolves  around  the  Sun  from  west  to  east  in 
29*/2  years  and  rotates  on  its  axis  in  the  same  direction 
every  10  hours  and  14  minutes.  Saturn  has  two  rings 
around  it  and  eight  moons. 

URANUS. 

"Uranus  is  the  eighth  planet  in  order  and  is  out  from 
the  Sun  a  distance  of  1,750,000,000  miles.  It  is  32,000 
miles  in  diameter  and  revolves  around  the  Sun  from  west 
to  east  in  84  years.  On  account  of  its  enormous  distance 
its  rotation  has  not  been  ascertained.  Uranus  has  four 
moons. 


100  Chapter  VI. 

NEPTUNE. 

Neptune  is  the  ninth  planet  in  order  out  from  the 
Sun  and  is  at  the  enormous  distance  of  two  billion  seven 
hundred  and  fifty  millions  of  miles.  Like  Uranus  its 
distance  away  from  us  is  so  great  that  the  direction  of 
its  rotation  is  not  as  yet  ascertained.  It  is  35,000  miles 
in  diameter,  it  has  one  moon  and  takes  165  of  our  years 
to  make  its  revolution  around  the  Sun. 

TABLE  OF  PLANETS  OF  OUR  SOLAR  SYSTEM. 
Sun,  866,000  miles  in  diameter,  rotates  on  its  axis 
in  25  to  28  days. 


Planet 

Mercury 

Venus 

Earth 

Mars 

Asteroids  (about  600) 

Jupiter 

Saturn 

Uranus 

Neptune 


Miles  in 
Diameter 

3,000 

7,600 

8,000 

4,200 

228 

86,000 

70,000 

32,000 

35,000 


Period  of 
Rotation 

24  hrs.     5  min. 
23hrs.  16  min. 

23  hrs.  56  min. 

24  hrs.  37  min. 

9  hrs.  45  min. 
10  hrs.  14  min. 


Planet 
Mercury. . 

Venus 

Earth 

Mars 

Asteroids , 
Jupiter. . . 
Saturn . . . 
Uranus. . . 
Neptune. 


Distance 
from  Sun 

36,000,000 
.  67,000,000 
,  93,000,000 
.  141,000,000 
250,000,000 
,  480,000,000 
.  882,000,000 
.1,750,000,000 
,2,750,000,000 


No.  of 

Moons 


Period  of 
Revolution 

88     days 
224     days 
365*4  days 
687     days 
5%  years 
12     years 
29^  years 
84     years 
165     years 


CHAPTER  VII. 
THE  NEW  ASTRONOMY. 

A   SYSTEM  IN  ACCORD  WITH  MECHANICAL 
LAWS. 

A    MECHANICAL    SYSTEM — WHAT    ARE    SUN  SPOTS — 
SHOOTING  STARS  OR  METEORS — COMETS. 

A  thing  coming  into  being  must  do  so  from  a  point 
of  start  and  in  a  process  of  gradual  development,,  which 
means  from  a  point  of  exceeding  minuteness.  The  pro- 
cess of  development  therefore  is  from  an  infinitesimal 
point  toward  outer  space — a  circumference. 

Something  cannot  be  produced  from  nothing,  and  in 
order  to  have  production  there  must  be  a  cosmic  source. 
What  we  are  constrained  to  accept  as  a  Thing,  is  Matter, 
and  Matter  is  expended  Energy. 

The  constructive  process  of  Matter  is  to  build  from  a 
minute  point  to  which  Energy  centers  and  from  that 
point  outward.  And  this  is  just  what  takes  place  in 
the  process  of  construction  of  all  forms  of  Matter  wher- 
ever found. 

Energy  suspending  upon  a  common  center  constructs 
a  thing  of  Matter,  and  while  the  development  proceeds, 
we  most  naturally  conclude  that  the  Energy  giving  it 
existence  is  still  supplying  it  from  without  to  the  within. 
If  it  maintains  motion  it  must  do  so  at  the  expenditure 
of  Energy,  and  hence  the  force  that  creates  a  thing  main- 
tains its  motion  thereafter. 

Substance  of  whatsoever  kind  must  be  constructed 
from  a  force  expended,  while  force  must  depend  upon 


102  Chapter  VII. 

leverage  principles,  within  the  Laws  of  Nature  behind 
it.  This  fact  we  have  endeavored  to  analyze  under  the 
chapter  on  "Source  of  Cosmic  Energy." 

Matter  is  a  combination,  that  always  bears  records  of 
past  movements  and  environments  with  its  own  peculiar 
character. 

Tn  the  inorganic  and  baser  stage  Matter  could  have 
little  or  no  character.  But  when  it  has  gone  over  re- 
peated stages  it  takes  on  extended  character  because  of 
the  invisible  movement  and  environment  records  of  its 
past.  It  does  not  matter  what  stage  of  character 
the  combination  attains,  it  must  go  through  the  one  and 
same  process  necessary  to  material  construction,  which 
accords  with  the  Laws  of  motion.  So  we  repeat :  Matter 
is  constructed  from  suspending  Energy  from  without  to 
the  within,  and  that  matter  is  from  a  center  and  takes 
on  form  as  it  extends  outward. 

What  we  really  see  of  creation  is  the  sleep  state  of  it, 
an  exceedingly  small  portion  compared  to  that  which  we 
cannot  see ;  and  when  that  state  of  existence  comes  into 
manifestation,  like  all  others,  it  is  bound  to  follow  the 
process  of  fundamental  principles. 

In  order  for  a  thing  of  substance  to  express  being,  it 
must  be  by  concentration  and  condensation,  which  is  for 
the  forces  to  inwind  toward  a  selected  center,  where  the 
inwinding  causes  a  nucleus  to  be  established — as  that 
center  of  motion. 

The  law  of  Affinity,  or  its  feminine  side,  Gravity,  ex- 
isted before  the  nucleus,  or  else  no  nucleus  could  have 
been  established. 

Each  grain  of  sand  has  within  it  its  measure  of  the 
unlimited  and  omnipresent  Law's  embrace.  And  each 
grain  of  sand  added  to  the  nucleus  extends  its  equal 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  103 

measure  of  expressing  the  further  force  of  gravity.  So 
that  when  a  center  is  once  established  it  becomes  a  mag- 
net center  to  further  draw  supply  from  without,  which 
increases  the  attraction  as  it  increases  in  size,  and 
thereby  becomes  an  agent  of  its  own  construction  with  a 
compound  capacity  of  further  and  further  extension  and 
larger  capacity.  Each  thing  therefore  is  possessed  with 
the  principle  of  perpetual  motion,  with  perpetual  in- 
creasing propensities. 

The  astronomical  teachers  have  practically  all  agreed 
that  planets  are  formed  by  a  nebulous  process,  which  is 
to  say  that  star  dust  accumulating  in  space  produced  a 
condition  where  it  took  on  a  specific  center,  and  as  the 
Law  of  gravity  existed  everywhere  throughout  endless 
space,  any  point  where  there  should  be  congregated  a 
considerable  quantity  of  this  star  dust  would  have  the 
effect  of  establishing  a  gravity  center  and  attract  the 
surrounding  star  dust  particles  toward  that  center.  This 
centering  established  an  inwhirling  motion,  and  when 
once  started  forever  thereafter  continued.  That  the 
inwinding  particles,  because  of  the  increased  expression 
of  gravity,  extended  farther  into  space  as  its  central  body 
accumulated  by  the  influx  of  star  dust  and  its  increased 
central  pressure,  together  with  the  friction  caused  by 
the  pressure  and  the  winding  together  of  the  particles 
of  star  dust,  created  intense  heat.  Thus  a  sun  came  into 
existence.  A  glowing  ball  of  fiery  liquid  matter. 

The  astronomical  scientists  agree  that  the  universe  has 
untold  millions  of  suns,  some  of  which  are  larger  than 
that  of  our  sun,  and  that  there  are  no  less  than  130,- 
000,000  of  them  within  the  range  of  our  telescopes ;  and 
an  incomprehensible  number  outside  the  range  of  our 
vision. 


104  Chapter  VII. 

They  not  only  set  up  this  seemingly  plausible  theory, 
but  have  photographed  the  heavens  and  discovered  that 
there  are  more  than  one  just  such  nebulous  formation 
going  on  at  the  present  time,  as  set  forth  in  the  pre- 
ceeding  paragraphs. 

Up  to*  this  point  we  can  fully  agree  with  their  hypoth- 
esis. What  they  teach  outside  of  that  contains  theories 
we  cannot  endorse  as  having  the  support  of  the  Natural 
Law. 

There  are  several  theories  offered  to  the  world  how 
planets  other  than  the  suns  came  into  existence.  We 
will  briefly  explain  a  few  of  the  theories  approved  by 
the  world  for  at  least  two  centuries. 

One  theory  is  that  when  a  sun  grows  to  considerable 
size  the  influx  of  nebula  sets-  up  such  a  tremendous 
whirl  of  the  central  body  of  the  sun  that  it  throws  off 
into  space  a  small  portion  of  itself,  which  portion  rounds 
up  into  a  ball  or  globe  and  being  hot,  like  the  sun, 
remains  hot  and  shines  out  a  minature  sun  for  ages  until 
it  cools  down,  forming  a  crust  upon  its  surface,  and 
thereafter  becomes  an  opaque  globe.  That  on  the  ac- 
count of  centrifugal  force  it  was  at  first  pitched  out  into 
space  until  the  force  throwing  it  out  became  expended, 
whereupon  it  came  to  a  counter-balance  with  the  at- 
traction of  the  sun  and  could  go  no  farther  out,  but  in 
its  counter-balanced  state  it  kept  on  moving  and  rotat- 
ing, and  as  it  could  get  no  farther  it  maintained  its 
motion  around  the  sun  in  an  elliptical  circle,  swinging  to 
and  fro,  first  with  a  great  variation,  which  became 
less  and  less  until  it  now  revolves  in  nearly  a  perfect 
circle.  In  the  case  of  our  earth  this  variation  is  about 
two  per  cent  out  of  a  perfect  circle. 

When  the  sun  grew  larger  it  again  set  up  its  intense 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  105 

whirl  and  pitched  out  another  segment.  The  first  por- 
tion pitched  off  gave  us  Neptune,  which  flew  out  2,750,- 
000,000  miles.  The  second  discharge  gave  us  the  planet 
Uranus,  which  flew  out  1,750,000,000  miles,  and 
there  took  up  its  circle  around  the  sun,  and  the  process 
of  inwinding  nebula  continued  until  the  planet  Saturn 
was  thrown  off.  Then  following  that,  Jupiter,  and  later 
the  Asteroids.  Then  Mars,  our  Earth,  Venus,  and  lastly 
Mercury.  , 

It  is  assumed  that  nebula  rolling  into  a  center  formed 
our  Sun  which,  on  account  of  its  accumulated  pressure 
and  friction,  became  a  molten  globe  of  fire.  And  so 
intense  was  its  whirling  and  heat  that  it  has  kept  on 
whirling  and  will  remain  hot  for  20,000,000  of  years 
to  come. 

The  inwhirling  of  nebula  would  produce  a  pressure  as 
the  Law  of  gravity  became  expressed,  and  its  turmoil 
would  cause  friction  and  heat,  just  as  this  same  Law 
gives  expression  now.  The  questions  are:  How  could 
friction  cause  such  intense  heat  and  how  could  motion 
be  maintained  unless  the  agencies  that  gave  them  ex- 
pression are  still  in  operation  ?  The  astronomical  theory 
set  out  above,  claims  that  the  heat  is  dying  down  and 
that  the  sun  will  become  a  dead  and  cold  body  some 
time  within  20,000,000  years. 

The  sun  in  fact  is  not  acting  upon  its  initiative,  not 
cooling  off  nor  ceasing  its  speed  of  rotation,  and  it  never 
will.  This  is  the  first  statement  ever  made,  so  far  as 
we  know,  that  claims  perpetual  and  endless  resources  for 
our  central  sun,  and  we  can  prove  what  we  say  by 
Nature's  Laws. 

We  deny  the  theory  that  the  sun  gave  birth  to  the 
planets  around  it  by  throwing  off  parts  of  itself  on  ac- 


106  Chapter  VII. 

count  of  its  own  intense  revolution.  First,  because  the 
propelling  force  is  from  without  and  not  from  within. 
It  is  not  like  the  water  being  thrown  off  from  a  grind- 
stone that  is  driven  by  a  crank  attached  to  its  center, 
but  must  be  revolved  from  an  outside  nebulous  pressure 
that  has  a  tendency  to  hold  it  toward  its  center  in  pro- 
portion to  the  inwhirl  and  the  law  of  gravity  drawing 
it  in. 

The  Laws  of  motion  provide  centrifugal  force,  and  if 
the  inertia  is  great  enough  it  will  throw  a  portion  of  its 
body  out  into  space.  But  this  is  never  done  unless  the 
motion  is  sufficient  to  overcome  gravity,  and  this  cannot 
take  place  unless  the  energy  is  supplied  from  the  central 
body.  The  nebulous  inpouring  would  increase  gravity 
as  the  body  grew,  and  this  fact  would  maintain  the  body 
intact  no  matter  how  large  it  grew.  But  it  is  speaking 
without  thought  to  say  an  inflow  will  furnish  motion 
enough  to  overcome  gravity  and  pitch  a  portion  of  a 
planet  body  into  space  2,750,000,000  miles!  For  the 
reason  that  gravity  draws  in  the  nebula  and  the  indraw- 
ing  rotates  the  body  in  line  with  the  nebulous  flow,  and 
as  the  added  bulk  increases  the  force  of  gravity,  it  in- 
creases its  capacity  to  hold,  rather  than  to  throw  off. 

There  is  such  a  thing  as  working  on  the  hydraulic  ram 
process,  where  a  large  waste  can  center  its  force  upon 
a  small  portion  and  outbalance  it,  in  the  manner  that 
a  big  ball  can  raise  a  small  ball  from  the  short  end  of  a 
lever,  thus  throwing  the  small  ball  high.  But  there  is 
no  such  process  expressed  when  a  chunk  of  a  planet  is 
supposed  to  be  thrown  off  from  an  equator  of  a  globe 
whose  supply  is  presumed  to  come  in  by  way  of  its 
equator. 

Then  again  we  must  consider  the  speed  that  is  re- 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  107 

quired  of  the  sun's  surface  in  order  to  pitch  Neptune  out 
of  its  own  body  2%  billions  of  miles,  and  keep  Neptune 
still  traveling  at  the  rate  of  19 1/2  miles  per  second, 
while  we  must  also  consider  that  Neptune,  unless  it  is 
supplied  by  some  other  force,  must  have  slackened  down 
its  speed  somewhat  in  the  millions  of  years  it  has  been 
moving  since  its  birth. 

The  sun's  surface  speed  at  this  time  is  reputed  to  ba 
4,500  miles  per  hour.  The  evidence  is  therefore  that  in 
order  to  maintain  that  rotation  speed  it  must  be  supplied 
with  an  influx  energy  equal  to  its  speed  at  least.  This 
much  it  has,  and  there  is  no  reason  to  believe  it  has  more. 
If  there  was  a  time  when  nebula  rolled  it  faster,  it  must 
have  been  under  different  influences  than  that  expressed 
by  Natural  Laws  as  we  know  them.  For  the  influx  could 
in  no  wise  be  in  excess  of  the  gravity  taking  it  into  the 
center,  and  the  gravity  drawing  a  planet  together  would 
certainly  not  release  it  at  certain  times  to  be  pitched  off, 
when  it  is  especially  considered  that  the  influx  and 
rotary  motion  is  caused  by  gravity  itself,  which  would 
resist  any  part  being  thrown  off. 

While  considering  the  force  of  gravity,  let  us  compare 
that  of  our  earth  with  the  sun.  The  sun  is  conceeded 
to  be  100  times  larger  in  diameter  than  the  earth,  there- 
fore everything  else  being  equal,  a  man  weighing  150 
pounds  on  the  earth's  surface  would  weigh  100  times 
as  much,  or  15,000  pounds,  upon  the  sun's  surface,  but 
the  difference  of  surface  speed  would  contribute  to  a 
different  centrifugal  force.  On  the  earth's  surface  the 
travel  is  1,000  miles  per  hour  and  on  the  sun's  4,500 
miles  per  hour,  which  would  mean  4^  times  more 
centrifugal  force  on  the  sun  than  on  the  earth.  We  will 
then  have  to  deduct  the  4j^  times  centrifugal  force 


108  Chapter  VII. 

that  the  sun  supplies  over  that  of  the  earth,  and  this  will 
reduce  the  weight  of  the  150  pound  man  to  1,666  pounds. 
This  will  give  you  an  idea  of  the  tremendous  speed  the 
sun  must  rotate  in  order  for  that  body  to  create  centri- 
fugal force  sufficient  to  overcome  its  gravity  and  send 
a  chunk  like  Neptune,  35,000  miles  in  diameter,  a  dis- 
tance of  2%  billions  of  miles  and  keep  it  in  motion 
all  the  enormous  ages  since  the  event  was  supposed  to 
have  occurred. 

One  other  suggestion  is  offered  as  proof  that  planets 
were  pitched  out  of  the  sun  in  birth  by  the  above  men- 
tioned pitched-out  theory,  is  that  the  planets  revolving 
around  the  sun  do  so  on  an  eljiptical  circle,  which  indi- 
cates that  when  they  flew  on  their  tangent  and  spent  their 
momentum  in  a  direct  line  from  the  sun,  that,  having 
lost  the  centrifugal  force,  were  caught  up  by  planetary 
attraction  and  held  firmly  against  going  any  farther. 
That  the  new  born  planet  would  then  take  up  its  course 
around  the  sun,  rocking  out  and  in  on  the  orbital  line 
established  by  the  force  of  its  detachment.  First  at  an 
enormous  variation  but  as  time  rolled  on  came  nearer 
and  nearer  to  a  perfect  circle;  until  now  it  lacks  but  two 
per  cent  of  a  perfect  circle. 

The  argument  concerning  the  elliptical  circle  has  rea- 
son in  it,  but  to  say  that  centrifugal  force  can  throw  off 
a  planet  from  the  Sun,  against  the  force  of  gravity,  and 
that  after  it  gets  out  2%  billions  of  miles,  gravity  sud- 
denly calls  a  halt  to  it,  has  no  weight  in  view  of  the  fact 
that  gravity  is  greatest  when  bodies  are  closest  together, 
and  lessens  as  they  get  farther  and  farther  apart ;  which 
we  know  to  be  true  in  the  case  of  the  attraction  of  our 
Moon  exceeding  that  of  the  Sun,  which  is  400  times  the 
smaller  body  in  diameter.  The  truth  is  that  what  we 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  109 

know  of  gravity  and  centrifugal  motion  contradicts  the 
theory  in  every  way. 

In  addition  we  are  to  believe  that  Neptune  was  pitched 
out  2%  billions  of  miles  on  a  straight  line  which,  when 
force  was  spent,  took  up  a  revolving  motion  around  the 
Sun. 

We  are  also  not  to  overlook  the  fact  that  all  the  planets 
revolve  around  the  sun,  in  the  same  direction  as  that  of 
the  sun  itself,  and  for  want  of  a  better  term  we  call  it 
from  west  to  east.  And  on  account  of  the  fact  that  all 
planets  revolve  the  same  direction  that  the  sun  rotates, 
it  is  prima  facie  evidence  that  they  were  pitched  off  from 
the  sun  when  it  was  revolving,  and  that  each  planet 
took  the  course  of  the  sun  from  which  it  was  pitched 
off.  But  there  comes  another  situation  to  contemplate, 
and  that  is  that  the  planets  rotate  on  their  axes  in  the 
same  way  that  the  sun  does.  And  here  came  the  con- 
flicting evidence,  for  it  is  a  well  known  fact  that  any 
form  pitched  off  into  space  by  a  repellent  force,  will  have 
its  parting  effect  expressed  at  its  point  of  separation  like 
two  rolling  balls,  the  touching  surfaces  traveling  both  in 
the  same  line  of  motion,  which  would  mean  that  portion 
longest  touching  the  Sun  would  move  along  with  it,  and 
the  outer  portion,  which  met  the  greatest  space  resist- 
ance, would  lag,  giving  a  retarding  inclination  to  the 
planet  and  rotating  it  oppositely  to  that  of  the  Sun. 

We  were  inclined  to  believe  the  theory  sound,  but 
when  we  considered  that  the  same  teachers  would  have 
us  know  that  all  planets  rotate  exactly  as  the  sun  rotates, 
our  knowledge  of  mechanical  law  completely  upset  the 
whole  proposition.  See  plate  No.  16  wherein  the 
mechanical  law  of  motion  is  illustrated. 

Theories,  unless  supported  by  Nature's  Laws  and  fixed 


110  Chapter  VII. 

principles,  are  only  speculative  at  best.  They  are  usually 
ideas  conjectured  and  hold  good  only  until  better  ones 
replace  them,  or  are  found  to  be  out  of  harmony  with 
Nature  and  rejected. 

The  next  theory  offered  to  the  world  concerning  the 
birth  of  planets,  other  than  the  suns,  is  the  ring  process. 
The  nebular  hypothesis  for  a  sun  builder  has  never 
found  serious  objections.  But  the  birth  of  planets  shot 
out  from  the  Sun  has  not  been  universally  endorsed. 

The  ring  idea  is  no  doubt  the  most  popular,  but  up 
to  the  present  time  is  vague.  The  best  evidence  that  the 
ring  process  of  forming  planets  outside  of  the  Sun  is  in 
the  fact  that  there  are  two  rings  around  Saturn  now. 

The  next  evidence  in  support  of  the  ring  formation 
is  the  well  known  fact  that  each  planet  out  from  the 
Sun  takes  up  a  proportionate  space,  according  to  the 
distance  out.  That  all  the  planets  revolve  around  the 
Sun  in  the  direction  that  the  Sun  rotates  upon  its 
axis,  as  would  be  the  case  were  each  ring  set  within  line 
of  the  Sun's  equator,  they  would  naturally  revolve  in  a 
grand  disc  around  the  Sun.  The  theory  is  that  in  the 
formation  of  the  Sun  the  inwhirling  nebula  would  set 
the  central  body  in  motion,  and  that  the  center,  having 
but  a  short  distance  to  make  in  its  rotation,  could  make 
the  revolution  in  much  less  time  than  the  surrounding 
nebula  flowing  into  it.  And  since  the  outer  edge  of  the 
disc  would  have  the  greater  distance  to  travel,  would  lag 
behind,  and  in  time  separate  from  the  inner  portion, 
dividing  the  disc  first  into  two  rings.  Then  as  the  disc 
again  enlarged,  it  would  separate  into  another  ring,  until 
the  process  reached  to  the  planet  Neptune,  or  the  ninth 
ring  out  from  the  Sun  that  formed  Neptune. 

It  was  discovered  that  all  the  planets  traveled  around 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  Ill 

the  Sun  at  about  the  same  speed,  and  that  the  first  one 
out  from  the  Sun  made  its  revolution  in  88  days,  the 
next  in  224  days,  the  next  in  365  days,  the  next  in  687 
days,  the  next  in  5^  years,  the  next  12  years,  the  next 
29^2  years,  the  next  84  years,  and  the  next  165  years, 
and  as  they  were  all  traveling  at  the  same  speed,  about 
19^/2  miles  per  second,  they  could  not  get  away  from 
the  idea  of  a  ring  system. 

Each  ring  was  supposed  to  roll  up  its  own  planet,  as 
would  naturally  result  by  the  friction  caused  by  the  lag 
of  each  outer  ring  over  the  disc  edge  of  the  ring  next 
within,  and  in  monstrous  roller  fashion,  rolled  each  ring 
into  planets  of  its  own. 

Where  the  disc  ring  space  was  wide  enough,  it  not 
only  would  roll  up  planets,  but  because  of  the  great  dis- 
tance, have  upon  its  outer  rim  a  lagging  portion  that 
would  separate  from  its  center,  and  like  that  of  the  Sun, 
roll  up  minor  planets  called  moons. 

This  is  supposed  to  have  missed  on  the  two  first  rings 
out  from  the  Sun,  because  of  the  smallness  of  the  rings, 
making  it  possible  for  the  planets  Mercury  and  Venus 
to  roll  up  into  globes  of  rings  which  found  a  way  into  the 
globe,  leaving  nothing  outside  with  which  to  construct  a 
moon.  Hence  Mercury  and  Venus  have  no  moons. 

In  the  case  of  the  Earth  it  had  one  outer  ring,  and 
that  produced  our  moon.  Mars  had  two  outer  rings  and 
produced  two  moons.  In  the  case  of  the  Asteroids,  the 
theory  is  that  the  planet  exploded  and  revolves  as  a  ring 
composed  of  600  or  more  fragments  all  the  way  from 
228  miles  in  diameter  down  to  invisible  objects.  Jupiter 
had  four  outer  rings,  and  has  four  moons.  Saturn  had 
ten  outer  rings,  and  has  eight  moons  and  two  rings  left 


112  Chapter  VII. 

over.  Uranus  had  four  outer  rings  and  has  four  moons. 
Neptune  had  one  outer  ring  and  has  one  moon. 

All  this  theory  of  ring  formation  seems  to  hold  good, 
except  for  the  fact  that  it  lacks  the  solution  as  to  how 
it  is  possible  for  the  rings  to  roll  into  planets,  and  when 
completed  found  to  rotate  upon  their  axes  in  a 
directly  opposite  way  to  which  the  rings  were  supposed 
to  have  rolled  them  up.  For  it  is  well  known  that  the 
outer  edge  of  a  ring  disc  is  the  part  that  would  lag  be- 
hind the  inner  edge,  and  in  doing  so,  be  bound  to 
roll  the  globe  with  its  disc,  with  the  inside  traveling 
fastest,  compelling  the  forming  planet  to  rotate  exactly 
opposite  to  that  of  the  Sun,  the  reverse  of  what  it  now 
does. 

By  reference  to  cut  No.  16  it  will  be  seen  just  what 
occurs  when  one  plane  moves  over  another.  Mechanical 
law  pronounced  the  doom  of  this  seemingly  plausible 
theory,  and  the  astronomers  set  out  to  establish  another, 
which  in  a  brief  way  we  will  explain. 

It  is  now  presumed  that  all  planets  are  separately 
formed,  just  like  the  nebulous  process  producing  the 
Sun,  and  that  when  such  formations  took  place  each 
planet  became  a  sort  of  whirling  tramp  passing  through 
space.  That  when  a  planet  like  our  great  Sun  came 
along,  it  would  pick  up  the  little  planets,  one  at  a  time, 
and  carry  them  along  with  itself  forming  a  great  solar 
system.  That  the  planets  were  held  off  from  the  Sun  by 
the  immense  speed  they  had  when  they  passed  each  other. 
That  the  little  fellow  would  be  drawn  toward  the  larger 
one,  and  set  at  such  a  whirling  motion  around  the  central 
Sun  that  it  was  forever  kept  out  from  the  Sun  by  the 
centrifugal  motion.  That  the  elliptical  motion  that  the 
planets  make  in  their  course  around  the  Sun  was  due  to 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  113 

being  suddenly  jerked  in  and  have  not  completely  re- 
covered the  process  of  vibrating  while  they  make  their 
revolutions  around  the  Sun.  That  if  our  Sun  should 
happen  to  pass  another  Sun,  which  by  the  way  had 
chanced  to  pick  up  a  planet  or  more,  and  the  whole 
of  them  were  not  too  large,  the  Sun  would  also  take 
the  little  Sun  in  with  its  planets  and  all. 

In  this  way  the  Sun  picked  up  Mercury,  then  Venus, 
and  when  it  came  in  proximity  of  the  earth  and  its 
satellite,  the  moon,  picked  them  both  up.  When  it  came 
to  Mars  and  its  two  satellites,  it  picked  them  up.  How 
it  got  hold  of  the  Asteroids  is  not  clear,  unless  it  was 
that  that  planet  bursted  in  the  catching.  When  it  came 
to  Jupiter  and  its  four  satellites,  it  picked  them  up. 
Saturn  with  its  eight  moons  and  two  rings  were  picked 
up,  but  why  and  where  Saturn  got  its  rings  was  a 
mystery  to  this  adoption  theory.  When  it  came  along 
to  Uranus  and  its  four  satellites  they  too  were  picked 
up.  Neptune  and  its  one  satellite  got  picked  up,  and 
the  Sun  is  still  carrying  along  these  nine  family  systems. 
Because  of  the  rotation  of  the  Sun  it  had  the  influence 
to  set  the  whole  solar  system  in  motion  along  the  line 
of  the  equator  of  the  Sun,  and  held  them  all  together, 
with  each  of  their  satellites,  all  revolving  around  them 
in  the  same  equatorial  line  as  that  of  the  Sun  with  but 
a  slight  incline  out  of  the  regular. 

The  theory  that  suns  formed  in  space,  traveled  and 
picked  up  other  planets  by  attraction  in  their  course  of 
travel,  has  some  merit  to  it,  but  it  is  theory,  pure  and 
simple.  The  rings  of  Saturn  could  not  be  explained 
away  as  a  living  testimony  of  the  ring  system.  Then 
there  was  that  deepest  of  all  mysteries  that  all  planets 
rotate  around  the  Sun  with  the  outside  traveling  fastest, 


114  Chapter  VII. 

and  each  that  had  one  or  more  satellites  had  these  satel- 
lites revolving  around  them  in  the  same  way  the  Sun 
rotates,  which  was  directly  opposite  to  what  should  have 
been  to  support  the  theories  advanced.  And  right  here 
the  scientific  world  will  be  stranded  until  it  applies  the 
invisible  forces  deduced  from  the  movement  of  the  plan- 
ets themselves. 

There  is  one  other  theory  being  advanced  that  can 
hardly  be  placed  in  line  as  scientific,  yet  it  has  many  en- 
dorsers. It  is  exactly  the  opposite  to  any  other  idea 
advanced,  and  is  called  "Cellular  Cosmogony."  The 
first  idea  it  embraces  is  that  everything  is  constructed  of 
cells  and  hence  cell  process  must  be  a  true  system.  But 
the  cell  process  is  a  misnomer.  There  is  no  such  system. 
What  are  called  cells  are  not  cells  at  all,  but  solids — 
molecules — so  that  destroys  the  cell  process  as  evidence 
supporting  a  system. 

The  author  of  Cellular  Cosmogony  would  have  us 
believe  that  the  universe  is  a  hollow  globe,  and  we  are 
living  inside  of  it.  That  the  Sun,  stars,  and  all  else  in 
the  universe,  is  within  this  hollow  globe.  That  it  is 
surrounded,  not  by  space,  but  by  an  endless  and  bottom- 
less solid.  That  the  universe,  instead  of  being  made  up 
of  planets  floating  in  endless  space  is  all  within  this 
enormous  hollow  space,  and  within  this  hollow  con- 
stitutes all  the  space  ever  created. 

It  is  really  astonishing  how  much  argument  is  set  up 
to  prove  the  hollow  globe  theory,  and  the  authors  believe 
that  they  have  actually  annihilated  every  other  system 
offered  to  the  world,  even  space  itself.  It  would  be  a 
waste  of  time  to  even  mention  it  here  were  it  not  for  the 
fact  that  so  many  otherwise  intelligent  people  adhere 
to  the  idea.  Strange  as  it  may  seem,  the  author  himself 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  115 

was  forced  to  get  outside  his  own  idea  to  represent  it. 
Every  effort  at  description  would  contradict  itself.  If 
we  have  a  hollow  globe,  then  we  must  have  a  hollow  Sun 
to  give  us  light,  all  the  stars  and  planets  within  this 
globe  must  also  be  hollow,  and  shine  only  from  the  in- 
side. If  we  wanted  to  make  a  map  or  a  globe  represent- 
ing our  hollow  earth  we  would  have  to  get  inside  of  it 
to  see  it  for  the  system  is  a  cellular  system,  and  we  can- 
not have  anything  else  but  cells,  if  we  stick  to  the  prin- 
ciple. 

We  have  given  what  we  consider  a  brief  outline  of  the 
most  popular  ideas  on  astronomy.  Have  undertaken 
to  explain  points  where  the  theories  have  met  with  sup- 
posedly imponderable  questions.  There  is  no  desire  on 
our  part  to  dispute  the  well  founded  facts  of  dis- 
covery, or  in  any  way  question  what  the  scientific  world 
has  fully  agreed  upon,  for  in  their  analysis  the  work 
accomplished  is  marvelous  in  the  extreme.  The  work 
of  the  astronomers  is  like  apples  of  gold.  Its  value  to 
man  is  immeasureable.  We  have  no  dispute  with  them 
in  established  truths.  Our  sole  aim  is  to  supplement 
their  findings  with  the  application  of  mechanical  law 
upon  questions  in  which  they  have  not  agreed — in  fact 
cannot  agree,  because  their  conclusions  contradict  the 
theories  they  advocate. 

Therefore  we  plead  with  these  men  of  science  and  the 
thinking  world  to  reason  with  us  as  we  offer  our  humble 
efforts  in  illustrating  an  astronomical  system  supported 
by  Nature's  invisible  forces  working  under  mechanical 
law. 

A  MECHANICAL  SYSTEM. 

Endless  space  is  filled  with  Ether — nebulous  matter. 
Gases  and  planets  float  in  it. 


116  Chapter  VII. 

Ether  is  itself  a  material  substance,  although  finer 
than  air.  It  is  enormously  elastic  and  compressible  and 
exceedingly  flexible. 

Looking  at  our  universe  from  the  Ether  standpoint 
there  is  no  vacant  space.  Solidified  matter  does  not 
occupy  one-millionth  part  of  ether,  hence  the  visible 
part  is  infinitesimally  small  compared  to  the  invisible. 

Great  and  stupendous  as  the  suns  and  planets  seem  to 
us,  comparing  the  universe  as  a  whole,  they  are  mere 
dust  specks. 

Ether  fills  all  space,  but  no  part  of  it  is  outside  of  the 
embrace  of  Nature's  invisible  forces.  Endless  space  is 
filled  with  motion  and  motion  is  Life. 

We  have  whirlpools  in  water,  whirlwinds  in  the  air 
and  cyclones  in  ether  wherever  a  tentative  vacuum  hap- 
pens to  appear. 

A  vacuum  always  sets  up  an  inwhirl  and  its  center 
always  creates  or  condenses  a  nucleus.  The  law  of  affinity 
is  everywhere  present  to  express  its  gravitating  effect 
upon  condensing  Energy  and  Matter,  giving  extended 
expression  as  it  becomes  more  and  more  solidified. 

Ether,  exceedingly  fine  and  flexible  as  it  is,  has  weight, 
that  is  to  say  it  is  effected  by  central  gravity,  and  sus- 
ceptible to  motion,  inertia  and  momentum,  as  we  shall 
see  and  be  able  to  prove  beyond  any  question  of  doubt. 

Ether  being  susceptible  to  the  laws  of  Nature  over 
which  it  is  embraced,  yields  to  the  multiple  and  geomet- 
rical leverage  principles  and  becomes  the  virgin  soil  of 
invisible  Energy. 

Energy  in  action  occupies  more  space  than  Energy 
suspended.  Energy  in  action  is  under  the  ceaseless  grip 
of  the  law  of  gravity,  and  as  Energy  suspends,  it  be- 
comes more  and  more  subject  to  the  gravitating  attrac- 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  117 

tion.  Just  as  compressed  air  is  heavier  than  thin  airt 
suspended  or  condensed  energy  is  heavier  than  active. 
Energy  because  of  its  action  occupies  more  space  and 
is  thereby  integrally  thinner  than  when  suspended  and 
condensed. 

Energy  condensing  comes  to  a  common  center  forming 
a  nucleus,  which  by  virtue  of  increasing  gravity  becomes 
a  gravity  center,  from  which  it  reaches  out  toward  space 
attracting  every  plane  of  matter  according  to  its  relative 
fineness,  or  coarseness,  toward  that  center.  And  as  the 
nucleus  center  is  supplied  from  without,  its  central  at- 
traction forces  automatically  increase.  When  that  hap- 
pens an  etheric  cyclone  has  taken  place.  A  miniature 
planet  has  come  into  being,  that  forever  revolves  upon 
its  nucleus  center,  because  its  central  gravity  once  having 
found  a  material  core  to  act  from,  ever  and  eternally 
sends  out  its  attracting  effect  into  space  for  more  ether 
and  its  suspending  Energy,  from  which  it  is  unceasingly 
and  eternally  supplied. 

The  nucleus  or  miniature  planet  has  no  power  within 
itself  to  revolve.  But  the  law  of  affinity  expresses  a 
greater  amount  of  intensity  on  solidified  substance  than 
thin  Ether,  and  because  that  is  true  the  solidified  center 
becomes  a  general  point  of  attraction.  That  is  just  why 
we  are  drawn  directly  toward  the  center  of  our  earth 
by  its  attraction  and  not  away  from  the  earth  toward 
that  of  thinner  substance. 

The  planet  itself  does  not  supply  the  force  but  be- 
comes a  pivotal  point  of  the  law's  effect,  from  which  it 
reaches  out  into  space,  drawing  ether  currents  into  it. 
While  the  inflowing  current  takes  up  an  inwinding 
course  when  striking  its  central  core  or  planet,  it  always 
sets  the  core  in  action  in  line  of  its  inwind.  How  can 


118  Chapter  VII. 

it  do  this  ?    Why  does  not  the  planet  resist  being  turned 

and  what  does  the  inwind  use  as  a  base  from  which  it 

can  supply  a  push  without  kicking  back  ?    Simply  this, 

a  circumference  is  larger  than  a  center.    It  is  six  times 

greater  in  distance  around  a  circumference  than  it  is 

from  a  circumference  to  a  center,  and  as  space  is  %&A&+£si/ 

immovable  fixity,  the  circumstasee  offers  a  six-to-one 

leverage   resistance,   and  therefore  the  planet  forever 

rotates  upon  its  axis  with  five  unit  constant  surplus 

advantage. 

In  addition  to  the  leverage  advantage  space  offers  to 
a  smaller  resisting  center,  we  find  another  invisible  force 
at  work,  namely,  gravity,  which  has  a  constant  pull  upon 
all  matter,  ether  included,  with  increasing  force  as  mat- 
ter becomes  more  solidified.  Hence  it  pulls  harder  on 
condensing  ether  than  it  does  upon  the  finer  ether  farther 
out,  and  at  the  same  time  the  condensing  ether  whirling 
inward  toward  the  nucleus  core,  finds  a  greater  resistance 
when  striking  the  more  solid  core  center,  with  the  result 
that  it  presses  an  increased  rotary  motion  on  the  core 
because  of  the  gravity  from  a  stationary  point — the 
silent  center  within. 

Our  sun  rotates  upon  its  axis  because  it  is  the  central 
core  of  an  etheric  cyclone  and  is  compelled  to  turn  the 
way  the  ether  inflow  strikes  its  surface.  It  has  only 
2,598,000  equatorial  miles  resistance  while  the  ether 
cyclone  rim  extends  out  over  six  billions  of  miles,  with 
over  eighteen  billions  of  miles  of  space  background  to 
supply  its  pushing  inwind. 

The  sun  therefore  will  never  cease  to  rotate  upon  its 
axis,  while  it  is  supplied  with  this  ether  inflow,  and  the 
ether  inflow  will  never  cease  so  long  as  the  law  of  affinity 
exists  and  its  gravitating  effects  are  maintained.  And 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  119 

this  will  always  be  the  case,  as  solidified  matter  has  a 
gravitating  effect  exceeding  that  of  the  finer  substances. 

It  might  be  asked,  why  does  an  inflow  take  on  a  whirl- 
ing motion?  There  are  several  reasons,  among  which 
are,  first,  when  condensing  substance  drifts  toward  a 
vacuum  center,  if  particles  should  meet  on  perfect  centers 
they  would  rebound.  If  they  should  miss  perfect  centers 
they  will  take  either  to  one  side  or  the  other.  It  is  im- 
possible for  two  objects  to  pass  each  other  without  form- 
ing a  circle — both  revolving  the  same  way.  If  they  pass 
at  the  right  of  each  other  they  will  revolve  to  the  left. 
If  to  the  left,  they  will  revolve  to  the  right,  and  it  has 
only  to  start  one  way  or  the  other  and  the  inflow  will 
keep  it  going.  Second,  because  anything  that  rolls  its 
core  enables  the  inflow  to  wrap  itself  up  harmoniously 
and  smoothly  without  jumbling.  Third,  it  requires  less 
than  one-third  resistance  to  wind  in  that  it  does  to  drive 
straight  in. 

In  drawing  water  out  of  a  vessel  through  a  small 
orifice,  the  opening  will  be  found  to  become  a  center 
around  which  the  water  will  soon  begin  to  whirl.  Con- 
densing Energy  or  any  fluent  substance  will  whirl 
around  the  condensing  center.  A  storm  sweeping  a  wide 
track  will  travel  in  a  straight  line.  This  we  call  a  hurri- 
cane. A  storm  traveling  in  a  narrow  track  will  whirl 
either  to  the  right  or  left.  When  it  travels  in  a  whirling 
manner,  we  call  it  a  cyclone. 

If  the  outer  edges  of  a  cyclone,  say  one-quarter  mile 
wide,  has  an  inwhirling  tendency  of  a  feather's  weight 
it  will  multiply  its  force  on  the  center  as  would  a  lever 
one  eighth  of  a  mile  long  on  a  central  fulcrum  intensify 
its  power. 

A  cyclone  picks  up  everything  that  is  loose  within  its 


120  Chapter  VI L 

path,  draws  it  into  its  center  and  carries  it  along.  If 
it  occurs  on  the  sea  it  picks  up  the  water  into  a  great 
central  spout,  presses  it  high  into  the  air  where  it  spills 
out  over  its  whirling  disc  and  falls  in  showers  over  its 
path. 

Substance  condensed  into  a  center  by  a  great  cyclone 
disc  when  the  force  is  sufficient  to  produce  friction  will 
produce  heat.  Energy  pouring  into  heat  will  produce 
matter  just  as  matter  pressed  through  or  over  a  bridge 
of  fire  will  produce  energy.  An  inwinding  action  pro- 
duced primarily  by  a  gravitating  or  magnetic  force  is 
called  feminine  or  afferent  energy.  A  force  crossing  a 
nucleus  center  does  so  because  it  is  made  to  cross  focus 
lines,  and  when  the  influx  pressure  is  great  it  causes 
friction  that  generates  efferent  force,  which  passes  out- 
ward toward  space  in  every  direction,  particularly  in  line 
of  the  equator  of  the  revolving  core  it  has  been  generated 
through.  And  as  space  offers  little  resistance  to  high 
energized  substance,  it  always  passes  out  in  straight 
lines  until  its  momentum  has  been  spent  in  diversity  of 
space. 

Every  etheric  cyclone  in  open  space  takes  on  the  form 
of  a  disc.  It  cannot  do  otherwise  for  it  cannot  revolve 
two  ways  at  once.  So  long  as  it  is  a  simple  disc  having 
only  a  condensed  core  of  its  own  substance,  it  could  not 
be  the  means  of  producing  a  globe  until  the  central  core 
became  a  melting  heat.  Then  when  etheric  substance 
becomes  melted  into  liquid,  which  is  the  next  one  of  the 
four  grand  physical  planes  below  it,  central  gravity  be- 
comes specific,  rounds  it  up  into  a  globe  and  the  globe 
rotates  within  the  disc  as  Saturn  rotates  within  its  rings. 
•Being  liquid  it  extends  toward  its  equator  and  flattens 
at  its  poles,  according  to  the  velocity  of  the  movement 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  121 

it  is  forced  by  the  surrounding  e.ther  ring  disc  to  make, 
and  the  effect  of  centrifugal  force,  according  to  the 
travel  of  its  equatorial  surface.  If  the  ether  influx  be- 
comes intensified,  as  it  is  bound  to  do  when  the  central 
globe  becomes  a  fiery  consuming  arc,  the  intensified  in- 
flux will  so  increase  its  pressure  upon  the  equator  as  to 
counterbalance  its  centrifugal  force,  and  the  globe  will 
round  itself  up  into  a  symmetrical  ball,  just  as  it  does 
in  the  case  of  our x grand  central  Sun. 

Were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  our  Sun  is  surrounded 
by  an  ether  cyclone  whose  influx  presses  upon  the  Sun's 
equator  at  not  less  than  22,200  pounds  to  the  square 
inch,  the  equator  of  the  Sun  traveling  4,500  miles  per 
hour  would  flatten  at  its  poles  and  round  out  at  its 
equator  like  a  grindstone.  (See  Plate  No.  17.)  Because 
it  is  a  mass  of  molten  liquid  beyond  18,000  degrees  of 
heat,  its  energizing  force  is  500  times  greater  than  our 
electrical  arc  lights. 

The  scientific  world  is  well  aware  of  the  rotation  of 
the  Sun,  and  that  as  a  molten  ball  it  would  take  on  the 
form  we  suggest  above,  were  it  not  for  its  equatorial  or 
disc  influx  pressure,  so  they  meet  this  fact  and  account 
for  the  symmetrical  roundness  of  the  Sun  to  a  claim 
that  it  is  a  cold  solid  ball  covered  with  a  light  and  heat 
producing  corona  some  one  hundred  and  fifty  thousand 
miles  in  thickness.  That  within  this  brilliant  at- 
mosphere is  the  solid  black  globe,  which  they  claim  can 
be  seen  only  when  rents  called  sun  spots  appear  in  the 
atmospheric  envelope. 

It  is  a  well  known  fact  that  an  atmosphere  500  times 
more  brilliant  than  an  arc  light  would  be  sufficient  to 
illuminate  any  blackness  showing  from  its  background, 
to  say  nothing  about  anything  remaining  cold  and  black, 


122  Chapter  VII. 

when  encased  for  billions  of  years  beneath  a  flaming  at- 
mosphere of  18,000  degrees  of  heat.  Sun  spots  do  occur, 
but  there  is  a  reasonable  explanation  for  their  appear- 
ance. What  they  are  and  why  they  appear  will  be  treated 
under  the  heading  of  "What  Are  Sun  Spots?" 

There  is  a  great  difference  between  heat  and  light,  and 
yet  the  two  expressions  of  energy  co-operate  in  many 
instances.  In  dealing  with  the  question  of  the  sun  light 
and  heat,  we  must  consider  the  different  phases.  Heat 
is  a  slow  moving  energy.  It  is  confined  closely  to  its 
generating  centers.  Heat,  however,  will  pass  through 
substance  that  light  cannot.  A  substance  that  light  can- 
not penetrate  is  called  opaque.  If  light  can  pass  through 
it,  we  call  it  transparent. 

While  heat  can  penetrate  what  light  cannot,  light 
energy  is  so  much  finer  in  quality  that  it  moves  with  a 
speed  over  space  of  186,300  miles  per  second.  What 
now  have  we  to  conclude  ?  It  is  this :  that  light  and  heat 
are  close  associates  with  extremely  different  characters. 
The  one  slow  of  action — the  other  quick.  And  aside 
from  character,  they  both  have  dimensional  functions. 
Heat  energy  operates  in  the  third  dimension — that  is 
it  takes  on  bulk  formation — while  light  energy  moves  in 
first  dimensional  lines,  that  travel  at  enormous  speed. 
Light  energy  carries  neither  heat  nor  light,  but  when 
arrested  in  its  flight,  the  resistance  it  meets  is  converted 
into  a  reproduction  of  its  original  character — Light  and 
Heat. 

In  the  first  place  ether  inflow  is  brought  about  by  the 
Law  of  Affinity,  the  negative  side  of  which  is  called 
gravity.  Ether  passing  into  the  nucleus  of  the  Sun  is 
condensed  or  consumed.  In  a  way  we  could  call  it  di- 
gested, for  that  is  just  what  takes  place.  When  Ether  is 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  123 

consumed  a  portion  of  it  is  transposed  to  matter,  be- 
comes a  portion  of  the  Sun,  and  the  remainder  is  trans- 
posed to  Efferent  Energy.  As  by  extracting  the  finer 
of  any  substance,  the  grosser  remains. 

The  light  energy  passes  out  into  space  over  first  di- 
mensional lines  until  it  completely  diversifies  in  space, 
or  is  caught  up  by  other  planets,  and  consumed  into 
energization  in  the  process  of  constructing  character 
forms,  in  vegetable  and  animal  life.  The  heat  remaining 
within  the  Sun  perpetuates  its  qualities  in  maintaining 
the  18,000  degrees  it  has  in  store  as  against  the  240 
degrees  below  zero  temperature  surrounding  it,  while 
that  portion  failing  to  pass  the  focal  center,  into  that  of 
light  energy,  expresses  itself  into  heat  energy  that  cools 
into  the  liquified  body  of  the  sun  itself. 

Presuming  the  equilibrium  standard  of  heat  to  be 
18,000  degrees,  the  constant  inflow  as  a  source  of  supply 
would  increase  it  were  it  not  for  the  fact  that  the  ether 
pouring  in  was  a  frigid  cold.  In  other  words  the  con- 
stant generation  of  heat  is  being  constantly  condensed 
by  its  chilly  surrounding  environment,  and  heat  con- 
densed becomes  liquid  matter.  Therefore  the  cooling 
process  of  the  Sun  does  not  shrink  it  in  size  but,  like 
gravity,  the  negative  side  of  the  Law  of  Affinity,  cold 
becomes  the  negative  side  of  heat  energy,  and  becomes 
the  constructive  side  of  the  liquid  matter  which  is  etern- 
ally constructing  the  Sun. 

When  the  central  body  of  the  Sun  becomes  larger,  its 
gravitating  influence  extends  farther  and  farther  into 
space,  encouraging  a  farther  and  farther  extension  of  its 
Ether  cyclonic  disc.  There  comes  a  time  when  the  cen- 
tral globe  rotates  at  a  counter-balance  with  the  inwind- 
ing  push  of  a  given  circumscribed  circumference.  It 


124:  Chapter  VII. 

needs  no  further  extension  into  space  for  a  leverage  from 
which  to  push,  and  travels  at  a  faster  speed  than  the 
nebulous  matter  surrounding  it  can  attain.  The  result 
is,  that  the  outer  edge  of  the  disc  will  lag  and  sooner 
or  later  separate  from  the  central  portion  of  the  disc, 
like  a  surrounding  disc  ring,  giving  the  appearance  that 
the  remaining  central  globe  rotates  independently  from 
the  surrounding  disc  and  that  it  is  driven  by  a  force 
from  within. 

What  really  takes  place  is  the  establishment  of  grav- 
ity planes,  like  that  of  atmosphere,  surrounding  our 
earth.  The  more  condensed  a  plane  substance  is  the 
closer  it  lies  to  the  center,  and  the  less  dense,  the  farther 
away  from  a  center,  which  also  includes  the  fact  that 
the  thinner  the  plane  the  less  the  resistance.  So  that 
when  the  ether  cyclone  pours  into  the  general  center  it 
readily  passes  through  the  outer  thinner  planes,  and 
finds  more  and  more  resistance  until  it  strikes  the  cen- 
tral core,  or  liquid  plane,  where  a  resistance  is  offered 
sufficient  to  produce  a  dynamic  arc  light. 

It  is  therefore  plain  to  be  seen  why  an  outer  ring  can 
lag  and  still  not  affect  the  propelling  current  driving  the 
central  Sun,  or  disarrange  the  perfect  working  of  the 
system. 

When  rings  lag  with  the  ever  and  endless  supply  of 
ether  current  passing  through  them,  they  must  gradually 
become  more  and  more  condensed,  and  offer  a  degree 
more  resistance  to  the  inflow.  At  the  same  time,  rays 
of  light  energy  pouring  out  from  the  Sun  in  straight 
lines  find  a  resistance,  especially  where  surfaces  appear, 
and  this  we  know  must  occur  where  the  planes  separate 
into  rings,  just  as  we  see  the  refraction  of  light  bend 
around  our  globe  with  the  surfaces  of  atmospheric  layers. 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  125 

The  Sun  light  energy  striking  the  inner  surface  of  Ether 
rings  tends  to  retard  them,  while  the  Ether  cyclone,  con- 
stantly winding  in,  rolls  the  ring  up  into  a  disc  accord- 
ing to  the  thickness  between  the  inner  and  outer  edges 
of  the  ring  established.  When  this  has  taken  place  a 
new  nucleus  has  been  created,  a  new  etheric  cyclone  is 
produced,  an  embryo  of  a  new  planet  is  born.  It  re- 
volves on  its  axis  in  the  same  direction  as  the  Sun,  be- 
cause the  Sun  light  resistance  retards  its  inner  rim, 
while  the  general  cyclone  pushes  it  along,  pressing  its 
course  around  the  Sun  at  the  rate  of  19%  miles  per 
second,  making  the  outer  rim  that  must  travel  fartherest 
travel  faster  than  the  inner  edge,  causing  the  new-born 
planet  to  revolve  around  the  Sun  about  six  times  as  fast 
as  its  equatorial  motion  of  rotation.  This  fact  enables 
us  to  determine  the  line  of  the  general  incline  of  the 
Ether  inflow  to  the  Sun,  as  that  of  six  to  one,  which  is  to 
say  the  Ether  rolls  around  the  Sun  about  six  times  in 
its  inwind,  crossing  a  planet  disc  ring,  or,  in  other  words, 
at  an  inclination  of  seven  per  cent  from  right  angle  to 
the  light  rays  of  the  Sun. 

The  new  little  cyclone  that  has  come  into  being,  like 
its  parental  source,  works  out  its  own  construction  in 
the  same  manner  and  process,  and  under  the  influence 
of  the  same  laws  as  that  which  created  the  central  Sun. 
It  had  its  cyclone  influx  and  its  own  center  to  generate 
heat  and  condense  its  heat  into  a  globe  of  molten  liquid, 
but  as  its  field  of  operation  was  confined  to  the  limits  of 
its  disc  ring,  it  could  not  develop  as  a  central  Sun,  but 
must  become  a  planet — or  satellite  of  the  Sun — for  it 
is  already  bound  by  outside  limits  as  to  space  and  is 
tied  to  the  central  Sun  with  gravity  lines  of  attraction 
which  it  cannot  sever.  The  result  is  it  cools  down  from 


126  Chapter  VII. 

a  molten  liquid  to  that  of  liquids  and  solids.  And  thus 
the  first  ring  around  the  Sun  becomes  the  planet 
Mercury. 

In  the  meantime  the  Sun  grows  in  size.  The  process 
works  on  and  another  ring  is  formed.  This  ring,  like 
that  of  Mercury,  becomes  condensed,  and  following  the 
same  law  as  its  predecessor,  produces  another  miniature 
etheric  cyclone,  then  the  embryonic  planet  of  Venus  is 
born.  It,  too,  must  roll  up  its  disc.  The  influx  must 
cross  its  focal  center,  generating  heat,  and  from  the 
heat  condense  its  molten  liquid  ball  that  in  ages  cool 
down  to  the  plane  of  liquids  and  solids. 

Next  came  the  earth  ring  disc,  which  had  already 
taken  on  its  form  in  the  Sun's  cyclonic  disc.  It,  like  its 
predecessors,  had  to  follow  the  same  process  and  con- 
form to  the  operation  of  the  same  law,  rolling  it  into 
a  disc  of  its  own. 

The  center  of  Mercury's  ring  disc  was  36,000,000 
miles  out  from  the  Sun.  That  of  Venus  was  67,000,- 
000  miles,  and  that  of  the  earth's  ring  93,000,000 
miles,  which,  it  must  be  noted,  has  much  more  territory 
than  was  taken  in  by  the  Mercury  or  Venus  rings.  The 
result  was  that  the  Earth's  cyclone  was  more  extensive 
than  either  that  of  Mercury  or  Venus,  and  in  the  gen- 
eration of  its  liquid  center,  left  sufficient  surrounding 
nebula  within  its  cycle  to  form  another  miniature  ring 
about  240,000  miles  out  from  the  Earth;  which,  like 
the  rings  around  the  Sun,  became  separated  from  the 
Earth  globe  and  caused  it  to  become  a  miniature  Sun,  to 
send  out  its  light  rays  against  the  surrounding  ring 
while  its  inrolling  Ether  disc  rolled  up  the  Earth's  min- 
iature disc  ring  into  our  Moon. 

The  Earth's  Ether  cyclone,  like  that  of  Mercury  and 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  127 

Venus,  was  limited  to  its  own  Earth  disc  ring  as  it 
revolved  around  the  Sun.  Hence  its  limited  supply  des- 
tined the  Earth  to  become  a  planet  instead  of  an  end- 
less growing  Sun.  In  the  meantime  the  Sun,  through 
billions  of  ages,  grew  to  the  extent  of  absorbing  the 
Earth's  influx  disc,  while  it  extended  its  line  of  at- 
traction over  it  and  maintained  it  in  its  regular  rev- 
olutionary course  around  the  Sun;  rotated  it  upon  its 
axis  in  the  same  manner  as  the  Sun  rotates  with  its 
outer  rim  traveling  the  fastest,  for  the  same  reason 
that  was  expressed  in  constructing  Mercury  and  Venus, 
which  was  the  same  rotation  it  assumed  within  its  own 
ring. 

What  else  happened?  Simply  this:  as  the  Earth 
gradually  transposed  from  a  miniature  Sun  to  that  of 
a  planet,  its  etheric  cyclone  gradually  ceased.  A  crust 
formed  over  the  surface  of  the  globe;  its  outer  surface 
was  subject  to  the  Sun  ray  resistance,  and  the  Sun's 
etheric  cyclone  still  pressing  forward,  its  outer  rim  com- 
pelling it  to  continue  rotation  as  before,  whereupon  it 
become  gradually  transposed  from  a  Sun  to  a  planet,  or 
in  fact  became  a  motor,  where  before  the  change  it 
was  a  dynamo.  And  for  hundreds  of  millions  of  years 
the  earth  crust  has  been  gradually  thickening. 

In  the  change  of  the  Earth  from  a  dynamo  to  a 
motor,  it  must  be  understood  that  the  planets  are  not 
the  source  of  energy,  but  are  the  pivotal  centers  upon 
which  the  principle  of  Nature's  Invisible  Forces  oper- 
ate. So,  when  an  etheric  cyclone  ceases  to  supply  energy 
to  a  nucleus  center,  it,  in  the  same  measure,  ceases  to  send 
out  light  ray  energy.  The  Moon  therefore  has  no  direct 
constant  light  rays  from  the  earth  to  retard  its  inner 
surface  and  no  cyclone  inwind  toward  the  Earth's  equa- 


128  Chapter  VIL 

tor  to  rotate  it  upon  its  axis.  It  therefore  ceases  to  ro- 
tate, becomes  set  with  the  weightiest  side  of  its  body 
toward  the  Earth,  held  by  the  Earth  and  the  Moon's 
co- joint  attraction,  and  with  this  attraction  is  revolved 
around  the  Earth,  like  it  did  in  its  source  of  construc- 
tion, with  the  outer  edge  traveling  fastest  and  at  the 
same  rate  as  that  of  its  original  ring,  which  travels  once 
around,  to  28  revolutions  of  the  Earth. 

The  Earth  still  revolves  upon  its  axis,  takes  in  an 
Ether  current  at  its  poles  and  throws  it  off  at  the 
equator.  One  of  which  currents  winds  to  the  right,  the 
other  to  the  left,  depending  upon  which  pole  the  cur- 
rent enters.  And  as  one  current  is  wound  to  the  right 
and  the  other  to  the  left,  the  outpouring  equatorial  flow 
forms  an  Ether  disc,  wherein,  on  account  of  the  different 
twist,  takes  on  difference  of  polarity  where  they  swing 
out  side  by  side  and  become  the  sustaining  and  pro- 
pelling force  of  the  Moon,  as  we  shall  note  the  effect 
upon  that  body  as  it  constantly  vibrates  north  and 
south,  plying  from  one  to  the  other  of  these  polar  dif- 
ferenciated  currents. 

The  Moon  to  us  has  the  appearance  of  rising  in  the 
east  and  setting  in  the  west,  while  in  truth  it  rises  in  the 
west  and  sets  in  the  east  once  every  twenty-eight  days. 

The  Moon,  of  course,  was  a  satellite  of  the  Earth, 
and,  by  the  way,  a  granddaughter  of  the  Sun.  The  Earth 
being  the  center  and  parental  focus  of  the  Moon's  crea- 
tion, was  naturally  the  center  and  larger  body  of  the 
two.  The  Moon,  however,  before  it  could  possibly  be 
transposed  from  nebula  or  condensed  energy,  must  cross 
the  bar  of  heat,  that  its  heat  may  afterward  condense 
into  liquid,  and  from  a  liquid  mass  into  crystallized 
matter.  In  order  for  it  to  have  rounded  into  a  globe, 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  129 

it  must  have  necessarily  rotated.  But  it  does  not  ro- 
tate now.  Neither  does  the  earth  rotate,  strictly  speak- 
ing, upon  its  polar  centers,  because  it  must  reel  to  the 
influence  of  the  moon.  Were  we  able  to  stand  out  in 
space  and  see  the  invisible  line  of  attraction  between  the 
Earth  and  Moon,  we  could  see  two  balls  whirling  around 
each  other  with  their  axis  center  outside  the  Earth  far 
enough  to  equalize  them  according  to  bulk.  The  Moon 
tide  on  the  ocean  is  caused  by  the  line  of  attraction  be- 
tween the  planets,  and  the  tide  which  takes  place  just 
opposite  the  point  of  attraction  of  the  Moon  is  caused 
by  the  centrifugal  force  from  the  actual  axis  center  be- 
tween the  Earth  and  the  Moon  (see  Plate  No.  18).  So 
while  we  are  rotating  upon  the  polar  axis  of  the  Earth, 
we  are  swinging  around  the  axis  of  the.  revolution  of 
the  Moon.  In  this  way  we  are  always  traveling  in  a  zig- 
zag course  in  our  revolution  around  the  Sun.  One 
other  point  we  might  mention  here  is  the  fact  that  the 
tie  between  the  Earth  and  Moon  has  the  effect  of  de- 
laying rotation  of  our  planet  at  least  forty  minutes 
per  day.  In  other  words,  if  we  had  no  Moon  our  days 
would  be  about  23  hours  and  16  minutes  long,  instead 
as  now  23  hours  and  56  minutes. 

Passing  from  the  Earth's  orbit  to  that  of  Mars,  the 
same  process  prevailed,  as  that  in  the  construction  of 
the  Earth.  With  the  difference  that  the  ring  disc  out  of 
which  Mars  was  rolled  up,  was  narrower  than  that  of 
the  Earth,  but  more  than  twice  its  circumferential  diam- 
eter. The  miniature  etheric  cyclone  that  created  Mars 
rolled  into  a  nucleus  with  two  rings  around  it,  one  much 
farther  out  than  the  other,  and  they  had  to  pass 
through  the  same  process  as  that  of  the  Earth.  In 
viewing  Mars  and  her  two  moons,  they  give  the  ap- 


130  Chapter  VII. 

pearance  of  one  moon  revolving  in  an  opposite  direction 
to  that  of  the  other,  because  of  the  fact  that  the  inner 
one  makes  its  revolution  about  twice  as  quickly  as  the 
outer  one,  giving  the  appearance  of  one  having  a  retro- 
grade motion.  And  since  Mars  has  two  moons  of  differ- 
ent revolutionary  time  Mars  could  not  have  an  axis,  even 
as  permanent  as  that  of  the  Earth  and  Moon,  for  Mars 
would  have  to  yield  to  the  varied  parts  displayed  be- 
tween two  alternating  moons,  hence  give  to  the  planet 
Mars  a  double  zig-zag  movement  as  it  revolves  around 
the  Sun. 

In  the  next  orbit  around  the  Sun,  out  beyond  Mars, 
are  a  series  of  small  planets  ranging  from  228  miles 
in  diameter  down  to  below  telescopic  vision.  Astron- 
omers are  disposed  to  believe  that  these  small  planets, 
which  are  called  asteroids,  are  the  result  of  a  bursted 
planet.  We  have  no  evidence  on  which  to  base  that  con- 
clusion. The  only  thing  we  do  know  is,  that  Nature 
gave  to  Mars  a  narrow  ring  just  inside  of  the  asteroids 
ring,  and  a  very  large  ring  to  Jupiter,  just  outside  the 
orbit  of  the  asteroids.  The  inference  would  be,  that 
the  orbit  of  the  asteroids  was  a  mere  sliver  lying  be- 
tween the  small  planet  Mars  and  the  monster  planet 
Jupiter.  That  there  was  not  marginal  width  in  the 
asteroid  ring  disc  to  roll  up  into  a  miniature  cyclone  to 
wind  up  the  nebulous  matter  of  that  ring  orbit,  and  the 
result  was  to  form  a  series  of  ether ic  vortices  whose 
nuclei  are  represented  by  the  600  odd  asteroids. 

In  the  case  of  the  orbit  around  the  Sun,  outside  the 
asteroids,  there  is  a  disc  ring  probably  three  hundred 
millions  of  miles  wide,  and  in  this  ring  has  been  formed 
the  cyclone  that  wound  into  one  planet  the  nebulous  con- 
densation of  that  orbit  forming  that  giant  planet 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  131 

Jupiter,  which  is  over  eleven  times  the  diameter  of  our 
earth,  with  four  rings,  which  were  in  their  regular  order 
rolled  up  into  moons. 

We  need  not  repeat  the  process,  only  to  say  that  the 
Jupiter  orbit  has  been  an  expression  of  the  same  invis- 
ible forces  that  were  operative  in  the  minor  planets 
created  before  it. 

There  is  one  thing  remarkable  about  Jupiter,  and 
that  is,  regardless  of  its  size,  it  is  the  most  rapid  ro- 
tating planet  within  our  solar  system.  Although  Jupiter 
is  29  times  larger  in  diameter  than  the  smallest  planet, 
Mercury,  it  nevertheless,  rotates  upon  its  axis  nearly 
three  times  to  Mercury's  once.  For  Jupiter,  86,000 
miles  in  diameter,  rotates  on  its  axis  every  9  hours  and 
45  minutes.  While  Mercury,  only  3,000  miles  in  diam- 
eter, takes  24  hours  and  5  minutes.  What  lesson  are 
we  to  learn  from  this  fact?  It  simply  proves  beyond 
question,,  and  designates  a  fact  that  holds  good  in  the 
case  of  Yenus,  Earth,  Mars  and  Saturn,  as  well  as 
Jupiter  and  Mercury,  that  the  force  rotating  a  planet 
operates  externally.  That  is,  it  is  rotated  according  to 
the  size  of  its  exposed  surface.  For  the  reason  a  large 
planet  has  more  surface  exposed  to  the  resistant  rays 
of  Sun  light  than  a  smaller  planet,  and  while  each  planet 
is  propelled  around  the  Sun  in  the  same  cyclonic  Ether 
inflow,  they  would  rotate  upon  their  axes  only  to  the 
extent  the  light  ray  resistance  effect  would  have  upon 
their  surfaces  exposed  to  the  Sun. 

There  is  only  one  seeming  case  of  variance,  and  that 
is  that  Venus  rotates  40  minutes  quicker  than  the  Earth, 
although  it  is  400  miles  smaller  in  diameter.  But  we 
find  Venus  has  no  moon,  hence  no  rotating  resistance 


132  Chapter  VII. 

to  overcome  -like  the  enormous  pull  our  Moon  has  upon 
the  Earth. 

In  the  case  of  the  orbit  Saturn,  the  next  disc  ring 
around  the  Sun  outside  of  Jupiter,  we  must  repeat, 
came  about  in  the  same  manner  as  the  planets  preced- 
ing it.  There  is  a  difference,  however,  in  the  number 
of  rings  it  established  in  its  miniature  Ether  cyclone 
disc,  for  Saturn  has  eight  moons,  and  two  rings  left 
over.  Taking  for  granted  the  ring  process  of  the  crea- 
tion of  planets  and  satellites  or  moons,  and  the  fact 
that  Saturn  had  rolled  up  eight  rings  into  moons,  it 
would  have  rolled  up  the  remaining  two  if  the  forces 
by  which  the  process  was  accomplished  had  not  been 
suspended.  The  evidence  is  that  the  various  planets, 
like  that  of  the  central  Sun,  became  each  a  molten  ball 
of  liquid,  and  as  such  are  miniature  suns  for  a  time, 
offering  light  resistance  by  which  rings  are  rolled  into 
moons.  The  internal  beat  of  Saturn  cooled  down  before 
the  last  two  rings  were  rolled  up,  and  they  are  now  left 
to  us  in  embryo  as  marvelous  records  forever. 

The  planet  Saturn  is  70,000  miles  in  diameter,  and 
about  16,000  miles  smaller  in  diameter  than  Jupiter, 
which  provides  it  with  less  surface  resistance  than  Jup- 
iter, and  for  that  reason  it  takes  Saturn  29  minutes 
longer  to  rotate  than  it  does  Jupiter. 

Outside  of  Saturn  is  the  orbit  Uranus  with  four 
moons,  and  then  the  orbit  with  Neptune  and  its  one 
moon.  The  distance  these  two  planets  are  away  from 
us  their  rotation  is  not  yet  ascertained.  The  probability 
is,  they  may  have  several  moons  that  we  cannot  reach 
by  our  telescopes;  yet  we  do  know  that  they  are  a  part 
of  our  solar  system,  that  they  are  a  result  of  the  same 
process  and  that  they  revolve  around  the  Sun  in  the 


New  System  of  Astronomy..  133 

same  equatorial  disc  and  in  the  same  direction  that  the 
Sun  rotates  upon  its  axis,  which  serves  as  indisput- 
able proof  that  the  whole  solar  system  is  operated  by 
the  one  and  same  invisible  force. 

The  system  we  have  outlined,  like  every  other  con- 
struction of  matter,  is  builded  from  the  center  out- 
ward. We  know  of  no  exception  to  this  rule. 

Not  only  is  everything  of  material  formation  builded 
from  a  center  outward,  but  everything  is  supplied  by 
an  energizing  involving  influx  from  without. 

A  thing,  therefore,  in  order  to  grow  outward,  must 
be  supplied  by  an  inflow  in  order  to  construct  it. 

If  a  thing  moves,  it  is  because  it  is  being  moved  by 
an  energy  greater  in  supply  than  is  required  to  simply 
maintain  it,  for  the  law  of  inertia  is  omnipresent,  and 
all  forms  take  on  states  of  rest  when  energy  ceases  and 
the  force  of  momentum  is  consumed  by  space  traversed. 

A  thing  to  come  into  existence  expresses  energy  ex- 
pended, and  action  is  but  expressing  energy  suspending, 
and  a  thing  having  perpetual  motion  must  have  per- 
petual energy  supply. 

Our  solar  system  reaches  from  the  Sun  out  to  and 
beyond  Neptune,  in  all  over  six  billions  of  miles.  The 
Sun  in  bulk  is  many  thousands  of  times  larger  than  the 
eight  planets,  twenty  moons  and  six  hundred  asteroids 
surrounding  it,  and  is  the  core  to  a  dynamic  etheric 
cyclone,  which  is  brought  about  by  the  Law  of  Affinity 
— gravitation — and  extended  by  the  same  law  into  plan- 
etary attraction. 

All  space  is  filled  with  Ether,  and  as  space  is  end- 
less, there  could  scarcely  be  a  case  of  Ether  pressure 
for  the  want  of  space  to  exist  in.  But  we  find  Ether 
on  the  Earth  surface  at  not  less  than  one  hundred  pounds 


134  Chapter  VII. 

pressure  to  the  square  inch.  In  determining  the  cause 
for  the  Ether  pressure  we  are  compelled  to  admit  an  in- 
flow pressure.  We  also  know  Ether  to  be  subject  to 
current  action  by  rotating  magnets,  as  is  done  in  the 
magnetic  battery.  And  that  it  is  subject  to  the  law  of 
gravity,  as  that  of  air  or  other  substances,  within  the 
measure  of  its  relative  density. 

We  can  find  the  pressure  of  Ether  by  insulating  the 
core  of  our  dynamos  and  note  that  it  produces  a  magnet 
of  about  one  hundred  pounds  to  the  surface  square  inch 
when  the  core  is  so  insulated,  which  means  an  Ether 
pressure  on  the  outside  when  the  Ether  is  centrifugally 
drawn  off  from  the  inside. 

Ether  has  weight,  or  in  other  words,  is  subject  to  at- 
traction and  momentum.  The  core  and  steel  armature 
of  a  dynamo,  when  set  in  motion,  throws  Ether  out  at 
its  periphery  or  equator  into  the  surrounding  air,  while 
it  draws  Ether  in  at  its  core  poles,  because  of  centrif- 
ugal motion,  and  shows  that  Ether  has  a  substance, 
commodity  or  weight.  If  there  be  receiving  fields  of 
steel  outside  of  the  revolving  armature,  the  current  of 
Ether  will  be  thrown  across  the  air  space  between  the 
armature  and  field  receiver  and  be  taken  up  in  the  lat- 
ter in  compressed  formation,  equaling  in  pressure  that 
of  the  centrifugal  force  expended,  less  the  resistance  of- 
fered by  the  air  space  between.  The  Ether  pressure  ac- 
cumulating in  the  field,  when  turned  loose  over  wires 
and  carbon  points,  produce  what  is  known  as  the  arc 
light. 

The  Ether  pressure  necessary  to  produce  an  arc  light 
of  consequence  must  be  at  least  100  pounds  to  the  square 
inch  over  and  above  the  zero  pressure. 

The  exact  Ether  pressure  can  be  determined  by  the 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  135 

power  used  to  drive  the  dynamo,  or  by  the  power  gen- 
erated at  the  motor  it  passes  over.  It  is  peculiar,  how- 
ever, to  note  that  Ether  pressure  can  be  maintained  in 
a  steel  wire  running  up  into  hundreds  of  horse  power 
with  but  very  little  waste.  All  this  is  due  to  the  fact 
that  the  atmosphere — common  air — is  a  poor  conductor 
of  Ether,  although  the  air  itself  is  filled  with  Ether.  In 
low  voltage  currents  one-sixteenth  of  an  inch  is  suffi- 
cient atmosphere  to  insulate  a  laden  wire,  but  when  the 
voltage  is  increased  high  enough  it  not  only  loses  its 
attraction  to  gravity  to  a  degree,  but  overcomes  the  at- 
mospheric resistance  in  like  proportion. 

Ether,  like  that  of  water  or  air,  is  subject  to  whirling 
discs  or  vortices.  But  being  much  finer  substance  than 
either  water  or  air,  yields  to  the  principle  of  motion 
much  easier  and  to  a  larger  extent. 

We  must  note  at  this  point  that  a  nucleus  of  matter 
cannot  be  constructed  except  by  the  effect  of  a  vortex 
and  heat.  And  when  we  look  into  the  heavens  and  see 
the  myriads  of  stars  and  planets,  we  must  also  note  that 
the  stars  are  all  nuclei  or  vortice  centers  of  immense 
whirling  Ether  discs. 

These  discs  do  not  jam  one  against  another.  In  fact, 
cannot  do  so,  without  repelling  each  other.  The  inter- 
mediate space  between  discs  and  their  polar  fields  are 
bound  to  be  zero  fields.  That  is  to  say,  this  space  is 
without  afferent  pressure  or  motion. 

From  the  zero  field  Ether  pressure  must  gradually 
increase  upon  the  center  as  it  inwinds  upon  the  basis  of 
geometrical  law  of  three  to  one,  beginning  at  its  outer 
edge  at  zero  and  gradually  increasing  upon  that  basis 
until  it  reaches  the  center  where  the  circumference 
would  multiply  its  pressure  upon  the  center  three  times 


136  Chapter  VII. 

for  every  circuit  it  makes  around  the  center,  together 
with  the  fact  that  each  revolution  made  becomes  a  com- 
pound plane  from  which  the  multiple  three  is  added. 
We  call  the  reader's  attention  to  this  because  it  is  the 
working  of  the  circumference  leverage  principle  of  geom- 
etry and  laws  of  motion. 

When  you  understand  these  facts,  you  will  readily  see 
why  a  cyclone,  although  not  extending  out  over  a  space 
of  100  yards,  winds  itself  around  multiplying  and  com- 
pounding upon,  its  center,  until  at  its  core  it  is  enabled 
to  lift  a  locomotive  off  its  track. 

Having  laid  the  premises  of  the  zero  field  of  Ether, 
the  geometrical  law  of  motion  and  its  effects  as  ex- 
pressed in  an  aerial  cyclone,  we  are  prepared  now  to  con- 
sider a  dynamic  cyclone  Ether  disc  that  condenses  nuclei 
Sun  centers  and  constructs  them  into  monstrous  Suns 
and  solar  systems. 

Taking  our  own  solar  system  into  account,  it  at  pres- 
ent time  extends  out  no  less  than  six  billions  of  miles, 
and  revolving  around  with  a  slight  incline  toward  the 
central  Sun,  with  no  pressure  at  its  periphery,  until  it 
falls  into  the  orbit  of  Neptune,  where  it  must  have  gen- 
erated a  pressure  or  the  planet  Neptune  could  not  have 
been  constructed. 

At  the  plane  or  orbit  of  Neptune,  the  revolving  disc 
travels  nineteen  and  one-half  miles  per  second,  and  re- 
quires one  hundred  and  sixty-five  years  to  make  one 
revolution  around  the  Sun.  Having  made  one  revolu- 
tion, the  next  plane  within  receives  an  inwinding  pres- 
sure of  three  to  one  of  what  the  outer  orbit  contained. 

Next  we  reach  the  orbit  Uranus,  and  within  this 
orbit  the  revolving  disc  makes  its  revolution  around  the 
Sun  in  eighty-four  years,  adding  again  three  to  one  of 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  137 

its  Ether  pressure.  The  disc  itself  travels  no  faster  at 
this  plane,  but  it  has  less  space  over  which  to  travel, 
and  the  leverage  of  the  ouler  and  greater  space  is  inten- 
sified upon  the  lesser,  which  adds  to  the  less  the  sum 
total  of  the  greater,  so  that  each  cycle  made  multiplies 
its  force  upon  the  one  next  within. 

From  the  orbit  of  Uranus  to  that  of  the  orbit  of 
Saturn,  and  from  Saturn  to  the  orbit  of  Jupiter,  and 
from  Jupiter  to  the  orbit  of  the  Asteroids,  and  from 
the  Asteroids  to  the  orbit  of  Mars,  and  from  Mars  to 
the  orbit  of  the  Earth,  the  same  inwind  goes  on,  trav- 
eling at  the  same  rate  of  speed,  but  constantly  being 
confined  to  a  greater  and  greater  intensity,  until  we 
have  on  our  Earth  orbit  an  Ether  pressure  of  not  less 
than  100  pounds  to  the  square  inch. 

The  same  inwind  continues  until  it  reaches  the  orbit 
of  Venus,  and  from  Venus  to  the  orbit  of  Mercury,  and 
from  the  orbit  of  Mercury  to  the  disc  of  the  Sun. 

Each  orbit  disc  traveling  at  the  same  speed,  and  each 
one,  as  it  nears  the  center,  having  a  lesser  distance  to 
travel,  makes  its  circuit  that  much  quicker,  but  just 
in  proportion  as  the  distance  is  lessened  the  intensifica- 
tion increases,  as  well  as  having  added  thereto  the  mul- 
tiple leverage  force  from  the  orbit  next  outside  it. 

Putting  our  solar  system  and  its  Ether  cyclone  disc 
into  a  nut  shell,  the  outer  circuit  is  made  in  165  years, 
the  next  within  84  years,  the  next  29  y^  years,  'the 
next  12  years,  the  next  5^  years,  the  next  687  days, 
the  next  365  days,  the  next  224  days,  the  next  88  days, 
and  lastly  the  Sun  itself  upon  its  center  in  28  days. 

We  know  Ether  pressure  to  be  100  pounds  to  the 
square  inch  on  the  Earth's  orbit,  because  we  have  this 
pressure  supply  always  at  hand  and  constantly  avail- 


138  Chapter  VII. 

able  to  the  cores  of  our  dynamos.  If  we  did  not  have 
this  pressure  supply,  we  should  have  to  provide  a  means 
of  getting  it  into  our  armatures,  before  we  could  throw 
it  off  by  centrifugal  motion  into  receiving  fields  of  wires 
or  storage  batteries,  but  it  is  always  there  and  with  a 
never-failing  pressure  supply. 

You  may  now  wonder  why,  if  we  are  under  an  Ether 
pressure  of  100  pounds  per  square  inch,  that  we  do 
not  feel  it.  It  is  due  to  the  fact  that  Ether  interpene- 
trates everything,  and  is  constant,  otherwise  we  should 
feel  it  as  we  certainly  do  when  the  chain  of  constancy  is 
disturbed  by  alternating  currents  passing  through  our 
bodies. 

Coming  back  to  the  subject  again,  we  note  that  each 
planet  within  our  solar  system  travels  about  the  same 
speed  because  it  floats  within  the  same  inwhirling  Ether 
disc,  although  each  planet  remains  within  its  own  orbit 
but  is  held  out  by  centrifugal  motion,  which  motion  is 
maintained  by  the  Ether  current  the  planet  floats  in, 
and  is  held  from  passing  farther  out  by  gravitation  to 
the  Sun.  All  the  planets  travel  the  same  way  around 
the  Sun,  within  the  same  disc,  including  that  of  the 
Sun,  which  rotates  upon  its  center  in  the  same  way 
each  of  the  planets  revolve. 

In  addition  to  the  fact  that  the  whole  system  revolves 
in  the  same  direction  and  that  the  motion  is  maintained 
with  minute  accuracy,  we  note  that  the  planets  rotate 
upon  their  axes  in  the  same  direction  as  they  revolve, 
which  fact  compels  that  part  of  the  planet  farthest  out 
from  the  Sun,  as  well  as  that  part  which  has  the  great- 
est distance  to  travel,  to  move  faster.  The  evidence  is, 
that  the  force  driving  the  planets  around  the  Sun,  as 
well  as  the  Sun  itself,  must  have  its  propelling  force 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  139 

supplied  from  the  outer  periphery,  as  would  certainly  be 
the  case  in  the  cyclone  Ether  disc.  Furthermore,  inas- 
much as  the  inside  of  a  circle  has  the  lesser  distance  to 
travel  in  making  its  revolution  around  the  Sun,  it  would 
have  less  resistance  against  the  space  it  traversed,  and 
even  then  would  not  rotate  unless  there  was  a  specific 
resistance  set  up,  and  we  find  this  resistance  in  the  pro- 
jecting light  rays  pouring  out  against  the  surface  of  the 
planets  whose  inner  peripheries  are  always  exposed  to 
the  rays  of  the  Sun. 

For  additional  proof  that  the  Sun  light  offers  re- 
sistance to  revolving  planets,  compelling  the  outer  peri- 
phery to  rotate  faster  as  well  as  travel  farthest,  we  find 
that  the  planet  travels  six  times  as  far  through  space,  in 
its  circuit  around  the  Sun,  as  its  surface  rotates,  which 
establishes  the  current  driving  force  to  be  at  a  point 
about  seven  degrees  off  from  a  right  angle  of  the  re- 
sisting angle  of  the  resisting  light  rays  of  the  Sun, 
which  gives  us  a  perfect  conclusion  of  the  degree  of 
incline  that  the  inwinding  Ether  takes,  and  explains 
why  we  have  Ether  pressure  at  our  Earth's  orbit.  It 
also  supplies  indisputable  evidence  of  the  increased 
Ether  pressure  when  reaching  the  Sun's  equator,  giv- 
ing it  a  pressure  sufficient  to  round  up  the  Sun's  equator 
to  that  of  a  symmetrical  globe,  as  well  as  intensify  its 
force  upon  that  focal  center  to  produce  an  arc  light  of 
over  18,000  degrees  of  heat,  and  more  than  500  times 
greater  in  intensity  than  our  most  powerful  arc  lights. 

WHAT  ARE  SUN  SPOTS? 

The  Ether  pouring  into  the  Sun  in  gigantic  propor- 
tions, intensely  cold,  produces  chill  cakes  upon  the  Sun's 
surface  called  Sun  Spots.  The  point  at  which  they 
mostly  occur  would  be  midway  between  the  equator  and 


140  Chapter  VII. 

the  poles.  Because  the  natural  place  for  the  Sun's 
frost  line  is  midway  between  the  poles,  where  the  Ether 
disc  has  the  least  pressure,  and  the  equator  where  it 
has  the  greatest  pressure,  for  the  reason  the  equator's  out- 
pouring of  heat  is  the  greatest  and  at  the  poles  the  least, 
which  overcomes  the  intense  cold  and  counterbalances 
its  effect.  This  being  what  might  be  expected,  crust 
formation  takes  place  at  about  23  degrees  off  from  the 
equator  of  the  Sun  and  at  times  form  into  floating 
islands  toward  the  equator,  where  they  melt  away,  or 
are  driven  into  the  body  of  the  Sun  by  the  inflowing 
Ether. 

Ether  pouring  into  the  Sun  is  melted  into  matter,  as 
in  the  case  of  all  condensing  substance,  and  in  that 
way  energy  of  space  is  condensed  into  solidified  matter, 
which,  however,  never  takes  place  without  passing  over 
the  bridge  of  fire. 

All  energy  or  even  all  Ether  substance  cannot  be 
transposed  to  matter  at  one  cycle  of  action,  hence  part 
of  the  inpouring  Ether  melts  into  solidified  matter  and 
remains,  and  thus  maintains  the  heat  and  constructs 
the  body  of  the  Sun,  while  a  much  greater  portion  is 
converted  to  efferent  force  that  pours  out  into  space  in 
all  directions  in  Sun  light  energy.  A  substance  at 
least  11,000  times  finer  than  the  Ether  rolling  into  the 
Sun. 

The  energy  being  so  much  finer  than  normal  Ether 
(although  Ether  itself  is  many  thousands  of  times  finer 
than  air)  travels  over  first  dimentional  lines  at  a  speed 
of  186,300  miles  per  second,  and  passes  through  the 
normal  Ether  without  resistance  just  as  Ether  itself 
passes  through  steel  without  resistance. 

Neither  light  nor  heat  pass  from  the  Sun  in  the  Sun 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  141 

light  energy.  It  is,  however,  a  purely  efferent  force, 
which  penetrates  the  darkness  of  space  and  its  frigid 
coldness  without  resistance  until  it  strikes  planes  of 
matter,  which  come  under  the  head  of  solids,  liquids 
and  gases.  When  striking  either  of  these  planes  of  mat- 
ter, it  finds  a  base  of  resistance  that  offers  its  compen- 
sation in  regenerating  light  and  heat. 

Energy,  like  everything  else,  never  loses  its  inherited 
character,  and  when  it  meets  its  fulcrum  the  mother 
side  of  Nature  regenerates  its  character.  That  is  why 
Sun  efferent  energy,  after  penetrating  billions  of  miles 
of  cold,  dark  Ether  seas,  can  reproduce  its  specific  char- 
acteristic. 

Sun  rays  when  caught  up  by  the  atmosphere  reflect 
upon  the  surfaces  of  air  particles,  or  gases,  and  cause 
our  reflected  or  white  light  we  call  daylight.  The  direct 
Sun  rays  supply  the  seven  prismatic  colors  as  their 
length  is  divided  upon  surface  reflectors. 

Efferent  forces  that  are  constantly  poured  out  from 
the  central  Suns  pass  into  surrounding  space,  and  when 
their  force  is  entirely  spent,  are  again  taken  up  by  the 
Ether  of  space  to  be  again  wound  into  some  central  Sun. 
Not  necessarily  the  Sun  from  which  it  came  forth,  be- 
cause it  has  gone  out  to  fill  its  mission  of  a  repellant 
force  to  keep  out  other  Suns'  encroachments,  and  in  this 
way  the  light  of  the  stars  (for  every  twinkling  star  is 
a  Sun)  maintains  to  each  a  place  in  space,  and  at  the 
same  time  provides  protection  over  the  planets  of  each 
star's  system  from  all  outside  interference,  while  each 
star  throws  around  its  own  family  circle  the  Immutable 
Law  of  gravity — Nature's  love  embrace. 

Yortic  discs  do  not  all  lay  the  same  way  in  space. 
They  do,  however,  extend  a  far-reaching  effect  from 


142  Chapter  VII. 

their  disc  lines  and  a  much  lesser  distance  from  their 
polar  sides.  The  angle  they  happen  to  assume  in  their 
revolution  determines  the  line  of  space  each  occupies. 
This  will  account  for  the  irregular  position  of  the  stars. 

Taking  into  consideration  the  fact  that  planets  re- 
volve around  their  central  suns  at  the  speed  of  19^ 
miles  per  second,  and  that  it  is  due  to  this  revolving 
motion  that  the  planets  are  held  out  in  space  against 
the  enormous  attraction  of  gravity  toward  their  central 
Sun.  We  must  note  the  significance  of  this  tremendous 
force,  as  well  as  attempt  to  account  for  it. 

No  intelligent  person  disputes  the  fact  that  the  Moou 
pulls  upon  the  Earth,  and  that  it  is  due  to  the  attraction 
of  the  Moon  that  causes  the  Moon  tide.  But  how  many 
of  us  have  considered  what  that  attraction  means  in  the 
aggregate,  or  formed  any  idea  of  the  immense 
force  that  is  needed  to  keep  a  planet  in  centrifugal 
motion  to  overcome,  or  counterbalance  the  attraction? 
Let  it  be  understood  that  one  cannot  get  something 
for  nothing,  and  were  it  not  for  the  constant  revolving 
motion  of  the  planets  they  would  fall  into  the  Sun  by 
gravity,  as  a  weight  would  fall  to  the  Earth.  Now 
what  is  the  source  of  planetary  revolving  motion,  and 
how  is  it  maintained  against  that  constant  pull  of  grav- 
ity or  planetary  attraction? 

The  answer  is,  the  law  of  attraction  sustains  its  own 
source  of  energy  as  it  operates  over  and  between  planes. 
Water  falls  to  the  Earth,  but  is  forced  to  rise  again  by 
the  same  Law,  when  it  is  divided  into  finer  planes  of 
existence.  Sap  flows  up  a  tree  because  of  the  fineness 
of  the  tree  tubes,  or  rises  in  vapor  because  of  vapor's 
finely  separated  particles,  only  to  drop  back  again  when 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  143 

condensed  to  a  plane  of  specific  gravity,  when  it  becomes 
like  unto  the  plane  to  which  it  is  attracted. 

The  inwhirling  Ether  drawn  to  the  Sun  as  a  point  of 
central  gravity  supplies  the  revolving  sea  upon  which 
planets  float.  Ether  would  not  pour  into  the  Sun  if 
it  was  not  for  the  Law  of  gravity.  Planets  are  attracted 
to  the  central  Sun  with  more  specific  gravity  than  is 
that  of  Ether  many  times  over.  But  as  Ether  is  so  much 
less  dense,  has  also  less  of  centrifugal  force,  and  presses 
its  way  into  the  Sun  while  the  planets,  because  of  their 
density,  are  held  out  by  centrifugal  force.  Thus  attrac- 
tion furnishes  the  energy  to  revolve  a  planet  in  a 
perfect  counterbalance  against  its  own  gravitation. 

While  the  subject  of  gravity  is  before  us  we  feel  it 
essential  to  illustrate  what  a  monstrous  proportion  it  is. 
We  can  determine  the  force  of  gravity  of  the  Moon  by 
the  measure  of  the  tide  in  the  ocean,  the  average  height 
of  which  is  3^  feet.  This  pull  of  gravity  is  not  upon 
the  water  alone,  but  the  whole  of  the  Earth's  globe. 
The  water,  however,  being  fluent,  yields  to  the  influ- 
ence and  flows  in  keeping  with  that  influence.  Not  the 
water  alone,  but  the  crust  of  the  Earth  also  yields  to 
the  Moon's  gravity,  and  although  we,  here  in  St.  Louis, 
Mo.,  think  we  are  on  terra  firma,  nevertheless  every  time 
the  Moon  passes  over  us,  the  land  surface  on  which  we 
stand  raises  not  less  than  three  and  one-half  feet  and 
settles  back  after  the  Moon  passes.  This  is  due  to  the 
fact  that  our  globe  is  not  solid,  but  is  a  mass  of  molten 
liquid  under  a  crust  and  this  crust  yields  in  tide  waves 
to  the  extent  that  all  the  solidified  rocks  of  the  earth 
crust  are  cracked  into  seams,  some  of  which  form  great 
slips,  and  slow  action  landslides. 

What  is  the  force  thus  expressed?    It  is  1%  pounds 


144  Chapter  VII. 

to  the  square  inch,  258  pounds  to  the  square  foot,  5,688 
tons  to  the  acre,  over  3^  millions  of  tons  to  the 
square  mile  (3,596,313  tons),  and  when  spread  to  one- 
third  of  the  Earth's  surface,  or  that  portion  exposed  to 
the  tide,  amounts  to  over  230  trillions  of  tons  (230,- 
164,110,400,000  tons),  yet  in  spite  of  this  enormous 
gravity  pull  upon  our  planet,  we  have  no  scales  that  can 
weigh  it.  It  does  not  pull  upon  the  object,  but  the 
/whole  planet,  which,  when  applied  to  each  particle,  is 
infinitesimally  small. 

The  Sun  being  400  times  larger  than  the  Moon,  and 
400  times  farther  away  from  us,  provides  the  same  pro- 
portion of  attraction.  But  as  the  Sun  is  a  brilliant  body 
it  reflects  an  efferent  force  sufficient  to  overcome  four- 
fifths  of  the  attraction,  hence  we  have  about  an  aver- 
age six-inch  Sun  tide  only.  If  both  planets  were  bril- 
liant there  would  be  no  tide,  because  the  attraction  would 
be  completely  overcome  and  the  surplus  of  efferent  force 
doubled.  With  this  surplus  the  planets  would  be  pressed 
farther  apart,  as  is  the  case  with  the  myriads  of  stars 
in  space. 

The  Sun  light  energy  strikes  the  Earth's  surface  with 
a  force  sufficient  to  re-generate  heat  and  light,  just  like 
that  of  the  Sun,  for  the  character  is  never  lost.  This 
force  expended  upon  the  Earth's  surface  equals  one- 
horse  power  for  every  square  foot  every  twenty  four 
hours. 

SHOOTING  STARS  OR  METEORS. 

The  formation  of  attraction  centers,  and  the  inwhirl- 
ing  motion  that  complies  with  the  law,  is  everywhere 
present  and  potential.  It  occurs  upon  every  favorable 
impulse.  Ether  is  more  fluent  and  in  consequence  more 
susceptible  to  the  law  than  liquids  or  gases,  and 


New  System  of  Astronomy.  145 

any  disturbance  out  of  the  regular  forces,  such  as  planets 
passing  in  conjunction  in  space,  or  the  shadows  of  Sun 
spots  crossing  space,  will  set  up  vortices  in  Ether,  and 
when  once  started  they  grow  and  become  more  and  more 
condensed  as  they  float  within  the  grand  Ether  disc, 
and  are  picked  up  as  they  cross  the  orbits  in  proximity 
to  planets  and  are  drawn  in.  When  these  vortices  strike 
our  atmosphere,  the  resistance  our  atmosphere  offers 
causes  the  Ether  vortices  to  melt  into  matter  and  fall 
to  the  planet  in  a  chunk,  or  sometimes  to  burst  into 
fragments  in  their  sudden  cooling  as  the  movement 
dies  down  and  they  fall  to  the  earth  in  dust  specks. 

These  manifestations  are  called  meteors,  or,  by  some, 
shooting  stars.  It  is  generally  believed  that  they  are 
fragments  thown  off  from  planets  by  volcanic  actions, 
but  there  is  no  reasonable  explanation  how  the  force  of 
a  volcano  could  send  out  any  portion  of  lava  beyond 
the  unlimited  reach  of  the  attraction  of  the  planet  pos- 
sessing it.  While  the  Laws  of  Motion,  as  explained  in 
the  Ether  vortice,  is  a  logical  conclusion. 

Every  disturbance  of  Ether  disturbs  the  atmosphere 
around  our  planet,  so  that  the  conjunction  of  planets, 
like  cars  passing  each  other  on  tracks,  disturbs  the  air, 
or  the  shadows  of  Sun  spots,  though  invisible  to  the 
eye,  have  their  effect  in  changing  our  weather  to  vio- 
lent storms.  If  there  were  no  disturbance,  weather  would 
be  a  constant  calm  and  rainfalls  would  be  even  and 
gradual. 

The  atmosphere  is  a  non-conductor  of  Ether,  although 
the  air  is  loaded  with  Ether,  it  rejects  a  free  passage 
of  it,  which  produces  openings  and  pockets  causing  lay- 
ers of  cold  or  hot  waves.  In  this  way  the  atmosphere  is 
a  pillow  of  protection  over  us  in  catching  the  force  of 


146  Chapter  VII. 

Ether  balls,  as  well  as  a  blanket  to  protect  us  from  the 
frigid  Ether  of  space  that  would,  if  not  for  this  pro- 
tection, freeze  organic  life  out  of  existence  in  less  than 
a  second  of  time. 

COMETS. 

The  same  law  that  produces  the  Ether  vortex  and 
the  nucleus  centers  forming  planets  is  expressed  in  the 
formation  of  comets.  I  contend  that  comets  are  not  of 
regular  order  nor  do  they  have  regular  intervals  of  ap- 
pearance, but  that  they  are  etheric  vortices  formed  out  in 
space  and  approach  our  Sun  at  one  or  the  other  of  the 
polar  heavens,  and  are  drawn  in  by  the  attraction  of  the 
Sun.  They  are  more  dense  than  meteors  and  offer  a 
resistance  to  the  light  of  the  Sun,  causing  shadows  to 
be  cast  behind  them.  When  they  come  in  close  proxim- 
ity to  the  Sun  the  light  entirely  overcomes  the  attrac- 
tion, and  they  are  taken  up  in  the  Sun's  Ether  disc, 
thrown  around  it  in  the  way  of  the  travel  of  the  disc, 
and  immediately  shot  off  into  space  with  the  shadow, 
or  what  we  call  the  tail,  always  projecting  away  from 
the  Sun.  Being  more  dense  than  normal  Ether,  they, 
like  planets,  would  possess  centrifugal  force,  and  could 
not  flow  into  the  Sun  by  way  of  the  disc  influx,  but 
like  the  planets  be  held  out  within  the  orbits  of  the 
outer  rim  of  the  disc,  unless  the  approach  is  made  out- 
side of  the  disc,  which  before  reaching  the  Sun,  pene- 
trates the  disc  giving  its  whirl  around  the  Sun  as  the 
light  force  propels  it  off. 

This  being  the  case  a  comet  cannot  penetrate  the  solar 
system  to  the  interference  of  any  planet,  because  of  its 
density,  being  sufficient  to  take  on  centrifugal  force, 
or  penetrate  the  Sun  while  it  offers  a  resistance  to  sun- 
light sufficient  to  produce  a  shadow. 


CHAPTER  VIII. 

EVERYTHING   THE   RECORD    OF   ITS   CREA- 
TION, OR  A  SOUL  WITHIN  EVERYTHING. 

In  dealing  with  the  subject,  "A  Soul  Within  Every- 
thing," let  us  first  consider  what  is  meant  by  Soul.  The 
Soul  has  often  been  construed  to  mean  the  inner  or  im- 
mortal part  of  man.  That  part  which  survives  the 
physical  body  and  departs  from  it  in  the  event  called 
death.  Our  version  of  the  Soul  would  mean  that  por- 
tion of  us  that  lives  in  memory.  Not  the  active  forces, 
but  that  which  becomes  the  record  of  our  being — our 
mental  combination.  In  other  words,  our  mental  or- 
ganization, which  to  all  intents  and  purposes  is  a  body, 
because  it  is  a  created  thing.  It  begins  in  its  first 
thought  and  motion  and  grows  by  each  other  thought 
and  motion  thereafter.  The  Soul  in  itsolf  cannot  move, 
but  is  moved  by  the  forces  within,  as  any  other  body 
is  moved.  That  is  to  say,  it  can  move  as  a  form  in 
relation  to  other  things,  but  is  bound  in  memory  fixity 
relative  to  itself.  In  other  words,  the  soul  of  any  thing 
is  the  permanent  fixity  of  the  thing  that  in  order  to 
express  movement  must  do  so  by  a  dual  nature — an 
active  partner,  wherein  the  living,  active  part  is  co- 
jointly  connected  with  the  silent  part,  and  the  two  ex- 
tremes become  the  dual — one. 

Energy  expending  itself  condenses  movements  into 
record  and  that  record  has  an  organization  possesing 
action  and  silence — life  and  form.  Any  movement 
made,  any  energy  expended,  records  its  movement,  in- 
cluding environment  and  character,  and  although  the 


148  Chapter  VIII. 

movement  ceases  and  the  whole  becomes  a  silent  record 
without  activity,  it  is  nevertheless  a  thing  of  matter, 
and  the  record  and  character  of  that  matter  is  its  Soul. 

Soul  is  a  thing  created.  It  is  not  life  but  uses  Life, 
for  Life  is  a  principle  of  action,  not  a  thing.  The 
Soul  is  a  thing  of  development  and  growth,  but  Life  i? 
not.,  for  Life  is  a  limitless  force.  We  cannot  know  a 
thing  by  the  Life  it  uses,  but  we  know  it  by  the  inherent 
character  and  record  it  possesses.  Each  thing  having 
a  different  record  and  different  environment,  differs 
in  its  Soul  qualities  and  we  know  its  qualities  only  as  a 
Soul's  expression. 

All  expended  energy  takes  on  the  state  of  sleep,  and 
this  condition  we  call  the  sleep  state  of  Nature,  which 
embraces  primordially  about  one  hundred  different 
basic  physical  elements. 

In  addition  to  the  elements  of  the  base  physical  mat- 
ter there  are  an  endless  number  of  planes  where  finer 
and  finer  forms  are  constructed,  and  each  of  these 
forms  working  under  the  same  Law,  record  their  Soul 
characteristics  within  them.  For  illustration,  the  physi- 
cal body  is  a  formation  within  the  physical  plane,  and 
each  for  itself  bears  its  physical  characteristics  or  Soul 
records.  Within  the  physical  form  is  a  mental  organiza- 
tion of  a  higher  plane,  and  it,  like  the  physical  body, 
is  a  combination — a  construction,  hence  a  body — that 
moves  as  a  whole,  relative  to  other  things,  but  not  as 
to  itself,  and  in  due  time  separates  from  the  lower  phys- 
ical plane  in  what  is  called  death.  The  mind  body,  like 
the  physical  body,  has  its  active  (thinking)  part,  and  its 
silent  (memory)  part,  hence  a  dual  oneness  that,  like 
the  former,  lives  in  the  wake  and  sleep  states  of  Na- 


Record  of  Creation.  149 

ture  in  a  higher  plane,  which  is  not  broken  down  in  the 
change  called  death. 

We  are  told  that  "the  Creator  breathed  into  the  nos- 
trils of  Man  the  breath  of  Life,  and  he  became  a  living 
Soul."  Still,  we  are  not  informed  as  to  what  a  living 
Soul  is.  The  idea  of  the  breath  of  Life  came  to  man 
very  naturally  through  the  fact  that  at  birth  he  mani- 
fested Life  when  he  began  to  breathe,  and  at  death  he 
ceased  to  breathe.  Later  on  it  was  discovered  that  man 
ceased  to  live  and  even  breathe  when  he  had  suffered 
extreme  loss  of  blood,  so  the  conclusion  followed  that 
Life  was  in  the  blood. 

There  is  no  argument  supporting  the  belief  that  man 
is  a  living  soul  because  he  had  breathed  into  his  nostrils 
the  breath  of  Life.  Every  reptile,  animal  or  bird  breathes 
through  their  nostrils  in  the  same  manner  that  man 
does.  We  might  also  go  farther  and  include  vegetable 
life,  for  the  leaves  on  the  trees  and  plants  have  nostrils 
and  breathe. 

It  is  not  because  a  thing  breathes  that  it  has  a  Soul, 
although  the  breathing  gives  to  it  a  larger  expression 
of  Life.  For  everything  has  a  Soul,  including  each  of 
its  combinations.  The  Soul  in  fact  is  the  intrinsic  qual- 
ity, character  and  record  of  the  thing.  The  body  has 
intrinsic  qualities  and  character,  so  has  the  mind.  The 
one  is  mortal,  the  other  immortal.  The  mortal  remains 
in  the  lower  physical  plane,  and  the  immortal  is  already 
within  the  mental  plane.  Yet  for  a  time  they  both 
occupy  the  same  body,  one  possessing  a  physical  record, 
the  other  a  mental  record.  The  one  consumes  physical 
substance,  the  other  thought  substance.  One  is  auto- 
matic, the  other  becomes  arbitrary. 

The  physical  soul  is  subject  to  dissolution  and  chem- 


150  Chapter  VIII. 

ical  change,  while  the  mental  is  not  subject  to  decompo- 
sition, but  lives  in  a  plane  where  it  is  itself  a  creator. 

The  botanist  can  read  the  record  and  character  of 
the  flowers  in  their  shapes,  colors  and  variety  of  for- 
mation, as  well  as  the  ingredient  qualities  in  stalk,  leaf 
and  petal.  He  can  name  every  variety  of  fruit  by  their 
outer  appearance,  shape  and  colors,  or  by  their  taste  and 
smell.  He  can  name  the  different  kinds  of  wood  by  their 
fiber,  quality  and  the  indelible  records  within  their  grain. 
For  each  inherit  and  bear  the  record  of  their  own  age, 
durability  and  character.  Each  and  every  one  bears  the 
record  of  its  own  creation  and  we  can  read  it  by  the 
Soul  within  it. 

The  farmer  can  tell  the  character  of  the  grain  he 
cultivates;  he  can  also  tell  the  character  of  each  animal 
of  his  flocks,  because  each  bears  its  own  distinction.  Each 
have  records  of  their  own  creation,  and  we  know  them 
by  the  Souls  within  them. 

The  geologist  knows  the  character  and  record  of  the 
soil  upon  which  we  trod.  He  can  read  each  individual 
rock  in  the  infallible  record  it  bears  of  its  past.  He 
knows  its  age,  environment  and  character  when  he  sees 
it.  Each  layer,  like  the  leaves  of  a  book,  reveals  its  won- 
drous history. 

Old  M'other  Earth,  like  every  other  thing,  has  a  Soul 
within  it.  If  we  cannot  read  it,  it  is  our  shortcoming, 
for  it  is  there,  a  marvelous  and  enduring  record  of  its 
past. 


CHAPTER  IX. 
EVERYTHING  A  PARASITE. 

Everything  that  depends  for  its  existence  upon  some- 
thing else,  is  a  parasite.  What  is  not  dependent  for  its 
existence  upon  some  other  thing  or  things? 

In  order  to  reach  back  to  a  point  where  there  is  likely 
to  be  nothing  upon  which  to  rest,  we  finally  get  back  to 
the  Principles  upon  which  all  things  rest 

Everything  in  existence  is  dependent,  but  constantly 
struggling  for  independence. 

Nothing  upon  the  physical  plane  can  be  said  to  be 
absolutely  independent.  And  inasmuch  as  a  thing  is 
dependent  upon  other  things,  it  is  to  that  degree  a 
parasite. 

Basic  Matter  is  a  parasite  upon  the  casual  Principles 
of  nature.  The  mineral  kingdom  in  its  salt  and  carbona 
germinate  vegetable  organic  life.  Beginning  very  slowly 
at  first,  it  evolves  to  endless  capacity  and  diversity. 

Decomposed,  decayed  or  digested  vegetation  becomes 
the  basis  of  protoplasm,  and  out  of  photoplasm  the  ani- 
mal kingdom  evolves.  And  from  and  upon  the  vege- 
table it  must  ever  live  and  rest  a  parasite  upon  that 
kingdom. 

Out  of  the  animal  kingdom  has  gradually  evolved  the 
mental  world  with  its  independent  Will,  Reason  and 
Imagination,  and  whether  or  not  these  functions  remain 
dependent,  they  certainly  are,  as  a  basic  source,  para- 
sites upon  the  animal  kingdom. 

Vegetables  depend  upon  the  salts  and  carbons  as  well 
as  fix  their  roots  in  the  base  of  solidified  matter.  What 


152  Chapter  IX. 

they  supply  and  eject  goes  to  feed  the  animal  world 
Vegetables  absorb  the  carbons  and  give  off  oxygen.  Ani- 
mals take  up  the  oxygen  and  eject  the  carbons — and  to- 
that  degree  vegetation  co-operates  with  the  animal  king- 
dom. Being  fixed  to  the  ground  vegetation  is  inde- 
pendent as  to  movement,,  but  is  entirely  dependent  for 
sustenance  upon  the  carboniferous  food  it  extracts  from 
the  Earth  and  the  air. 

The  mental  world  depends  upon  its  basic  central  func- 
tion within  the  animal  world  and  its  line  of  contact  to 
other  things  as  a  source  from  which  it  can  create  a 
thought.  And  thought  by  thought  it  constructs  its  men- 
tal form.  Individual  mind  is  a  parasite  upon  the  flesh. 
First  dependent,  with  its  ever  and  endless  struggle  to- 
ward independence. 

It  is  beautifully  illustrated  in  the  works  of  Nature 
in  the  construction  of  the  rose.  First  the  soil,  next 
central  sprig,  then  its  roots  and  stalk,  branch,  bud,  blos- 
som and  finally  its  perfume.  Each  step  upward,  though 
all  alike  dependent  upon  that  just  beneath,  but  each 
part  in  its  upward  trend  becomes  more  and  more  in- 
dependent. 

Matter  itself,  which  is  at  rest  does  not  need  to  con- 
sume. But  anything  that  takes  on  organic  form  and 
action  must  consume.  Thus  it  is  that  everything  is 
ever  striving  to  consume  something  else.  Organic  forms 
not  only  have  to  live  upon  something  else,  but  have  also 
to  consume  something  else. 

What  a  thing  is  and  what  characteristics  it  may  have, 
depend  upon  how  it  rests,  and  what  it  consumes.  The 
greater  the  consuming  capacity  and  the  broader  the 
base,  the  more  extensive  are  the  characteristics,  and  by 
far  the  greater  parasite.  Man  seems  in  this  line  to  cap 


Every  Thing  a  Parasite.  153 

all  else,  for  we  try  to  consume  everything  else.  Even 
to  whatever  each  other  man  has. 

When  anything  reaches  a  point  at  which  it  ceases  to 
consume,  the  organism  breaks  down  and  is  in  turn  itself 
consumed.  Physically  speaking,  Man  eats  the  Bird,  the 
Bird  eats  the  Worm,  and  the  Worm  eats  the  Man,  and 
thus  the  never-ending  process  goes  around  and  around. 

However  much  our  moral  sense  may  impugn,  we  can- 
not escape  the  repulse  of  consuming  the  individual  char- 
acters of  organic  life.  True,  we  do  not  destroy  life; 
we  consume  the  individuals  that  use  it.  We  cut  off  their 
career,  as  in  turn  shall  take  place  with  ours.  We  may 
not  devour  the  living  forms  our  mortals  repel,  but  we 
go  back  a  step  farther  and  consume  the  potentials  of 
living  forms  in  embryo.  Or  further  still  and  con- 
sume the  food  intended  for  their  young.  So  we  eat  the 
egg  that  was  provided  to  feed  the  form  of  the  embryonic 
chick,  or  the  fruit  that  nourishes  the  seed. 

We  are  told,  physically  speaking,  that  man  was  formed 
out  of  the  dust  of  the  earth.  Let  us  see  how  true  that 
is.  We  have  just  stated  that  man  physically  was  a  para- 
site upon  the  animal  and  vegetable  kingdoms,  subsists 
upon  the  vegetable  kingdom,  and  little  or  nothing  upon 
the  mineral  kingdom.  His  solid  foods  are  created  from 
ninety  per  cent  water,  nine  and  one-half  per  cent  of 
air  and  one-half  per  cent  of  mineral,  or  dust  of  the 
earth. 

Man  can  live  without  solid  food  forty  days,  without 
drink  five  days,  without  air  fifteen  minutes,  and  without 
Ether  one-half  second.  This  will  give  a  better  idea  of 
what  the  physical  form  is  constructed,  as  well  as  what 
is  required  to  maintain  it. 

Whatsoever  we  depend  upon,  we  are  to  that  a  parasite, 


154  Chapter  IX. 

for  life  itself  is  but  a  principle  we  are  using.  There  is 
not  a  breath  of  air  that  has  not  been  breathed  over  and 
over  an  endless  number  of  times.  Not  a  drop  of  water 
in  all  the  oceans  that  has  not  been  drank  millions  upon 
millions  of  times  before. 

However  much  we  may  wish  to  escape  the  fact,  or 
however  hard  we  may  struggle  for  absolute  independ- 
ence, we  cannot  annul  the  fact  that  we  are  related  to 
the  rocks  beneath  our  feet.  And  are  bound  to  the  one 
stupendous  whole,  the  offspring  of  the  one  and  same 
beginningless  and  endless  principle. 

Despite  all  our  efforts,  all  our  earnest  desires,  at  best, 
we  are  mental  parasites  upon  the  flesh.  And  mental 
parasites  to  the  degree  we  have  others  to  think  for  us. 

One  may  morally  feel  a  protesting  sentiment  against 
taking  individual  life  in  order  to  sustain  his  own  per- 
sonal physical  form.  But  at  this  time  we  cannot  escape, 
the  inevitable,  while  denizens  of  this  state  of  develop- 
ment. We  can  only  depart  the  consequences  to  a  degree. 

Though  we  may  refrain  taking  life  in  its  highest 
forms,  we  step  down  the  scale  and  eat  the  seed  of  life 
germinating  characters,  or  if  not  the  seed  the  fruit  that 
for  which  the  seed  would  have  fed  in  its  embryonic  life. 

Man  is  the  perfume  of  Organic  Life,  but  not  yet  de- 
tached. He  is  the  mental  parasite  clinging  fast  to  ig- 
norance that  must  grow  over  barbarism  and  savagery  to 
intellectuality,  to  Spirituality. 

Nature  does  not  work  by  scheme,  design  or  prear- 
ranged plan,  but  by  process.  When  Man  becomes  in- 
tellectual, as  he  surely  will,  he  will  be  able  to  direct  the 
endless  and  boundless  process  of  Nature's  ceaseless  and 
limitless  energy  along  lines  of  producing  everything  his 
heart  desires  and  his  appetite  craves. 


Every  Thing  a  Parasite.  155 

We  know  full  well  that  energy  applied  over  any  line 
will  produce  results  along  the  lines  of  characters  estab- 
lished. The  time  will  come,  if  it  is  not  now  approach- 
ing, when  we  will  be  enabled  to  construct  plants  that 
will  germinate  an  endless  variety  of  food  supply,  with- 
out resorting  to  cattle  to  chew  for  our  milk,  butter  and 
beef,  or  pigs  to  chew  for  our  lard  and  pork,  or  hens 
to  peck  and  scratch  for  our  eggs.  For  this  at  best  is 
unwholesome.  Nature  does  the  work  now,  and  Nature 
is  boundless  in  its  resources.  When  man  realizes  this 
fact  he  will  set  to  work  to  direct  this  boundless  power 
toward  deliverance  from  the  animal  parasite  to  the 
independent  man. 


CHAPTER  X. 
LAW  OF  HEREDITY. 

Individual  development,  both  mental  and  physical, 
begins  in  a  dual  focal  center,  and  like  the  type  from 
which  it  springs,  develops  to  diversity. 

This  development  is  the  result  of  afferent  force  and 
develops  individually  outward  by  efferent  force.  The 
individual  entity,  sometimes  called  ego,  is  a  center 
around  which  form  and  combination  is  constructed.  The 
primordial  individual  center  being  first  established  at 
conception  within  a  simple  molecule,  the  fatherhood  and 
motherhood  as  a  conglomerate  selfhood. 

Energy  suspends  itself  as  it  condenses  toward  cen- 
ters. In  the  case  of  planetary  formation,  the  force 
drawing  condensed  energy  to  a  common  center  we  call 
gravity.  When  it  is  brought  about  by  the  same  Law 
as  in  the  union  of  dual  type  lines  we  call  it  Love.  At 
any  rate,  it  is  all  the  same  Law. 

In  the  case  of  any  organic  form,  in  order  to  exist  it 
must  consume;  and  when  it  consumes  it  produces  sur- 
plus energy,  and  in  the  union  of  surplus  energy  is  where 
the  re-generated  individual  begins. 

In  the  first  place,  all  living  constructions  are  simply, 
slowly  developed  combinations — automatic  aggregations 
— a  result  of  conditions.  They  first  evolve  as  they  are 
pressed  out  of  conditions  by  surrounding  environments. 
And  since  all  things  brought  into  formation  are  sim- 
ply their  own  records  of  existence  they  become  charac- 
terized by  the  continued  environments  they  are  sub- 
jected to,  and  at  the  same  time  register  all  experiences 


Law  of  Heredity.  157 

impressed  upon  them,  as  they  become  moving,  living 
characters. 

The  Law  of  Affinity  constructed  the  planets.  The 
same  Law  constructs  all  combinations,  but  out  of  dif- 
ferent elements  and  under  different  environments.  Every 
organized  combination  has  its  differentiation,  because  it 
germinates  from  a  different  basic  condition.  We  can- 
not say  a  thing  has  life  and  that  life  can  be  taken  away 
from  it.  But  each  and  everything  does  have  its  own 
combination  and  character  and  uses  the  laws  of  action, 
which  is  Life. 

The  vegetable  kingdom  expresses  the  first  process  of 
organized  development,  and  it  gradually  works  out  of 
a  condition  that  at  first  could  only  produce  a  fungus 
growth.  It,  as  a  matter  of  course,  resulted  from  a  con- 
dition, and  in  its  process  of  development  diversified  into 
no  less  than  five  thousand  varieties.  In  the  fungus 
stage  there  was  exceeding  frailty,  because  the  condition 
did  not  support  anything  higher.  It  represented  all  the 
laws  of  motion  and  geometrical  forms,  but  there  was 
no  tensile  strength.  It  had  to  extend  its  development 
over  life  lines  before  it  could  become  staple  in  organi- 
zation. 

Plant  life  in  its  first  stages  did  not  produce  seed, 
but  grew  alone  from  conditions  or  was  extended  in  mul- 
tiple activity  by  dividing  itself.  That  is  to  say,  be  re- 
generated from  the  various  parts  of  the  stalk.  There 
was  no  such  thing  as  branches  in  the  first  growth.  A 
branching  out  followed  later.  There  finally  came  a 
state  of  higher  environment.  The  atmosphere  became 
clear  and  free  from  poisonous  gases.  The  sunlight  shone 
more  clearly,  and  along  with  the  sunlight  the  blossoms 
and  flowers.  Thus,  a  new  state  of  existence  dawned — a 


158  Chapter  X. 

better  condition  prevailed.  Vegetable  life  began  the 
process  of  regeneration  in  a  higher  plane  of  environ- 
ment. The  vegetable  kingdom  now  lives,  in  two  planes 
of  existence  and  are  joined  together  by  life  line  tiea 
that  reach  across  from  one  generation  to  the  other,  by 
the  lines  crossing  in  the  junction  center — its  seed. 

The  seed  is  an  inheritance  of  the  hermaphrodite  plant, 
when  crossed  in  the  blossom  by  the  flora  energy  of  an- 
other plant  becomes  a  focal  cross  line  of  regeneration. 

The  question  so  often  asked,  "Which  was  produced 
first,  the  acorn  or  the  oak  ?"  is  answered  in  the  fact  that 
the  acorn  is  the  junction  of  dual  life  lines.  Oaks  grew 
millions  of  years  before  acorns  could  possibly  be  devel- 
oped. One  oak  produces  millions  of  acorns,  but  no 
acorn  can  produce  a  million  oaks.  While  we  are  on  the 
subject,  the  question  so  often  discussed  arises :  "Which 
came  first,  the  egg  or  the  hen?" 

This  question,  like  the  question  of  the  acorn  and  the 
oak.  answers  itself  in  the  selfsame  way.  Some  hens 
produce  hundreds  of  eggs  per  year;  some  are  fertile, 
some  are  not;  but  no  egg  ever  produces  an  hundred 
hens. 

The  egg  is  a  junction  of  dual  type  lines  that  devel- 
oped after  the  type  had  advanced  beyond  the  Amoeba 
stage,  which  took  ages  to  accomplish.  The  animal  king- 
dom, like  that  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  had  first  to 
develop  to  where  it  reached  a  re-generative  power  to 
extend  over  two  planes  before  it  could  produce  seed  of 
re-generation. 

The  first  stages  of  the  animal  kingdom,  like  that  of 
planetary  creation  and  vegetable  life,  were  in  the  unit 
development,  although  by  way  of  a  dual  process  within 
the  unit. 


Law  of  Heredity.  159 

Nature  never  produces  a  pair  and  stops  the  evolution 
there.  Primordially  combinations  organize  into  multi- 
farious units  from  a  condition.  The  units  are  limited 
only  by  the  condition  from  which  they  evolve.  A  con- 
dition that  can  produce  one  combination  can  produce 
millions  at  the  same  time,  and  this  is  just  what  does 
take  place. 

In  Nature's  process  the  movements  germinate  from 
centers  to  circumferences,  which,  by  the  principle  in- 
volved, means  to  diversity  and  multiplicity.  In  this 
sense  Nature  provides  continuity  against  accidents  which 
occur  even  within  that  majestic  realm.  Were  it  not  so, 
Nature  could  not  stand  against  destruction  of  any  kind. 
The  probability  is  that  instead  of  all  animal  life  spring- 
ing from  pairs,  there  were  endless  varieties  at  one  time 
that  are  now  extinct.  The  fossils  in  the  rocks  of  the 
crust  of  the  earth  bears  witness  to  many  extinct  species. 

The  Amoeba  offers  the  best  lesson  we  know  of  to  il- 
lustrate the  source  of  animal  life.  The  conditions  neces- 
sary to  promote  Amoebaic  life  is  a  protoplasmic  sub- 
stance. Decayed  vegetation  can  bring  this  about.  The 
principle  conditions  following  this  are  a  given  amount 
of  heat,  light  and  darkness,  which  constitute  the  ener- 
gization. 

The  Law  of  Affinity  works  on  particles  of  matter 
drawing  them  into  combinations.  The  same  Law  that 
forms  a  planet  forms  the  nucleus  of  an  individual 
Amoeba  by  condensing  energy  into  centers,  from  which 
it  begins  a  construction  of  an  organization  that  in  its 
first  stages  has  but  two  functions :  the  drawing  into  its 
center  and  the  evolving  out,  which  means  consuming  and 
eliminating.  The  Law  of  .Affinity  is  the  source  of  ap- 
petite, and  the  first  thing  that  takes  place  is  for  the 


160  Chapter  X. 

little  nucleus  to  absorb  the  surrounding  protoplasm.  This 
is  chemical  action  or  digestion.  When  this  action  takes 
place,  the  little  Amoeba  begins  to  grow.  It  reaches 
out  for  food  supply.  It  draws  the  energy  around  it  into 
its  center  and  converts  its  body  into  a  more  tangible 
substance,  by  constantly  eliminating  that  which  the 
Law  rejects. 

This  process  goes  on  until  the  form  is  constructed  to 
proportions,  although  still  quite  small,  but  bulky  for 
that  stage  of  expression  and  manner  of  movement.  Each 
part  of  the  body  undertakes  to  care  for  its  own,  and 
sooner  or  later  the  form  begins  to  separate  until  it 
hangs  together  by  a  single  thread.  This  thread  snaps, 
and  then  there  are  two  Amoebas  where  but  one  existed 
before.  Both  of  the  same  age.  Both  of  the  same  com- 
bination and  character.  And  although  at  first  one  in- 
dividual, are  now  two. 

What  has  taken  place  in  the  development  of  the  Amoe- 
ba to  this  stage  is  the  result  of  a  condition  that  is  not 
limited  to  the  one,  but  subject  to  every  other  condition 
of  a  like  environment.  If  the  environment  differs,  the 
character  to  that  degree  will  differ. 

Coming  back  to  the  individual  Amoeba  again,  it  is 
interesting  to  know  which  is  the  parent  or  which  the 
offspring,  for  in  the  original  the  two  were  a  division 
of  the  first  one. 

Life  is  action,  that  in  consuming  constructs  formation. 
Formation  is  a  combination,  and  the  combination  is 
contents  of  its  own  experience  and  environment.  That 
is  to  say  it  is  the  record  of  its  past  and  character  of  its 
own  combination.  The  energy  that  brings  it  into  being 
and  the  virgin  substance  it  consumes  is  the  energy  and 


Law  of  Heredity.  161 

substance  that  maintains  and  perpetuates  it  thereafter, 
so  long  as  it  continues  to  consume  and  eliminate. 

When  the  first  Amoeba  was  developed,  it  naturally  was 
a  very  minute  object,  but,  being  first,  it  must  also  be 
the  first  generation  of  its  character,  considering  that  all 
others  coming  into  existence  at  the  same  time  and  under 
the  same  condition  was  of  like  character.  But  to  deal 
with  the  question  analytically,  we  must  work  from  the 
base  of  the  one  individual. 

The  first  individual  develops  to  full  unit  capacity  and 
then  separates  into  two  parts,  which  now  has  reached 
the  stage  of  re-generation.  At  the  second  generation, 
one  is  no  older  than  the  other,  hence  neither  one  can 
claim  parentage.  The  two  separate  and  go  right  on  de- 
veloping as  the  first  one  did.  When  they  reach  the 
full  rounded-out  stage,  like  the  generation  from  which 
they  took  birth,  they  began  to  separate,  and  in  time 
there  are  four  Amoebas  where  there  were  but  two. 
Neither  one  of  the  four  can  claim  to  be  the  older,  for 
all  four  lived  in  the  first  generation  and  passed  through 
the  second,  and  are  now  in  the  third.  These  four  Amoe- 
bas proced  to  develop  as  the  first  two  did,  and  these  sep- 
arate into  eight,  and  thus  the  process  goes  on  doubling 
up  in  numbers  as  they  divide  in  each  generation.  When 
they  reach  the  twentieth  generation,  they  have  multi- 
plied to  the  enormous  number  of  275,648  individuals, 
each  having  the  same  age,  the  same  experience  and  the 
same  inherited  characteristics.  They  might,  some  of 
them,  differ  at  this  time,  as  they  would  drift  apart  and 
come  under  a  new  and  different  environment,  but  in- 
herently they  are  from  the  same  source,  or  the  one  line 
of  continuity.  We  give  this  illustration  to  show  what 
is  meant  by  the  tree  of  life.  For  what  is  true  of  the 


162  Chapter  X. 

Amoeba  is  true  of  everything  having  an  organic  for- 
mation of  life.  What  takes  place  in  the  life  lines  of 
Amoebaic  life  is  due  to  the  fact  that  afferent  force  con- 
sumes to  its  common  centers  energy  out  of  the  proto- 
plasm. You  can  call  it  chemistry  or  digestion,  which- 
ever you  choose.  It  makes  no  difference  what  you  call 
it.  It  is  a  process  of  consuming  matter  and  transpos- 
ing it  to  re-generated  molecules  of  another  character. 
That  is  just  what  takes  place  in  building  the  physical 
body.  First  a  single  molecule,  which  grows  and  di- 
vides. Energy  pours  into  it,  and  it  grows  and  divides 
again  and  so  on  continuously.  The  energy  is  supplied 
and  transferred  to  all  parts  of  the  body  by  two  channels 
— the  blood  and  nervous  fluids. 

Each  molecule  of  matter,  like  the  general  form  itself, 
has  its  own  peculiar  differentiation,  and  is  attracted  to 
that  part  of  the  body  to  which  it  is  nearest  allied.  The 
brain  matter  to  brain,  the  eye  matter  to  eye,  muscle  to 
muscle,  skin  to  skin,  nails  to  nails  and  hair  matter  to 
hair.  All,  however,  traveling  over  an  invisible  life  line 
matrix  to  which  it  automatically  conforms. 

Inheritance  carries  with  it  the  power  of  transmittance 
of  character — the  miniature  record  of  all  experience 
over  which  the  life  line  has  passed. 

In  order  to  comprehend  the  Law  of  Inheritance,  the 
lesson  taught  us  in  the  Ameobaic  life  is  a  natural  and 
true  guide. 

Every  individual  born  into  the  world,  no  matter  as 
to  what  species  or  type  they  happen  to  belong,  are  the 
result  of  re-generations.  In  the  Amoebaic  process  the 
re-generation  is  by  division,  but  the  animal  kingdom, 
like  that  of  the  vegetable  kingdom,  has  developed  to 
a  higher  plane  and  has  reached  the  stage  of  blossom 


Law  of  Heredity.  163 

where  two  flowers  intermingle  and  re-generate  into  seed 
as  a  focal  unit  partaking,  not  from  one  parent  by  di- 
vision, but  from  two  parents  by  union. 

When  animal  life  reached  the  stage  of  blossom  and 
fruit  it  not  only  doubles  its  process  of  re-generation,  but 
multiplies  it.  It  not  only  unites  two  forces  in  re-gen- 
erated inheritance,  but  supplies  each  individual  with 
two  parents  instead  of  one,  from  which  to  inherit  its 
physical  character  and  primary  mind. 

Primary  mind  is  dual  essence  intensified.  It  is  the 
potential  qualities  of  each  one  combined  in  order  to 
become  individual.  It  is  character  lines  or  life  lines 
projected  from  one  generation  to  the  next  bearing  the 
record  of  all  its  past,  and  these  lines  become  and  are  the 
very  point  of  conception,  must  generate.  The  generat- 
ing process  is  within  the  Laws  of  Nature  and  its  consum- 
ing forces.  When  energy  accumulates,  it  must  find  ex- 
pression which,  when  expended,  goes  over  the  line  of 
least  resistance.  The  line  of  least  resitance  is  the  lines 
already  established  in  the  potential  qualities  of  the 
primary  mind  and  characteristics  inherited  by  the  in- 
dividual, and  where  there  is  no  impediment  it  will  fol- 
low these  lines;  so,  regardless  of  the  ignorance  of  the 
parents,  the  offspring  may  have  sound,  staple  qualities. 

Inheritance  in  essence  is  memory  extended.  In  the 
lower  animals  we  call  it  instinct.  But  what  we  call  a 
thing  does  not  change  its  character.  The  animal  does 
not  have  to  be  taught  to  walk  or  feed  itself;  it  possesses 
the  parental  knowledge  in  detail. 

Mankind  is  more  helpless  because  the  combination  is 
more  intricate  and  extensive.  But  that  need  not  be  a 
hindrance.  The  helplessness  of  all  offspring  is  due  to 
the  fact  that  in  animal  life  each  individual  in  the  pri- 


164  Chapter  X. 

inary  mind  and  character  is  conglomerate.  That  is,  they 
are  dual — the  expression  of  two  parents — and  upon  this 
conglomerate  mind  and  character  is  to  be  constructed  an 
individual  mind  and  an  individual  character.  The  off- 
spring might  lean  to  one  or  the  other  of  the  parents,  or 
both,  or  it  might  not  lean  to  either,  for  within  its  in- 
heritance is  the  essence  and  character  of  all  the  preced- 
ing generations  of  its  type. 

It  is  not  a  question  of  life  that  concerns  us,  for  life 
is  not  a  construction,  or  a  combination.  You  cannot  in- 
herit life.  You  cannot  add  to  it  or  take  from  it,  but 
like  food  or  air  you  can  use  it,  and  by  using  it,  maintain 
an  unbroken  character  lineage. 

We  note  that  life  is  not  a  thing  of  personality,  but 
a  principle  common  to  all  things.  Life  is  the  principle 
that  exercises  in  transforming  material  around  indi- 
vidual centers  and  carries  them  along  given  tracks,  and 
what  is  really  seen  to  move  along  these  tracks,  are 
characters  that  when  once  started  move  and  project 
down  through  the  ages.  Always  evolving  to  higher  and 
higher  organic  formation  with  more  and  more  extended 
character,  but  at  no  time  departing  from  their  original 
type  line.  These  type  lines  are  in  fact  the  Life  Lines, 
and  while  each  and  every  species  differ  from  each  and 
every  other  species  the  Law  governs  each  and  all  forms 
of  life  are  the  same.  The  reason  one  differs  from  the  other 
is  due  to  the  fact  that  lines  leading  from  a  center  of 
development,  makes  it  impossible  for  any  two  things 
to  be  exactly  alike  in  detail. 

Type  lines  are  held  by  the  silent  or  mother  side  of 
action,  and  can  change  only  by  gradual  development, 
or  by  being  crossed  or  merged  into  other  types  of  kindred 


Law  of  Heredity.  165 

character.  When  they  do  emerge  we  have  both  char- 
acters amalgamated  into  one. 

If  the  amalgamation  is  completed  new  type  charac- 
ters may  seem  to  have  developed.  But  if  the  amalgama- 
tion is  not  complete,  both  types  mule  out,  and  become 
extinct,  in  which  case  becomes  the  end  or  the  branches 
of  the  tree  of  life. 

The  "I  am"  within  is  the  dual  personality.  It  is 
hard  to  grasp  the  thought  because  it  is  the  primary 
and  conglomerate  self.  In  the  individual  consciousness 
which  is  constructed  upon  the  dual  "I  am"  we  feel  to 
be  better  acquainted.  We  have  personally  witnessed  all 
it  has  experienced  and  we  feel  this  experience  to  be  all 
of  our  life.  But  when  we  concentrate  in  thought,  there 
is  a  glimmering  light  that  reminds  us  of  having  lived 
before.  But  the  memory  of  it  splits  apart  in  the  line 
of  our  dual  inheritance  and  while  we  know  the  past,  it 
is  indeed  a  blank. 

Some  think  that  they  have  lived  before ;  so  they  have, 
but  they  know  not  where,  they  know  not  how.  Some 
think  they  were  once  males,  some  think  they  were  once 
females.  So  they  were,  since  individuals  are  born  from 
two  parents  how  could  they  escape  that  feeling. 

Sometimes  we  feel  we  always  have  existed,  and  why 
not  feel  so  since  back  of  all  creation  we  are  the  result 
of  principles  that  have  no  beginning. 

If  you  feel  that  your  individual  life  does  not  go  back 
to  the  primary  dual  focus  and  from  there  back  through 
all  the  advancing  development  of  re-generation,  whence 
and  at  what  time  did  it  have  its  beginning?  Had  the 
line  of  start  once  been  broken  it  would  not  now  be  in 
existence. 

Nothing  ever  comes  into  existence  in  perfect  for- 


166  Chapter  X. 

mation.  Everything  must  gradually  develop  out  of  the 
absolute,  and  that  is  an  infinitesimal  center  beneath 
the  reach  of  a  microscope.  All  type  lines  develop  that 
way,  and  in  ages  evolve  by  re-generative  step  process 
in  well  rounded-out  character  forms.  The  individual 
like  the  type  itself  only  finds  its  finished  form  at 
maturity  and  not  at  conception.  Even  the  mind  is  an 
organization  that  is  evolved  thought  by  thought.  All 
that  the  individual  receives  at  first  is  inherited.  His 
inheritance  is  what  he  primarily  was  and  nothing  more. 

To  come  into  animated  formation  you  do  so  through 
established  lines.  One  cannot  slip  into  tangible  form 
except  by  junction  center  evolved  into  being  from  the 
type  to  which  one  is  related.  The  descent  of  type 
species  is  maintained  by  indelibly  fixed  homogeneous 
lines.  There  are  no  short  cuts  or  missing  links  from 
one  type  expression  to  that  of  another.  No  haphazzard 
jumps  from  a  potato  to  a  rose,  or  from  a  rose  to  a  cab- 
bage or  a  monkey  to  a  man. 

Each  and  every  distinct  specie  alike  have  their  origin 
in  the  primordial  cause  and  each  and  all  are  marching 
up  the  line  of  eternal  progress  in  their  own  characteristic 
way.  Why  some  things  favor  other  things  is  due  to  the 
fact  that  all  creation  is  the  result  of  the  one  and  same 
eternal  source. 

Some  people  think  we  came  from  a  spiritual  and  must 
return  to  a  spiritual.  If  we  were  once  spiritual  why 
come  at  all  since  we  must  return?  Nature  does  not 
work  that  way.  Everything  evolves  from  the  infinitisi- 
mal  and  moves  towards  the  infinitude  step  by  step.  Ever 
up  the  ladder  we  must  climb.  Although  creation  has 
divided  everything  into  planes,  groups,  species  and  fam- 


Law  of  Heredity.  167 

ilies,  we  are  nevertheless  as  a  universal  whole  Natural 
relatives. 

The  rocks  and  soil  beneath  our  feet,  the  vegetable 
kingdom  which  we  admire  and  upon  which  we  depend, 
the  animal  kingdom  to  which  we  are  so  closely  allied, 
are  all  naturally  related  to  us.  Man  assimilates  them 
all  and  man  partakes  of  them  all  in  character  and 
form  and  outgrows  them  all.  And  though  man  is 
the  greatest  combination;  and  so  far  as  our  planet 
is  concerned,  he  is  also  the  highest  expression.  There 
are  peculiarities  in  some  of  the  type  expressions  that 
deserve  special  mention,  among  which  are  that  the 
Amoeba  represents  both  male  and  female  principle. 
But  instead  of  projecting  energized  essence  into  the 
re-generation,  it  actually  shares  division  of  its  body. 
Then  there  is  the  tape  worm  that  is  constructed  in  joints, 
any  one  of  which  might  be  shed  off  without  annihilating 
the  progress  of  the  worm,  which  is  also  true  of  the  joint 
snake.  There  are  vegetable  stalks  representing  the  func- 
tions of  both  male  and  female,  which  is  demonstrated 
in  the  corn  stalk.  At  a  principle  joint  of  the  body  the 
seed  is  produced,  and  at  the  top  of  the  stalk  the  fer- 
tilized tassel  which  sprinkles  off  and  is  caught  by  the 
silken  line  running  to  each  kernel  through  which  the 
fertilizing  energy  is  carried  to  each.  In  the  case  of 
the  corn  stalk  the  top  is  masculine  and  the  body  of  the 
stalk  feminine.  The  potato  plant  which  shows  artificial 
development  along  the  lines  of  Nature's  Laws,  is  also 
wonderful  in  its  development  and  growth.  In  the 
first  place  the  potato  plant  is  but  a  common  root  that 
grew  along  the  sea  shore  of  western  South  America,  but 
when  brought  into  inland  territory  developed  into  a 
plant  with  extraordinary  capacity  of  re-generation.  It 


168  Chapter  X. 

not  only  grows  seed  at  its  tops,  but  seed  at  its  roots 
In  truth  it  re-generates  from  both  ends.  The  flower 
of  the  top,  however,  seems  to  be  the  only  fertilizing 
portion  of  the  plant.  In  fact  the  power  of  re-generation 
is  so  great  that  the  seed  on  the  top  of  the  plant  will 
re-generate  as  well  as  the  seed  that  grows  under  the 
surface  of  the  soil,  and  prior  to  either  seed  there  is  the 
stalk  or  root  itself  that  will  grow  into  full  maturity. 

Organic  life  did  not  originate  from  seed.  Neither 
vegetable  nor  animal  could  possibly  come  that  way. 
For  the  reason,  before  a  seed  could  be  produced  there 
must  be  a  flower,  and  before  a  flower  can  be  generated 
there  must  be  a  stalk  upon  which  it  can  grow.  Any 
person  with  a  fair  portion  of  intellect  can  readily  see 
that  the  plant  comes  first,  flower  next,  and  fruit  and 
seed  at  the  finish.  What  takes  place  in  one  manifesta- 
tion takes  place  in  all.  Its  modus-operandi  is  universal. 
Furthermore,  although  a  seed  grows  into  stalk  and 
flower,  it  can  only  be  said  that  the  seed  is  a  junction 
connecting  a  present  growth  to  a  previous  generation, 
and  so  on  down  the  line. 

Coming  back  to~  our  subject  we  can  find  no  better 
lesson  than  illustrated  in  the  egg. 

A  normal  fertile  egg  contains  potential  character. 
The  male  and  female  life  lines  united.  If  the  egg  be 
subjected  to  a  heat  of  110  degrees  the  life  lines  will 
be  broken  and  the  egg  become  de-fertilized. 

The  scientific  world  searched  in  vain  with  microscope 
to  find  bones,  flesh  and  feathers  within  the  hen's  egg, 
but  found  no  apparent  difference  between  a  fertile  and 
an  unfertile  egg.  They  had  not  discovered  that  fer- 
tilization was  an  invisible  life  line  of  potential  char- 
acteristics, that  depended  upon  conditions  to  be  re- 


Law  of  Heredity.  169 

generated  into  a  living  chick,  and  it  is  well  at  this 
point  to  explain  in  a  scientific  way  how  the  process  of 
development  is  brought  about. 

The  white  or  albumin  of  the  egg  is  condensed  food 
that  can  be  converted  into  chicken  molecules  without 
oxygen  supply.  It  is  in  this  portion  of  the  egg  that 
the  potential  germ  of  chicken  type  is  deposited.  When 
the  egg  is  placed  in  the  incubator,  or  under  the  mother 
hen,  and  the  heat  is  brought  up  to  104  degrees,  the 
heat  energy  penetrates  to  the  center  of  the  germ  and 
condenses  its  energy  there,  then  re-bounds  back  to 
the  surface.  This  influx  of  heat  and  its  evolving  out- 
ward sets  up  action  in  the  same  manner  that  the  Laws 
construct  a  planet.  The  inflow  constructs  the  nucleus 
and  this  nucleus  becomes  the  heart.  Its  outflow  con- 
structs the  arteries  and  the  inflow  the  veins.  Follow 
this  process  out  for  four  days,  crack  open  the  shell  and 
apply  the  microscope,  and  if  the  egg  is  fertile  you  will 
see  the  heart  beat  and  the  bright  red  arteries  pulsate 
as  they  extend  toward  the  whole  surface  of  the  egg. 
You  will  also  notice  the  veins  of  a  darker  hue  drawing 
back  the  flow  to  the  heart.  When  this  process  is  kept 
up  seventeen  days  longer,  it  will  have  had  time  to  con- 
sume all  the  albumen  of  the  egg  into  energy  over  its 
own  character  lines,  and  in  the  meantime  have  con- 
verted them  into  chick  molecules  and  have  completely 
constructed  the  young  chick.  And  why  does  it  do  it? 
Simply  because  there  was  a  potential  although  invisible 
character  organization  that  enabled  the  heat  from  the 
mother  hen  to  set  and  keep  in  motion  the  forces  of 
consuming  food,  so  that  the  embryotic  chick  actually 
with  the  aid  of  the  incubator  digested  the  egg  and  con- 


170  Chapter  X. 

structed  its  form  and  character  along  the  lines  of  ita 
potential  essence. 

When  it  had  consumed  all  the  albumen,  the  young 
chick  become  in  need  of  oxygen  and  ether.  It  cracked 
the  shell  and  breathed  in  the  air  and  ether.  The  air 
oxygenized  its  blood,  the  ether  filled  its  brain  and  mus- 
cles with  energy  to  break  open  the  shell  and  the  chick 
is  hatched,  Its  form  was  constructed  around  the  yolk, 
which  with  the  oxygen  supply,  becomes  digestible  and 
serves  as  food  supply  for  24  hours  thereafter. 

The  Law  of  Inheritance  is  the  re-generation  process 
of  character  building.  Ee-generation  is  a  mode  of  vibra- 
tion. "Within  the  individual  each  pulsation  is  a  vibra- 
tion. In  the  construction  of  the  chick  the  flow  into  the 
heart  and  out  to  the  surface  is  a  vibration.  If  it  was 
possible  for  matter  to  be  transposed  to  energy,  then 
transposed  to  chick  in  one  vibration,  simply  the  heat- 
ing of  an  egg  would  cook  it  into  a  chick.  But  since  it 
takes  many  cycles  before  matter  can  all  be  turned  to 
energy,  or  energy  to  matter,  it  requires  at  least  21  days 
to  complete  the  hatching  process  of  the  egg. 

Intelligence  re-generates  as  well  as  character  and 
form.  If  the  animal  be  domestic  it  will  follow  out  a 
domestic  habit.  If  it  be  wild  in  due  time  it  will  express 
its  wild  propensities,  regardless  of  its  new  environments. 

A  duck  hatched  under  a  hen  will  take  to  the  first 
pond  of  water. 

A  wild  bird  can  be  domesticated  by  a  few  generations 
of  domesticated  habits.  But  it  will  for  many  genera- 
tions become  involuntarily  frightened  at  what  was  its 
danger  in  the  state  of  its  ancestors.  Just  as  man  to-day 
unconsciously  fears  the  snake  that  has  never  bit  him. 


Law  of  Heredity.  171 

If  we  are  to  be  governed  by  the  public  press,  and 
statements  of  the  educators,  it  has  never  dawned  upon 
man,  why  the  offspring,  without  tuition,  is  enabled  to 
care  for  itself  in  the  intellectual  mode  of  its  ancestors; 
or  why  plants  of  the  various  species  such  as  grapes, 
plums,  pears,  apples  and  the  hundreds  of  varieties  of 
fruits  with  each  their  different  method  of  form  and  each 
their  different  specific  characteristics,  all  grow  out  of 
the  one  soil,  breathe  the  same  atmosphere,  absorb  the 
same  sun  light  side  by  side  and  yet  maintain  their 
own  type  lines  and  distinct  characters.  Or  why  feathers 
grow  on  birds,  hair  and  fur  on  animals,  wool  on  sheep, 
yet  all  subsist  on  the  same  grain  products;  breathe  the 
same  atmosphere,  drink  the  same  water  and  bathe  in 
the  same  sun  light,  yet  each  eternally  live  within  their 
own  established  character  and  constantly  re-generate 
within  their  own  type  lines.  The  answer  is  summed  up 
in  this  fact:  it  is  characters  that  live,  each  for  itself. 
Characters  that  are  capacitated  by  the  Law  of  Consum- 
mation, assimilate  environments  and  food  elements  that 
they  each  are  enabled  to  digest,  transpose  to  energy  and 
have  that  energy  spend  itself  over  established  lines,  in- 
visible tracks,  over  which  energy  flows,  each  to  construct 
its  own  character  for  it  has  no  other;  thus  corn,  water, 
air,  light,  and  heat  constructs  feathers  on  birds,  hair 
on  horses,  wool  on  sheep  and  fur  on  the  wild  beast,  or 
any  other  animal  that  happens  to  have  a  digestive  appa- 
ratus for  that  diet. 

While  it  is  true  that  vegetable  life  is  maintained  by 
the  carbonic  elements,  and  animal  life  is  sustained  by 
the  consuming  of  vegetable,  or  animal  flesh  itself  in 
many  instances,  we  are  nevertheless  aware  of  the  fact 
that  what  goes  into  the  food  supply  has  much  to  do  with 


172  Chapter  X. 

the  character  of  the  type  expression  consuming  it.  This 
is  due  to  the  fact  that  in  consuming  molecules  of  one 
flesh  to  build  molecules  of  another,  not  all  matter  is 
turned  to  energy  in  the  one  process  of  digestion,  for 
much  of  what  is  consumed  must  be  eliminated,  and  much 
of  the  character  of  what  the  food  supply  embraces  is 
not  altogether  digested,  but  passes  over  the  lines  con- 
suming it,  and  marks  its  record  upon  the  new  individual 
construction. 

We  are  not  entirely  wrong  when  we  state  that  man 
becomes  hoggish  by  eating  pork.  The  truth  is  man 
partakes  of  most  every  thing  in  sight  and  within  his 
grasp.  In  fact  he  teaches  himself  to  indulge  in  chewing 
and  smoking  poisonous  weeds,  injects  into  his  system 
poisons,  and  delights  in  swallowing  dregs  of  the  infernal 
art.  He  has  contracted  every  disease  his  anatomy  can 
gather  in,  and  has  extended  his  character  to  the  embodi- 
ment of  every  other  organic  animal  species  on  the  face 
of  the  earth. 

So  much  has  man  partaken  of  the  things  that  he  has 
consumed  that  to  find  an  excuse  for  his  similarity  to 
that  of  the  animal  kingdom,  writers  have  felt,  and  so 
expressed  their  conclusions,  that  man  descended  step 
by  step  out  of  the  types  of  the  animals.  And  so  far 
as  we  know  there  is  not  a  mind  that  believes  in  the 
descent  of  man  through  the  evolutionary  process  that 
does  not  endorse  this  as  truth.  Regardless  of  what  the 
scientific  world  have  said,  we  affirm  that  type  lines  of 
species  do  not  jump  from  one  to  the  other.  On  the 
contrary,  each  distinct  species  has  its  own  Life  Line  of 
inheritance  and  each  alike  starts  from  its  own  primordial 
center,  and  each  alike  establishes  its  own  characteristics 
and  follows  them  out,  each  for  itself  under  and  by  virtue 


Law  of  Heredity.  173 

of  its  own  tree  of  Life,  and  that  each  and  every  specie 
is  under  the  same  Laws,  as  well  as  progressing  each  for 
itself  according  to  capacity  and  environment,  from  that 
of  the  flower  in  the  forest  to  the  endless  variety  of 
vegetables  and  fruits  in  the  gardens,  or  from  the  lowest 
animal  to  that  of  man. 

With  a  wholesome  view  of  the  process  of  Nature  one 
need  not  look  for  missing  links  from  animal  to  man, 
We  need  only  to  unwrap  the  descent  of  man  himself 
to  learn  that  in  generation  after  generation  he  constantly 
evolves.  And  that  he  now  progresses  is  evidence  of  what 
he  really  is,  and  what  he  is  now  he  has  been,  but  further 
down  the  line.  So  looking  down  the  ages  of  the  past 
to  discern  him  in  his  primordial  state  we  must  first  strip 
him  of  his  mental  powers,  his  vocabulary,  his  extreme 
combination  of  character,  until  we  find  him  helplessly 
void  of  words,  thoughts  and  mental  capacity,  as  well 
as  physically  naked ;  dwelling  in  trees  and  caves.  Unwrap 
his  descent  still  further  and  he  fails  to  walk  erect.  He 
crawls  on  four  limbs  for  he  is  a  quadruped.  He  worms 
his  way  over  the  earth  and  in  the  sea,  for  he  is  a  verte- 
brate. Lastly  he  is  a  tube  and  a  cluster  of  cells — mole- 
cules, and  finally  a  single  embryotic  molecule. 

Nature  never  forgets  its  past,  and  she  indelibly  photo- 
graphs the  history  of  the  race  in  the  process  of  embryotic 
life  on  every  normal  personal  unit,  carrying  out  in  the 
most  minute  detail  the  unbroken  chain  of  the  process 
of  the  evolution  through  which  the  type  has  passed,  and 
at  no  time  does  there  appear  a  gap  or  a  missing  link. 
Man  came  all  the  way  through  the  animal  kingdom, 
but  at  no  time  was  he  or  is  he  anything  but  the  out- 
growth of  an  embryotic  man.  And  just  as  sure  as  his 
start  was  within  the  absolute  and  infinitesimal,  his  des- 


174  Chapter  X. 

tiny  is  bound  to  be  eternal  progression  toward  the  in- 
finitude. 

Of  all  organic  animated  life,  man  surpasses  as  that 
of  the  greatest  combination.  But  he  does  not  excel  in 
everything,  for  there  is  scarcely  a  character  or  function 
in  him  that  is  not  found  in  the  animal  kingdom  below 
him,  and  ofttimes  in  larger  capacity.  This  phase  of 
the  subject  is  treated  under  the  chapter  of  "From  Animal 
to  the  Spiritual  Man,"  and  needs  no  further  comment 
here.  We  only  need  to  call  attention  to  the  fact  that 
man,  like  the  vegetable  and  animal  kingdom,  has  his 
character  re-generated  through  the  same  Law  of  inher- 
itance. The  intelligence  of  the  animal  is  called  instinct. 
In  man  it  is  called  education,  but  so  far  as  the  primary 
mind  is  concerned,  animal  and  man  are  alike;  as  also 
is  the  function  and  process  of  re-generation.  Each  indi- 
vidual has  his  conception  by  virtue  of  surplus  vital 
energy  focalizing  into  a  single  molecule.  The  molecule 
has  in  essence  all  the  potentialities  of  its  parents,  includ- 
ing their  specific  type  characteristics  to  the  most  minute 
detail,  in  essence  of  intensity.  It  may  not  be  that  the 
offspring  partakes  the  exact  character  of  the  parents, 
because  it  partakes  of  all  the  ancestry  of  the  Type  Line 
and  some  of  the  characteristics  may  He  dormant  while 
others  quicken  to  action, 

"We,  each  of  us,  have  two  parents  to  whom  we  are  in- 
debted for  our  individual  combination  of  character, 
capacity  and  power.  Not  a  thing  do  we  possess  in  a 
primary  way  that  we  did  not  inherit  from  them  as  the 
links  joining  us  to  the  human  Tree  of  Life.  If  our  par- 
ents were  not  human  beings,  we  would  not  be.  If  our 
parents  grew  on  a  pumpkin  vine  they  would  be  pump- 
kins— and  we  would  be  pumpkins,  too. 


Law  of  Heredity.  175 

Each  of  our  parents  under  the  monogamic  law  of 
marriage  has  two  parents,  and  going  on  back  we  have 
four  grand  parents,  eight  great-grand  parents,  sixteen 
great,  great-grand  parents,  thirty-two  great,  great,  great 
grand-parents  and  so  on  doubling  up  the  ancestry  and 
we  go  back  to  the  twentieth  generation,  when  we  express 
as  many  as  275,648.  This  would  mean  that  each  of  us 
reaching  back  but  four  hundred  years  wind  into  our 
character  links  275,648  threads.  What  is  true  of  one 
individual  is  true  of  all ;  and  together  the  Human  Tree 
of  Life  spreads  its  lines  criss-cross,  entwining  the  entire 
globe  and  dividing  by  three  grand  phases  of  expression, 
namely:  The  living  present,  the  un-born  and  the  de- 
parted. 

We  live  as  individuals  in  three  planes  of  activity. 
First,  each  individual  inherits  the  dual  character  from 
the  Human  Type  Lines  and  is  truly  born  into  a  phy- 
sical molecule  at  this  focal  conception.  Here  he  inherits 
continuity,  a  characteristic,  in  all  its  details  with  poten- 
tial powers  and  capacities.  In  other  words,  he  is  a  mental 
primary  duality.  From  this  state  on,  he  soon  constructs 
personal  functions,  and  is  ushered  into  Individual  Life. 
From  that  point,  knowingly  or  unknowingly,  he  con- 
structs his  own  destiny. 

The  mental  along  with  the  physical  has  constantly 
progressed.  But  with  the  physical  decomposition  and 
renewal  the  inner  mind  remained  continuous  and  per- 
petual. 

It  has  a  combination  and  character  of  its  own  to 
project  into  continuity,  and  moral  development  that 
outlives  the  physical  form,  and,  like  the  chick  in  the  egg, 
picks  its  way  into  the  outer  and  larger  sphere  of  exist- 
ence. 


176  Chapter  X. 

Every  environment  pressed  upon  the  individual  mind 
makes  a  permanent  indelible  impression.  Suffering  and 
misery  in  the  mind  of  the  mother  constructs  a  sweeter 
conscience  in  the  child.  Thus  the  moral  evil,  with  its 
detestable  effect,  returns  in  virtue  in  the  offspring.  The 
education  of  the  mother  reaches  the  primary  mind  of 
the  child,  in  the  indelible  mother  marks,  that  do  not 
appear  in  the  flesh  alone,  but  in  the  mind  as  well.  We 
personally  know  of  a  child  born  into  the  world  with  a 
mess  of  tomatoes  in  its  face;  the  result  of  the  mother 
being  assaulted  and  struck  in  the  face  with  a  dish  of 
tomatoes  before  the  child's  birth.  We  know  of  a  case 
where  a  young  man  could  not  endure  the  pointing  of  a 
finger  toward  him  without  producing  hysterical  effects. 
We  knew  of  a  young  man  who  could  not  restrain  himself 
from  pinching  every  unsuspecting  person  he  ecountered, 
because  of  the  habit  of  the  father  to  pinch  his  mother 
before  he  was  born.  We  also  knew  of  a  young  lady  who 
would,  every  few  minutes  of  the  day,  stretch  up  her 
neck,  become  red  in  the  face  and  gobble  like  a  turkey, 
all  during  the  springs  and  summers  of  her  entire  life, 
because  her  mother,  during  the  child's  gestation,  became 
suddenly  frightened  by  a  turkey  gobbler  while  alone  in 
the  woods.  We  need  go  no  further  in  this  phase  of  the 
subject  because  the  facts  are  too  numerous  and  the  ques- 
tion too  well  understood  to  need  further  proofs  that 
mental  characteristics  are  inherited,  and  that  at  times 
the  flesh  is  made  to  bear  a  visible  and  lasting  record. 

Since  the  sudden  impulse  upon  the  mind  of  the  mother 
can  find  permanent  effect  upon  the  mind  of  the  child 
you  may  be  assured  that  the  education  of  the  mother 
means  the  education  of  the  child. 

The   time   is  coming  when  children   will  not  need 


Law  of  Heredity.  177 

a  tedious  mental  struggle  for  their  education.  The 
very  sight  of  a  thing  will  open  their  mind  to  a  knowl- 
edge of  it.  The  young  bird  in  its  nest  knows  how  to  hold 
open  its  mouth  to  receive  the  worm  long  before  its  eyes 
are  opened  to  see  the  worm.  The  little  chick  picks  up 
the  grain  of  wheat,  thrusts  its  head  forward  to  make 
use  of  the  Law  of  inertia  in  passing  the  grain  down  its 
throat.  It  sips  its  little  bill  full  of  water,  raises  its 
head  high  in  the  air  to  allow  the  water  to  pass  down  its 
throat  and  immediately  and  effectually  wipes  its  bill  as 
a  grown  human  being  would  use  a  handkerchief.  Where 
do  little  chicks  get  their  intelligence  if  not  through  the 
Law  of  inheritance?  When  this  law  is  better  under- 
stood the  development  of  the  race  will  increase  much 
more  rapidly.  The  coming  generation  will  learn  how  to 
develop  morality  and  leave  crime  in  abeyance  by  treat- 
ing the  case  from  a  prenatal  standpoint,  instead  as  we 
now  do  in  punishing  effect  without  removing  the  cause. 

We  have  stated  throughout  this  chapter  that  the  seed 
was  an  essence  concentration  of  a  dual  type  expression. 
That  in  the  vegetable  kingdom  it  was  a  sleep  state  of 
animation  in  potentiality  ready  to  be  quickened  into  re- 
generation. And  that  vegetable  as  well  as  animal  species 
are  character  elements  all  from  the  same  absolute  and 
infinitesimal  source  but  differentiated  according  to  envi- 
ronment, composition  and  route  each  has  taken. 

In  referring  to  the  sleep  state,  we  are  informed  that 
wheat  buried  by  ashes  and  lava  in  the  ruins  of  Pompeii 
for  over  a  thousand  years  was  dug  up  and  planted  in  soil 
and  that  it  grew,  but  that  it  showed  the  loss  of  that 
period  in  development,  which  as  a  matter  of  course  is  to 
be  expected  since  the  other  grain  had  expressed  over  one 
thousand  re-generations  in  the  meantime. 


178  Chapter  X. 

The  farther  back  one  traces  species  or  type  lines  the 
closer  each  thing  is  allied,  for  the  reason  they  have  had 
less  time  to  diversify.  Besides,  when  a  thing  is  stripped 
of  its  environment  and  character  development  we  have 
reached  the  primordial  from  which  all  combinations 
have  their  beginning. 

Everything  develops  and  maintains  its  own  character. 
Were  it  not  so  one  would  not  know  a  thing  when  seen. 
For  illustration.,  we  call  attention  to  an  oak.  There 
is  the  white  oak,  the  red  oak,  the  swamp  oak,  and  the 
live  oak.  They  all  differ  because  each  bears  a  different 
record  of  environment.  The  botanist  knows  them  all  as 
oak  in  the  character  of  the  wood,  bark  and  leaves,  as 
well  as  their  specific  difference  as  environment  has 
effected  them. 

The  characters  of  vegetable  life  formations  bear  in 
their  records  views  of  all  their  compositions.  They 
show  it  in  solidity  of  fibre  and  express  it  in  odor.  In 
the  animal  kingdom  there  is  a  differentiation  in  the 
color  of  the  flesh,  a  difference  in  taste  and  in  odor. 
While  there  is  some  difference  in  each  individual  animal 
there  is  a  close  resemblance  in  each  specie  as  to  its  own 
specific  characteristic.  For  instance  we  know  at  once 
the  taste  of  beef,  pork,  mutton,  chicken,  etc.,  etc.,  and 
what  is  true  of  the  physical  body  is  alike  true  of  its 
mental  characteristics.  And  all  these  are  in  a  primary 
sense  due  to  inheritance,  and  whatever  improvement  fol- 
lows is  due  to  environment  and  individual  development. 

The  human  species  being  is  the  largest  combination 
mentally  and  physically  on  the  earth  plane.  The  primary 
mind  of  a  human  being  is  so  elaborate  and  extensive 
that  a  great  portion  of  his  character  may  remain  in 
abeyance  without  defect  to  the  individual,  and  because 


Law  of  Heredity.  179 

at  times  the  offspring  do  not  closely  resemble  the  imme- 
diate parents  a  faith  in  the  law  of  inheritance  is  weak- 
ened. 

There  are  inherited  character  lines  in  the  feathered 
tribe  that  deserve  mention,  among  which  are  the  birds 
that  build  their  first  nests  without  instruction,  depend- 
ing entirely  upon  an  inherited  intellect. 

Some  birds  build  their  nests  of  leaves  by  actually  sew- 
ing the  leaves  together  as  a  tailor  might  do,  so  we  call 
them  the  tailor  birds. 

The  cuckoo  birds  will  not  build  nests.  Neither  will 
they  hatch  or  feed  their  offspring.  These  birds  watch 
their  chance  to  slip  into  other  birds'  nests  and  lay  their 
own  eggs  and  at  the  same  time  dump  out  the  other  eggs 
to  avoid  suspicion. 

The  cuckoo  birds  are  inheritedly  opposed  to  mater- 
nity. They  are  therefore  lazy,  cruel,  cunning,  deceitful 
and  murderously  inclined.  What  condition  or  environ- 
ment could  have  brought  about  such  a  trait  of  char- 
acter is  hard  to  even  surmise.  It  is  even  harder  still 
for  the  birds  that  happen  to  be  cruelly  duped  into 
hatching  and  raising  the  cuckoo  intruders  to  understand 
how  they  became  parents  to  the  strangers  growing  in 
their  nest. 

The  question  is  often  raised  why  some  species  ad- 
vance faster  than  others,  and  some  to  a  much  higher 
degree  of  consciousness.  There  are  two  principal  reasons 
for  it.  One  is  the  experience  and  development  of  the 
parents,  the  other  is  the  individual  environment  experi- 
enced. 

The  ape  and  monkey  tribes  would  have  probably  been 
much  farther  advanced  if  their  pubescent  age  was  fifteen 
to  twenty  years  instead  of  two.  It  is  hardly  to  be  ex- 


180  Chapter  X. 

pected  that  a  monkey  could  inherit  mental  capacity  from 
parents  not  over  two  years  old.  For  how  is  it  possible 
to  inherit  what  the  parents  cannot  and  do  not  possess? 

Longevity  and  parental  experience  are  the  qualifica- 
tions most  essential  to  the  propagation  of  an  advanced 
primary  mind  in  the  offspring. 

Mankind  has  been  gifted  with  longevity  and  endur- 
ance that  gives  him  precedent  over  the  general  animal 
kingdom.  His  curiosity  was  early  developed  and  cur- 
iosity is  the  forerunner  of  mental  development. 

Outside  of  the  law  of  inheritance  we  cannot  account 
for  established  character  in  the  offspring  of  the  primary 
mind  of  each  individual.  Much  less  to  explain  how  a 
normally  bright  and  perfect  infant  could  be  born  to 
even  silly  parents  at  times. 

In  the  case  of  the  human  family  the  offspring  have 
the  advantage  of  parental  education  from  fifteen  to  fifty 
years  and  the  children  are  of  course  descendants  of  that 
education.  In  the  ages  gone  by  it  was  not  deemed  ad- 
vantageous or  economical  to  educate  the  girls,  and  all 
the  energies  in  the  line  of  education  was  bestowed  upon 
the  boys,  who  were  intended  to  be  the  coming  heads  of 
families,  and  who  were  supposed  to  think  for  the  fam- 
ilies that  they  might  each  preside  over. 

All  this  is  being  changed  now,  and  the  girls  share 
alike  the  education  of  their  brothers.  This  privilege 
means  a  better  education  for  the  mothers  of  the  coming 
generations  and  a  like  measure  of  advancement  in  their 
prenatal  mental  development. 

When  the  mothers  of  the  race  are  educated  we  will 
not  have  to  drill  education  into  the  children.  They 
will  be  born  with  educated  primary  minds,  which  have 
only  to  be  individually  aroused  to  activity.  For  mental 


Law  of  Heredity.  181 

powers  and  characteristics,  like  the  physical,  must  de- 
velop from  within  and  the  easiest  way  to  get  permanent 
results  is  through  prenatal  education. 

When  the  parents  are  educated  the  child  ought  to 
surpass  either  of  them,  because  the  primary  mind  of  the 
child  is  the  product  of  both  and  if  the  child  does  not 
surpass  its  parents  it  is  due  to  an  abnormal  condition. 

The  time  will  come  when  castes,  religions  and  nation- 
ality will  cease  to  be  a  barrier  in  the  complete  amalga- 
mation of  the  race,  and  when  that  time  comes  we  will 
have  a  new  race  of  people ;  for  it  is  well  known  that  the 
shortcomings  of  one  people  is  to  be  found  in  some  other, 
and  when  the  whole  are  united  man  will  be  made  up 
with  a  much  more  elaborate  combination  than  he  now 
possesses. 

In  concluding  this  chapter  we  feel  that  justice  would 
not  be  done  the  subject  if  we  neglect  declaring  that  man 
as  a  character  being,  is  an  individual  miniature  of  the 
race.  Each  of  us  are  both  male  and  female,  with  a  per- 
centage of  tendency  to  one  side  or  the  other.  That  in 
some  functions  we  may  lean  to  the  male  side  while  in 
other  functions  to  that  of  the  female,  and  that  it  is 
altogether  a  matter  of  individual  development,  a  result 
of  prenatal  influence,  and  that  the  sexes  are  divided 
through  the  equilibrium  of  universal  demand  as  the 
greater  energy  always  throws  the  pendulum  to  the 
opposite  side,  and  that  the  results  are  due  to  expressed 
energy  in  the  molecules. 

The  human  character,  individually  speaking,  is  a 
mental  character,  and  what  characteristics  are  in  the 
physical  body  are  also  in  the  mental  body,  and  all  that 
we  are,  in  both  character  and  mind,  is  fixed  and  locked 
up  in  memory  and  the  combination  as  a  whole  we  call 


182  Chapter  X. 

the  human  soul.  Each  soul  has  a  life  line  tie  leading 
back  through  the  ages  in  its  ancestry  covered  and  satu- 
rated with  all  the  environments  of  all  the  past  genera- 
tions as  well  as  to  every  thing  that  the  individual  sensed, 
thought  or  experienced. 

This  is  what  constitutes  our  inheritance.  This  is  what 
we  know  to  be  the  Immortal  Soul,  no  part  of  which  can 
be  erased  from  existence  any  more  than  planets  can  be 
changed  from  their  orbits  over  Nature's  invisible  lines, 
for  all  come  under  the  same  immutable  Laws. 


CHAPTER  XL 
SURVIVAL  OF  THE   FITTEST. 

It  seems  the  title  is  an  answer  to  the  question.  How 
could  it  be  otherwise  ?  We  note,  however,  that  the  rule 
does  not  apply  to  the  Moral  Law. 

The  physical  fitness  of  a  thing  to  survive  depends 
upon  its  power  of  resistance.  In  the  moral  sphere,  fit- 
ness is  a  thing  entirely  outside  geometrical  dimensions, 
and  belongs  to  the  sphere  of  consciousness.  For  this 
reason  moral  fitness  cannot  preserve  physical  fitness. 
Therefore,  in  discussing  the  subject  we  must  first  deal 
in  the  physical  and  its  effect  upon  the  moral  plane, 
which  is  an  outgrowth  of  physical  conditions. 

The  seventh  Principle  of  Nature,  or  Law  of  Com- 
pensation, provides  its  measure  of  development  accord- 
ing to  energy  expressed  and  resistance  overcome,  so  that 
whatever  a  thing  is  capable  of  resisting,  determines  its 
measure  of  fitness.  Anything  that  withstands  the  rav- 
ages of  the  elements  or  environments  does  as  a  matter 
of  course,  survive.  The  power  of  survival  depends  upon 
how  close  a  thing  may  be  allied  to  the  sleep  state  of 
nature,  and  how  much  it  can  resist  being  removed 
therefrom. 

A  thing  resisting  change  over  the  greatest  environ- 
ment and  time  is  expressing  its  surviving  power  and 
the  capacity  of  its  fitness. 

Matter  is  energy  expended  and  confined  to  the  state 
of  rest,  and  can  be  forced  back  to  its  original  state. 
The  extent  of  resistance  it  offers  depends  upon  its 
intrinsic  qualities,  which  is  due  more  to  the  element  of 


184  Chapter  XL 

time  than  to  anything  else.  For  illustration,  an  arti- 
ficial diamond  made  from  the  same  quality  of  carbon 
lacks  in  every  way  its  fitness  to  cope  with  the  natural 
diamond,  owing  principally  to  the  fact  that  one  is  sud- 
denly produced,  while  the  other  has  within  it  the  crys- 
talizing  force  of  the  ages.  Survival  therefore  is  expressing 
Time,  and  Time  is  part  of  its  make  up.  This  law,  like 
the  Law  of  Gravity,  eternally  perpetuates  its  manifes- 
tations, and  with  an  ever  increasing  propensity. 

In  the  mineral  kingdom  the  survival  of  the  fittest 
depends  largely  on  its  resistance  to  being  disturbed  from 
the  state  of  its  individual  character.  Time  adds  to  each 
thing  its  virtue.  When  we  consider  the  vegetable  king- 
dom we  find  the  same  resistance  to  change  or  annihila- 
tion with  this  difference:  in  the  mineral  it  all  depends 
upon  the  present  tense,  while  in  the  vegetable  or  animal 
kingdoms,  it  reaches  into  the  protective  by  re-generation 
and  self  defensive  preservation  as  well. 

In  vegetable  life  the  struggle  for  existence  is  carried 
on  principally  with  the  roots  under  the  surface  of  the 
soil.  The  roots  that  spread  over  the  greatest  territory, 
absorb  the  most  nutrition,  and  out-reach  their  competi- 
tors and  therefore  have  a  greater  capacity  of  survival. 
Above  the  soil  the  struggle  is  to  reach  the  light,  and 
that  plants  tending  to  overreach  others,  survives  to  the 
measure  of  their  fitness. 

In  the  animal  kingdom  environment  plays  an  im- 
portant part  in  the  construction  and  character  of  forms. 
Any  use  develops  capacity  in  the  line  of  effort.  The  Law 
is  there,  and  a  thing  is  compensated  merely  by  use. 

Tender  forms  readily  yield  to  environment.  The 
chameleon,  for  instance,  in  a  brief  time  will  assume 
the  color  of  the  leaf,  plant  or  stone  to  which  it  hovers. 


Survival  of  the  Fittest.  185 

We  mention  this  to  show  the  effect  the  Law  of  Envir- 
onment has  upon  all  things,  but  in  most  cases  the 
influence  is  slower  than  in  the  case  of  the  chameleon, 
because  the  resistance  to  change  is  greater.  In  this 
manner  we  can  account  for  spots  on  animals  and  on  the 
feathers  of  birds.  It  will  be  noted  that  birds  frequenting 
certain  habitations  sooner  or  later  resemble  their  sur- 
roundings so  closely  that  detection  is  difficult,  and  this 
protects  them  from  becoming  prey  of  animals.  Thus 
they  survive  because  environment  furnishes  them  pro- 
tection from  discovery. 

Some  animals  depend  upon  fleetness  as  a  means  of 
defense,  and  animals  of  that  nature  usually  have  large 
keen  ears,  and  sleep  with  eyes  open,  enabling  them  to 
hear  and  see  in  their  sleeping  moments,  and  whenever 
any  disturbing  element  encroaches  they  are  at  once  off 
to  a  place  of  safety.  Usually  such  animals  are  inoffen- 
sive and  could  not  survive  were  they  to  adopt  com- 
bativeness. 

There  are  animals  wholly  aggressive  and  their  survival 
is  quite  apparent  in  their  ability  to  catch  and  consume 
their  prey.  They  survive  to  the  extent  they  can  capture 
and  devour.  The  stronger  ones  survive  the  weaker  as 
the  stronger  are  sure  to  be  most  successful  and  thereby 
the  best  fed. 

The  crane  that  gets  the  most  fish  because  he  has  the 
longest  legs  and  neck  survives  over  the  short-legged  and 
short-necked  crane  that  must  be  fed,  or  die  sooner  than 
the  more  successful  long-legged  members  of  his  type. 

The  giraffe  subsists  on  branches  of  trees  and  survives 
to  the  degree  he  succeeds  in  securing  his  food.  If  there 
be  a  shortage  in  food  the  short-legged  and  short-necked 


186  Chapter  XI. 

giraffe  must  succumb  first,  leaving  the  most  fitting  to 
survive. 

Survival  feats  are  not  alone  confined  to  the  present 
tense,  for  the  action  produced  by  mental  desire  develops 
forms  best  equipped.  Work  and  mental  cunning  play 
their  part  in  the  shrewdness  of  the  crane  to  deceive  fish 
by  a  silent  careful  manner  of  wading  into  the  water 
and  remaining  silent,  like  a  stump,  until  the  unsus- 
pecting fish  approaches. 

The  cunning  keenness  of  the  mind  that  aided  in  its 
present  tense,  projected  its  effects  into  re-generation, 
giving  to  the  offspring,  even  as  keen  mental  qualities 
which  were  to  be  subjected  to  even  greater  capacities,  in 
the  individual  possessing  them,  so  they  not  only  survive 
because  of  their  fitness  to  consume  and  live,  but  multiply 
the  fitness,  generation  after  generation,  until  the  for- 
mation becomes  a  wondrous  mechanism  of  organic  Life. 

In  the  case  of  man  the  law  of  fitness  is  the  same. 
Although  carnivorous  by  nature  he  is  largely  a  defensive 
creature.  His  methods  of  securing  animal  food  was  in 
his  ability  not  to  overpower  but  to  worry  the  animal  by 
prolonged  chase.  It  is  well  known  that  man's  endur- 
ance in  the  chase  can  overcome  most  any  animal,  but 
being  a  defensive  creature  he  resorted  to  fruits,  nuts 
and  grains  as  his  sustenance,  and  his  method  of  defense 
living  in  trees  and  cliffs.  To  all  intents  and  purposes 
he  was  an  animal — an  animal  man,  with  stern  factors  to 
overcome  in  the  acquirement  of  necessities,  without 
which  he  could  not  survive,  and  we  are  safe  in  the  con- 
clusion, that  there  has  been  innumerable  efforts  of  nature 
to  produce  characters  perhaps  even  superior  and  of  finer 
qualities  than  any  race  man  has  descended  from,  but 
that  they  have  become  extinct,  as  they  could  not  survive 


Survival  of  the  Fittest.  187 

the  awful  carnage  of  the  animal  creation.  As  much  as 
we  may  speculate,  were  it  not  for  the  water  defenses 
of  seas  and  rivers  as  barriers,  in  all  probability  our  own 
race  would  be  extinct  today.  For  when  man  became 
the  eater  of  man  he  experienced  his  greatest  struggle 
for  life,  and  a  new  process  of  the  survival  of  the  fittest 
was  brought  into  play. 

In  the  development  of  cunning,  man  would  sneak 
upon  his  fellow-creature,  kill  and  eat  him.  It  was  the 
expression  of  might  and  will.  Reason  had  not  dawned 
upon  him.  The  next  stage  of  development  showed  the 
effect  of  reason  approaching.  The  most  cunning  would 
seize  their  weaker  fellow-creatures  and  make  them  serv- 
ants and  slaves.  Later  again,  the  shrewder  possessed 
the  lands  and  lived  at  ease  themselves,  while  the  helpless 
and  ignorant  clothed  and  fed  them.  Reason  expands 
again,  and  the  slaves  were  made  free,  while  the  cunning 
still  survived  and  prevailed  in  living  upon  the  sweat 
of  the  brows  of  their  fellow-creatures,  by  speculating 
and  gambling  in  finances  and  the  necessaries  of  life. 
Since  man  started  across  the  chasm  from  the  animal 
world  in  his  helpless  state  of  existence  to  that  of  the 
intellectual,  he  not  only  had  to  fight  his  way  upward 
from  the  ravages  of  wild  beasts,  but  worst  of  all  enemies, 
he  had  to  contend  with  man's  inhumanity  to  man. 

The  light  of  the  day  is  dawning.  Reason  will  be 
enthroned,  and  when  that  function  assumes  its  rightful 
place  in  the  minds  of  men  the  true  mental  survival  of 
the  fittest  will  be  established.  When  reason  has  to 
contend  with  reason  the  encounter  will  be  constructive, 
not  destructive.  The  defensive  as  well  as  the  offensive 
will  be  developed  by  the  use  of  Reason. 

Coming  back  to  the  subject  we  note  that  in  the  con- 


188  Chapter  XI. 

struction  of  molecules  the  most  enduring  survive  the 
weaker  in  the  combination  of  physical  forms,  and  as 
other  molecules  must  take  their  places  in  maintaining 
the  general  structure,  they  most  naturally  follow  the 
line  of  greatest  demand.  That  part  of  the  form  used 
demands  the  most  and  gets  the  most.  Organs  are  con- 
structed and  evolve  always  toward  the  requirements  until 
the  physical  form  becomes  fitted  to  every  expressed  need. 

Sound  waves  press  their  influence  on  everything  they 
come  in  contact  with.  Light  waves  reflect  and  impress 
sight  lines  upon  everything  the  rays  touch,  so  everything 
is  effected  by  sound  and  by  light,  to  the  degree  that 
everything  hears  and  sees.  There  comes  a  time  when 
moving  and  acting  characters  become  quickened  by  hav- 
ing developed  within  them  entity  centers.  Between  the 
source  of  sound  or  source  of  reflected  light,  and  the 
receiving  entity  centers  focus  is  established.;  the  ear  or 
eye  follow  as  the  focal  center  over  which  sound  waves 
verge,  or  sight  lines  cross,  and  where  molecules  must 
replace  molecules,  generation  after  generation,  in  the 
course  of  the  survival  of  the  fittest,  the  ear  and  eye 
like  every  other  organ  of  the  body  came  into  being  to 
fit  requirements  and  uses  of  the  invisible  forces.  Thus 
the  sight  lines  established  the  eye,  and  the  sound  waves 
established  the  ear. 

Where  the  light  is  forever  turned  off  the  eye  as  an 
eye  ceases  to  exist,  but  like  the  fishes  of  the  great 
Ma  moth  Cave  of  Kentucky  where  eyes  are  no  longer 
needed  and  where  the  eyes  once  were  in  ages  and  genera- 
tions gone  by,  they  have  rudimentals  now  as  enduring 
records  that  the  fish  once  had  eyes.  The  same  results 
would  follow  the  organ  of  the  ear  provided  sound  would 
be  stilled,  as  would  also  be  the  result  that  would  inva- 


Survival  of  the  Fittest.  189 

riably  follow  the  cessation  of  use  in  any  other  organ  of 
the  body. 

A  slight  stretch  of  the  mind  will  determine  that  sound 
produced  the  ear  and  sight  lines,  though  invisible,  pro- 
duced the  eye.  To  take  from  the  ear  or  the  eye  the 
forces  that  produced  them  will  just  as  certainly  put 
them  out  of  existence,  leaving  nothing  but  the  records 
of  their  having  once  existed. 

When  the  mathematician  wishes  to  prove  his  problem 
he  reverses  the  process  and  if  results  are  what  they  were 
when  he  started,  the  conclusions  are  conceeded  correct. 

For  illustration:  if  you  substract  5  from  9  you  will 
have  a  residue  of  4,  then  if  you  wish  to  prove  it,  add 
the  4  to  the  5  and  you  get  back  to  9  again.  If  you 
reach  the  point  of  beginning  and  find  what  you  started 
with,  then  you  have  tested  your  case  by  one  of  Nature's 
Laws;  the  Numerical  Principle,  and  where  the  rule  is 
followed  conclusions  are  bound  to  be  correct.  So  to  de- 
termine how  any  part  of  the  organic  body  was  created 
we  have  only  to  determine  their  functions.  If  the  ear 
hears  sounds,  and  the  ears  be  sealed  a  sufficient  time  they 
would  become  functionless  and  fail  of  hearing.  If  this 
be  true  then  sound  becomes  the  potent  factor  creating 
the  ear.  If  the  eye  sees  objects  by  reflected  light  over 
the  lines  of  contact  from  objects,  then  if  objects,  or  re- 
flected light,  or  lines  of  contact,  be  removed,  and  con- 
tinue the  absence  long  enough,  the  eye  will  become  sight- 
less. If  by  the  removing  of  the  reflected  light  from 
objects  puts  the  eye  out  of  commission  for  the  lack  of 
a  maintaining  function,  then  it  is  reflected  light  from 
object  by  sight  line  contact  that  constructed  the  eye. 

The  process  largely  instrumental  in  the  work  of  the 
survival  of  the  fittest  in  the  lower  cell,  or  molecular 


190  Chapter  XL 

formation,  has  its  first  environment  in  the  Law  of 
Affinity,  attracting  like  to  like,  and  repelling  the  op- 
posite or  inharmonious.  The  next  stage  or  plane  of 
action  is  the  polarities,  or  a  better  name  for  it  would 
be  sexual  selection,  which  works  automatically  and  ex 
presses  no  other  choice  than  the  opposites  that  are  in 
harmonious  relation.  When  the  mind  becomes  active, 
even  exercising  a  low  degree  of  judgment,  it  begins  to 
sway  the  molecular  natural  selection  and  the  polar  sexual 
selection  under  arbitrary  will,  which  is  the  third  plane 
of  activity,  and  is  called  mental  selection.  This  form 
of  mental  activity  runs  a  long  way  down  into  the  animal 
kingdom,  and  is  instrumental  in  producing  several  well- 
known  characteristics  and  functions,  among  which  are 
the  plumage  and  musical  songs  in  the  birds.  The 
most  beautiful  in  plumage  and  the  sweetest  singers  sur- 
vived because  of  the  mental  selection  of  the  female  birds, 
for  the  males  must  court  the  taste  of  the  female  to 
secure  a  mate  for  propagation.  The  male  bird  is 
always  the  suitor  and  he  must  impress  the  female  mind 
of  his  charms. 

In  the  case  of  the  man  the  male  is  the  selector  and 
on  account  of  this  fact  the  greater  effort  to  produce 
charms  and  beauty  falls  to  the  lot  of  the  female,  which 
without  doubt  adds  to  their  advantage  in  securing  mates. 

We  mention  the  mental  phase  to  show  the  almost  un- 
limited advantage  to  be  attained  where  the  mind  is 
influential  in  the  prenatal  impression  upon  the  off- 
spring. Whatsoever  the  parents  strive  for  they  are 
enabled  to  mould  in  the  character  of  the  child,  and  the 
results  are  far  reaching,  especially  from  the  mother. 

The  mother's  mind  is  constantly  attached  to  the 
charm  of  beauty,  and  the  child  is  marked  with  beauty. 


Survival  of  the  Fittest.  191 

Nowadays  the  mothers  are  better  educated  than  of  old, 
and  it  is  constantly  being  manifested  in  the  children, 
for  who  can  doubt  these  truths  when  they  see  the  bril- 
liant and  charming  qualities  in  the  children  of  these 
later  generations. 

In  olden  times  it  was  not  considered  expedient  that 
women  should  be  educated  or  express  any  sort  of  edu- 
cational liberty.  They  were  not  supposed  to  be  anything 
but  helpmates  for  their  lords  and  'masters  and  the  less 
they  knew  the  more  content  they  would  be  with  their  lot 
in  life.  Man  was  only  to  record  from  the  male  side 
of  the  household,  for  the  heredity  lines  were  supposed 
to  run  only  in  the  male  progeny.  In  fact  the  female 
was  not  even  suspected  of  having  a  soul.  In  those  days 
the  human  family  was  nurtured  in  the  womb  of  igno- 
rance and  the  babes  were  raised  and  rocked  in  the 
cradle  of  mental  depravity.  All  this  has  changed.  The 
female  is  coming  into  her  natural  rights.  She  is  being 
educated  alongside  her  brother  and  the  dawn  of  her 
political  liberty  is  at  hand.  She  is  now  known  to  have 
a  soul,  and  she  at  last,  is  credited  with  being  an  equal 
factor  in  the  promulgation  of  the  type  lines  of  the 
Tree  of  Life,  and  that  to  her  side  is  to  be  credited  the 
fundamental  fixed  characteristics  of  humanity. 

Up  to  this  time  the  full  force  and  effect  of  the  duality 
has  not  found  expression,  hence  the  process  of  the  sur- 
vival of  the  fittest  in  man  has  been  largely  curtailed. 
The  coming  generations  will  inherit  education  because 
both  parents  will  be  educated.  The  primary  mind  of 
the  child  is  the  product  of  surplus  mental  energy  of 
the  parents  meeting  in  a  focal  center  of  the  child  mind. 
If  the  parents  have  no  surplus  mental  energy,  what  can 
you  expect  the  child  to  have?  Certainly  not  what  it 


192  Chapter  XL 

could  not  inherit.     The  best  result  in  educating  the 
child  is  attained  by  educating  the  mother. 

When  all  parents  are  educated  in  the  laws  of  life 
instead  of  how  to  take  commercial  advantage  over  their 
fellow-men ;  how  to  live  here  and  now,  with  a  maximum 
result,  the  child  will  then  be  nurtured  and  matured  in 
the  womb  of  intellectual  maternity.  It  will  be  rocked 
in  the  cradle  of  culture,  and  guided  by  the  hand  and 
brain  of  intellectual  motherhood.  We  will  then  have 
a  full  expression  of  the  survival  of  the  fittest  in  the 
mental  world. 


CHAPTER   XII. 
USING  AND  ABUSING. 

All  of  Life  is  habit  of  doing  things.  Living  is  ex- 
pressing and  experiencing.  All  habits  are  efforts  of 
using  or  abusing. 

The  normal  use  of  any  thing  constructs  and  main- 
tains that  thing.  Over  reaching  or  excessive  using 
is  abusing  and  destroying  the  thing  used.  Every  act  in 
Life  comes  under  the  head  of  using  or  abusing;  con- 
structing or  destroying. 

To  use  the  functions  of  mind  enlarges  and  develops 
those  functions. 

To  use  the  functions  of  the  physical  body,  its  organs 
or  muscles,  means  to  construct  and  maintain  them.  To 
over-reach  in  the  functions  of  mind,  or  physical  body, 
or  to  use  excessively  any  organ  of  the  body  or  mind, 
is  to  abuse  that  organ. 

It  is  well  known  that  to  strap  one's  arm  to  one's  side 
and  not  make  use  of  it,  the  arm  in  time  will  wither  away. 
So  non-use  of  any  function  or  organ,  as  well  as  exces- 
sive use  of  same,  is  abusive  and  destructive,  while  the 
normal  and  reasonable  use  of  anything  is  always  con- 
structive. Since  there  are  no  two  individuals,  or  two 
of  anything,  exactly  alike  in  the  world,  there  can  be 
no  hard  and  fast  rule  to  govern  what  really  is  abusive 
and  what  is  constructive.  For  what  is  moderate  use 
to  one  is  oftentimes  abusive  to  others. 

The  best  guide  to  determine  the  proper  use  of  a 
function  is  moderation  to  the  degree  that  it  shall  never 
exhaust  all  its  energy.  A  true  guide  is,  that  only  the 


194  Chapter  XII. 

surplus  energy  be  used,  always  keeping  a  little  reserve. 
To  use  ones  account  in  full  is  apt  to  mean  bankruptcy, 
which  holds  good  to  any  function  of  mind,  or  any  or- 
ganic forces  of  the  body. 

The  habits  in  general,  are  usually  normal  habits. 
One  can  cultivate  gradually  away  from  the  fixed  habits 
or  general  customs,  but  to  do  so  suddenly  is  abusive 
and  destructive.  While  to  do  so  under  practice,  fol- 
lowed within  the  boundaries  of  the  surplus  energy  at 
hand  is  normal  using  and  constructive,  as  well  as  leading 
to  success  of  special  accomplishments. 

We  often  hear  persons  speak  of  violating  Nature's 
Laws.  They  do  not  mean  just  what  they  say,  for  it  is 
not  within  the  province  of  any  one  to  violate  Nature's 
Laws.  What  they  really  do  is,  transgress  rules  of  Life 
— habitual  customs. 

Anything,  however  bulky,  can  be  set  in  motion  where 
energy  is  applied  and  long  enough  time  is  absorbed, 
so  that  whatsoever  habits  one  may  follow,  will  become 
the  Law  of  Life,  if  the  person  takes  time  enough  and 
maintains  the  necessary  energy.  Habits  that  are  abusive 
in  personal  experience,  may  become  customs  and  rules 
of  Life,  if  followed  generation  after  generation,  although 
it  is  destructive  to  the  first  habitual  contractors,  it 
becomes  normal  custom  when  followed  for  ages.  Herein 
lies  the  power  of  the  human  race  to  practice  a  common 
rule  of  life  that  would  kill  if  applied  to  the  lower  ani- 
mal kingdom.  In  order  to  illustrate  what  is  meant,  we 
refer  to  the  fact  that  one  drop  of  nicotine  will  kill  a 
snake  or  rabbit,  yet  a  man  can  learn  to  suck  it  from  his 
tobacco  pipe  and  relish  it. 

There  are  many  practices  that  are  exceedingly  de- 
structive to  the  individual  now;  such  as  morphine  using, 


Using  and  Abusing.  195 

which,  like  other  infernal  practices,  if  followed  for  many 
generations,  will  place  them,  within  the  scope  of  human 
endurance.  One  thing  we  are  quite  sure  of,  and  that  is, 
no  matter  how  degrading  a  thing  may  be,  there  are 
always  individuals  ready  to  use,  and  in  a  measure,  be- 
come the  willing  destroyers  of  their  own  happiness. 

It  matters  not  what  speed  anything  attains,  it  can  be 
stopped  if  energy  and  time  is  given  to  accomplish  same, 
while  to  do  it  suddenly  is  to  violate  a  rule  of  action, 
and  serious  consequences  follow.  Whether  it  be  solid 
matter  or  elements  of  high  planes  all  things  are  subject 
to  inertia  and  momentum. 

Care  should  be  exercised  in  the  uses  of  the  mental 
functions.  The  excessive  use  of  one  function,  or  one 
line  of  thinking,  is  destructive;  constant  normal  use  of 
a  function  is  constructive.  There  is  another  important 
phase  that  enters  not  to  be  overlooked,  which  is  the 
constructing  of  one  function  at  the  expense  and  neglect 
of  all  others.  In  order  to  have  a  well  balanced  mind  all 
the  mental  functions  must  alike  be  developed,  for  the 
mind  is  much  like  a  tripod  and  depends  equally  upon  all 
its  functions.  Should  there  be  one  of  abnormal  growth 
or  several  insufficiently  developed,  the  mind  is  not  well 
balanced  and  totters,  so  to  speak.  A  shortcoming  in  one 
function,  or  an  over  development  in  another  biases  the 
mind,  and  through  this  many  individuals  for  no  other 
reason,  are  classed  as  insane.  The  excessive  function 
shows  up  distinctly  and  is  easily  discerned  by  anyone, 
but  where  functions  have  shortcomings,  it  is  hard  for 
even  intimate  friends  to  discover  what  is  lacking,  so  we 
simply  say  he  has  a  "screw  loose"  somewhere,  or  "bats 
in  his  belfry." 

It  is  an  easy  matter  for  a  mind  to  unbalance  when 


196  Chapter  XII. 

fatigueingly  following  extraordinary  effort,  thinking  or 
acting  in  a  rut  or  groove.  It  is  a  brilliant  mind  indeed 
that  can  see  its  own  weaknesses  and  follies.  The  best 
guide  is  to  keep  constantly  before  the  mind  the  subject 
of  "Using  and  Abusing.'5 


CHAPTER  XIII. 
FROM  ANIMAL  TO  SPIRITUAL  MAN. 

There  was  a  time  when  Man  did  not  exist  on  this, 
our  earth  plane.  There  was  a  time  when  this  earth  did 
not  exist,  or  the  solar  system  with  its  central  Sun.  For 
everything  of  a  constructive  nature  had  its  infinitesimal 
beginning  upon  which  its  structure  was  composed. 

Before  Man  could  exist  with  his  unique  and  expansive 
composition,  there  first  had  to  be  a  condition  that  was 
suitable  to  produce  and  sustain  him.  For  with  Man, 
as  with  every  other  active  character,  his  primary  stages 
of  development  were  an  outgrowth  of  conditions  and 
environment. 

It  is  true  we  look  at  Man  as  being  so  far  remote 
from  a  primary  idea  that  we  are  prone  to  place  him  in 
a  sphere  entirely  separate  from  that  of  other  things. 
But  this  is  due  to  the  fact  that  we  view  him  entirely 
from  his  present  status.  Our  eyes  are  closed  to  the  fact 
of  the  law  of  gradual  development  which  applies  to 
Man  as  to  all  other  parts  of  creation. 

First  there  was  need  to  have  a  planet  upon  which 
to  build  baseline  formations.  Secondly,  there  was  need 
to  have  substance  suitable  for  such  characteristic  con- 
struction. Thirdly,  that  substance  must  first  be  created 
before  a  higher  development  could  ensue. 

The  great  majority  of  people  are  prone  to  the  belief 
that  Man  was  created  a  perfect  being,  yet  they  know 
that  he  is  not,  and  then  soothe  themselves  with  the  idea 
that  because  he  is  not,  that  he  must  have  fallen  from 
his  high  estate.  The  truth  is  every  individual  has  to 


198  Chapter  XIII. 

grow  from  his  primary  start,  as  the  race  itself  had  to  do, 
and  that  each  individual  as  with  the  race,  is  constantly 
growing  toward  a  larger  and  larger  development.  Since 
improvement  is  a  universal  and  natural  sequence,  why 
should  we  think  that  anything  should  have  its  finish  in 
its  start? 

If  things  are  all  under  the  process  of  gradual  develop- 
ment, and  the  future  always  has  greater  events  in  store, 
what  are  we  to  conclude,  when  looking  down  through  the 
past,  but  that  it  always  has  been  so,  from  his  primordial 
conception  ?  That  being  true,  how  far  have  we  to  go  in 
order  to  trace  Man's  exalted  mind  back  to  his  animal 
brain,  and  the  vegetable  organic  characters  from  which 
the  brain  was  produced? 

In  speaking  of  Man  we  must  do  so  from  the  stand- 
point of  mental  capacities  and  mental  powers.  And  to 
fully  comprehend  him  we  must  analyze  him  from  top 
to  bottom. 

Although  the  mind  germinates  in  the  physical  proto- 
plasm, it  does  not  feed  upon  it  any  more  than  we  eat 
the  mineral  because  we  live  upon  it.  The  physical  form 
is  created  and  sustained  out  of  physical  substance  and 
the  mental  form  is  created  and  sustained  out  of  mental 
substance.  The  physical  form  digests  physical  substance 
and  out  of  the  energy  created  through  the  digestive 
process  constructs  and  maintains  physical  form.  While 
the  mental  form — a  form  of  thought  accumulation — di- 
gests thoughts,  and  with  the  mental  energy  thus  created, 
constructs  and  maintains  mental  formation. 

Each  and  everything  lias  its  own  character,  for  every- 
thing  is  a  character  combination  within  its  own  plane, 
and  to  a  degree  dependent  upon  the  plane  it  first  ger- 
minates. The  mind  depends  upon  thoughts  and 


Animal  to  Spiritual  Man*  199 

thoughts  are  mental  contacts.  The  animal  man  depends 
upon  the  physical  man  as  the  physical  man  does  upon 
the  protoplasm.  The  protoplasm  upon  the  vegetable 
kingdom  and  the  vegetable  kingdom  upon  the  mineral 
kingdom,  and  all  depends  upon  energy  and  principles 
beneath  them.  In  that  sense  we  are  all  relatively  con- 
nected, while  each  character  formation  increases  as  it 
takes  form  in  planes  above,  and  becomes  more  and  more 
independent  from  the  plane  it  first  germinates,  until 
at  last  it  reaches  a  plane  of  arbitrary  power,  and  in 
a  measure  becomes  a  creator  itself. 

In  the  lower  planes  of  character  building,  the  best 
Nature  could  produce  outside  of  the  mineral  plane 
was  a  projection  of  vegetable  fungi;  and  although  this 
condition  reached  the  stage  of  over  five  thousand  varie- 
ties, it  was  in  itself  but  the  baseline  upon  which  the 
flower  and  seed  plane  could  be  established.  The  reason 
for  this  lies  in  the  fact  of  environment.  The  atmosphere 
surrounding  our  earth  was  filled  with  carbon  gases, 
which  had  first  to  be  transposed,  and  following  it  a  finer 
condition  that  provided  the  advent  of  a  higher  expres- 
sion. Flowers  then  grew,  and  crossed  the  one  to  the 
other,  the  adoption  of  a  dual  union  in  the  state  of  seed, 
which  before  that  time  was  a  projective  division  life. 

In  the  state  of  the  flower  and  seed  is  established  a 
new  plane  of  vegetable  life.  In  this  plane  vegetation 
took  on  fiber  and  strength  whose  every  move  was  to 
establish  record  and  character  in  larger  and  larger  de- 
gree, until  vegetation  reached  the  state  of  sensitive 
consciousness.  Plants  became  carnivorous,  not  only  to 
feed  from  the  soil,  air,  ether  and  sunlight,  but  to  feed 
upon  germs  of  animal  life. 

The  sensitive  plant  became  so  enlarged  with  conscious- 


200  Chapter  XIII. 

ness  that  it  almost  reached  over  the  line  into  the  animal 
plane. 

Evolution  is  compound  addition,  and  for  that  reason 
each  advancement  made  gives  rise  to  still  further  en- 
largement, both  in  character  and  capacity.  So  while 
things  begin  exceedingly  small.,  and  exceedingly  slow, 
the  advancement  and  character  when  once  enlarged, 
become  more  and  more  rapid. 

In  the  first  place  sunlight  pouring  into  the  mineral 
soil,  which  by  the  way  clothed  in  darkness,  provided  life 
lines  over  which  spontaneous  development  toward  the 
light  of  the  sun  followed.  Thus  spake  the  little  blade 
of  grass  "I  rise  to  seek  the  light."  The  same  sunlight 
that  plies  its  energy  into  the  darkened  soil,  poured  its 
force  into  the  cell  or  animalcule  that  germinated  em- 
bryonic thought,  which  in  ages  developed  the  active 
mind.  For  the  reason  that  when  lines  are  once  estab- 
lished energy  continues  to  flow  over  them,  and  so  long 
as  the  energy  is  maintained  the  records  are  made  and 
characters  established.  Thus  the  little  start  evolves  into 
the  unlimited  capacity  of  active  and  creative  mind. 

The  physical  form  of  animal  life,  like  that  of  the 
vegetable,  had  its  first  impulse  of  action  from  the  prin- 
ciple of  collective  formation  into  growth  and  division. 
It  maintains  that  same  growth  process  today,  although 
the  physical,  like  the  vegetable,  has  long  since  passed 
into  the  expression  of  the  flower  and  seed  plane  of  union 
life  in  construction  of  individual  character  forms. 

We  are  reminded  that  although  the  physical  body  is 
builded  under  one  principle  in  its  constituent  substance, 
that  its  individual  form  is  created  by  another  and  higher 
plane — that  of  dual  union.  If  this  were  not  the  case, 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man,  201 

we,  like  the  crawfish,  could  grow  out  of  our  bodies  a  new 
limb  that  might  be  amputated. 

ISince  our  physical  bodies  express  a  development  of  two 
different  principles  that  work  in  two  different  planes, 
it  is  not  so  hard  to  see  how  the  mind,  although  clothed 
in  flesh,  can  feed  upon  its  own  sustaining  substance, 
live  in  its  own  plane  of  existence,  although  for  the  time 
being,  is  technically  connected  in  the  coat  of  animal 
form. 

The  higher  the  plane  the  more  extended  is  the  com- 
bination of  character,  and  the  less  is  it  subject  to  change 
or  decomposition.  In  fact  it  is  doubtful  if  mind  sub- 
stance ever  decomposes  or  disorganizes.  Tracing  the 
individual  mind  from  its  dual  primary  conception 
through  embryonic  gestation  to  child  life,  thence  from 
childhood  to  maturity  and  finally  the  aged  man,  we 
note  the  continuous  renewal  of  the  physical  body,  but 
know  of  no  change  in  the  mental  except  that  of  com- 
pound addition. 

The  human  being  is  a  combination  living  in  several 
planes  with  each  plane  of  action  under  different  prin- 
ciples. Not  only  do  we  live  in  the  several  planes,  but 
have  several  forms  interpenetrating  one  the  other.  The 
mental  interpenetrates  every  cell  of  the  body  and  re- 
mains a  fixture  to  inhabit  the  new  cells  as  they  are 
divided  into  accumulated  growth.  In  separating  from 
old  worn  out  cells  the  mental  body  does  not  miss  them, 
and  is  organically  fit  to  separate  and  subsist  in  its  own 
plane  finally  without  them,  as  it  certainly  must  do  in 
the  event  called  death. 

In  all  creative  development  Afferent  energy,  which 
is  the  involving,  is  supplied  from  without,  and  Efferent 
energy  expressing  outward,  provides  the  line  of  growth 


202  Chapter  XIII. 

to  any  and  all  characters,  from  the  within  to  the  without. 
Just  like  the  bud  unfolds  the  flower,  the  physical  form 
unfolds  the  mental  mind  and  out  of  the  mental  mind 
comes  the  Spiriutal  Man. 

There  is  one  thing  we  must  bear  in  mind,  and  that 
is  that  the  process  of  creation  is  still  going  on,  and  to  a 
degree  much  more  rapid  than  in  any  of  the  past  ages. 
But  we  are  lead  to  believe  that  all  we  see  in  creative 
growth  is  but  transformation.  In  other  words  that 
there  is  nothing  new  under  the  Sun.  We  are  not  willing 
to  accept  the  latter  idea  as  truth.  For  while  a  very 
large  portion  is  transformation ;  nevertheless  along  with 
the  transformation  is  always  to  be  found  a  constant 
stream  of  new  elements  of  creation. 

We  advance  the  idea  that  the  principles  of  nature  are 
an  endless  source  of  energy,  and  that  energy  in  making 
its  cycles  over  matter  from  plane  to  plane  suspends  a 
very  great  part  into  newly  created  substance  constantly, 
and  that  one  of  those  elements  is  mind  matter. 

A  simple  illustration  will  give  the  reader  a  clear  idea 
of  the  creative  process.  All  creation  builds  from  centers 
outward,  although  from  the  without  comes  the  energy, 
supply.  Take  for  illustration  a  cylinder,  puncture  it 
with  holes  and  revolve  it  upon  its  center;  in  doing  so 
this  sets  up  centrifugal  or  efferent  force,  and  whatever 
substance  might  be  in  connection  therewith — let  it  be 
water,  air,  ether  or  light — in  passing  out,  it  will  take 
on  form  and  character  from  the  holes  in  the  cylinder 
through  which  it  passes.  If  the  holes  be  round,  the 
stream  will  be  round.  If  square,  the  stream  will  be 
square,  or  any  other  shape  that  the  meshes  have  to  pat- 
tern the  stream. 

Sunlight  sends  into  space  a  constant  energy  flow, 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  203 

which  when  it  strikes  our  earth  surface  may  be  absorbed 
by  some  vegetable  plant,  wherein  it  is  enabled  to  set  in 
motion  water,  air  and  ether,  and  in  the  cycle  of  those 
elemental  vehicles,  character  formation  takes  place,  for 
the  reason  the  plant,  like  the  revolving  cylinder,  pours 
out  its  established  characteristics.  If  the  plant  happens 
to  be  a  rose,  there  will  be  developed  the  rose.  If  it  hap- 
pens to  be  a  grapevine,  it  would  produce  its  established 
character — the  grape.  If  it  happened  to  be  a  pumpkin 
vine,  the  light  energy  would  condense  into  a  pumpkin. 
And  thus  it  would  be  throughout  the  whole  category  of 
vegetable  formation,  including  the  animal  kingdom. 

There  is  water  in  the  pear,  the  apple,  as  well  as  all 
other  fruit  and  vegetable  products ;  there  is  also  air  and 
ether  there.  But  neither  air,  water,  nor  ether  contain 
elements  that  go  into  the  differentiated  constituents  that 
characterizes  each  product  to  itself. 

We  may  distill,  analyze,  compound  all  the  elements 
that  are  used  as  conveyors  or  vehicles  in  the  process  of 
constructive  energy  and  we  will  not  find  the  element 
that  will  produce  a  nut,  a  plum  or  even  as  much  as  a 
mustard  seed,  unless  we  send  the  energy  into  conden- 
sation over  character  lines  as  constructive  moulds  that 
must  first  be  established. 

Character  lines  are  invisible  tracks  over  which,  and 
through  which  Nature's  Invisible  Forces  are  ever  press- 
ing into  constructivity  every  element  and  thing  of  crea- 
tion from  the  plane  of  the  fungi,  to  that  of  the  intellec- 
tual and  Spiritual  Man. 

Before  we  proceed  further  with  the  subject  we  wish 
to  make  clear  the  fact  that  it  is  character,  embracing 
compound  combinations  that  we  are  dealing  with,  and 
not  life,  or  such  a  thing  as  life  form;  for  truly  speak- 


.204  Chapter  XIII. 

ing  Life  is  not  a  thing.  Life  is  a  principle  of  action. 
The  expression  of  a  consuming  force.  The  process  of 
consuming  energy  and  suspending  Energy  into  Matter, 
and  the  consuming  of  Matter  and  expending  matter  back 
to  Energy  again. 

Characters  or  type  expressions,  grow,  develop  and  pro- 
ject so  long  as  they  have  the  power  to  consume.  For 
when  consummation  and  digestion  take  place,  Energy 
is  the  result,  and  Energy  must  expend  its  force.  It 
must  move.  When  it  moves  over  a  resistance  it  leaves 
its  record,  and  compensation  is  the  establishment  of 
character  clothed  in  matter.  The  individual  is  but  a 
junction  unit  of  the  type  itself.  The  type  lines  project 
its  life  lines  through  the  union  of  the  individuals,  and 
the  individuals  are  the  fruit  of  the  type.  Each  indi- 
vidual is  a  unit  essense  of  the  type  it  represents.  Every- 
thing being  normal  it  is  characterized  up  to  the  highest 
achievement  of  the  last  generation.  In  other  words, 
every  individual  is  a  true  miniature  photograph  of  all 
the  entire  race  from  which  he  is  a  part.  Every  individual 
passes  over  the  line  of  development  that  was  traversed 
by  his  ancestry — through  the  Law  of  vib.ration.  Ee- 
generation  from  the  wake  to  the  sleep  states,  under  the 
process  from  the  dual  focal  projection  to  the  center  or 
intensified  seed  develops  and  completes  the  rounded  out 
individual  again. 

In  the  route  of  our  ancestry,  specific  lines  were  trav- 
eled, and  specific  character  established.  We  loose  neither 
the  one  nor  the  other,  for  both  lines  and  characters  ate 
projected  from  generation  to  generation.  The  lines, 
although  invisible,  are  never  broken  nor  are  they  ever 
abruptly  changed  to  other  type  expressions.  Neither  are 
the  characteristics  ever  lost,  though  they  continue  to 


Animal  to  Spiritual  Man.  205 

project  from  generation  to  generation  down  through  the 
ages.  Starting  from  their  primordial  cells,  or  molecules 
and  adding  new  and  larger  characteristics,  each  genera- 
tion, step  by  step,  from  the  amoeba,  Man  has  traveled 
down  through  the  ages,  to  our  present  state  of  develop- 
ment. Not  through  the  step  process  from  animal  to 
animal,  but  through  the  type  lines  of  his  own  character, 
gradually  established. 

Type  lines  are  lines  of  continuity — Energy  expending 
its  force  over  its  own  lines  as  lines  of  least  resistance — 
traced  throughout  Nature  everywhere,  and  what  is  true 
of  all  movements  and  things,  is  true  of  our  life  lines. 
The  Human  Type  Line  is  an  unbroken  line  from  the 
original  protoplasmic  condition,  to  the  present  stage 
of  evolution.  Inheritance  is  the  process  of  continuity  of 
character. '  Each  generation,  each  individual,  is  the  fruit 
of  the  type  of  which  he  is  a  part,  and  like  the  tree  of 
fruit,  inherits  the  full  compliment  of  character  and 
power — which  is  Nature's  power  of  continuity  of  Life. 

When  a  thing  of  character  once  comes  into  being,  it 
cannot  again  depart  into  the  absolute  from  which  it 
emerged,  but  must  develop  outward  toward  diversity, 
space  and  infinitude.  Science  has  eminently  settled  the 
question,  that  nothing  can  be  destroyed,  although  it  may 
be  dissolved  or  transposed  into  other  forms,  and  estab- 
lish its  power  of  resistance  into  new  forms  and  charac- 
ters. The  all  important  question  is,  to  have  the  power  to 
resist  change,  and  the  capacity  to  continue  to  consume, 
construct  and  maintain  an  organic  being. 

In  the  first  place  we  have  inherited  the  power  of  con- 
tinuity. But  the  lines  of  continuity  are  not  one  pro- 
petual  incarnation  in  the  physical  form ;  but  the  power 
to  construct  the  form,  use  it  for  a  time  and  through  it 


206  Chapter  XIII. 

project  its  surplus  Energy  into  a  new  generation  of  ten- 
fold multiplicity.  And  while  it  does  this,  in  order  to 
maintain  individual  continuity,  it  must  have  the  power 
and  capacity  to  forever  construct  its  combinations  from 
the  within,  and  in  spite  of  the  fact  that  it  must  shed  its 
physical  leaves  and  bark,  and  finally  the  whole  of  the 
grosser  physical  form,  but  that  in  the  meantime  it  shall 
have  been  able  to  construct  real  and  substantial  proper- 
ties as  planes  of  action  within,  like  worlds  within  worlds, 
rings  within  rings ;  so  that  in  shedding  off  the  outer  coil, 
does  not  determine  the  continuity  of  the  consummating 
and  energy  generating  forces  within.  For  so  long  as  the 
center  has  a  power  to  consume,  it  has  a  power  to  sustain, 
construct  and  maintain.  If  that  is  true,  and  all  Nature 
bespeaks  the  fact,  then  we  are  not  longer  interested  in 
a  physical  body  after  we  have  conceived  an  identical 
acting  and  projecting  center  of  conscious  being.  We  are 
interested  only  to  have  the  capacity  to  be  born  out  of 
our  own  physical  bodies  into  the  finer  and  more  real 
existence.  A  position  not  physically  tangible,  but  it, 
like  the  life  lines  of  inheritance  is  invisible,  but  endur- 
ing. Taking  the  view  of  the  Law  of  development  from 
a  primordial  center,  our  individual  life  has  its  beginning 
in  the  focal  junction  of  the  type  lines  expressed.  From 
this  infinitesimal  point,  we  individually  start  our  course 
of  individual  development.  Our  basic  self  is  the  primor- 
dial mind  given  us  through  our  parents — father  and 
mother — is  dual  conglomerate.  And  like  the  tree  of 
life  here  we  begin  our  career  to  construct  individual  con- 
sciousness. From  this  starting  point,  leach-like,  we  cling 
to  our  mother's  womb,  are  supplied  with  her  surplus 
energy  until  there  comes  a  time  when  we  cannot  longer 
be  sustained  by  this  supply.  We  demand  more,  and 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  207 

like  the  chick  developed  in  the  egg,  struggle  for  par- 
turition, and  express  our  natural  right  to  continuity 
by  struggling  for  a  greater  supply  of  food,  air  and 
light.  Thus  we  call  it  birth.  But  is  it  really  birth? 
Not  any  more  than  the  point  of  fecundation,  for  there 
is  where  the  real  individual  conies  into  being,  and  the 
event  we  are  so  accustomed  to  call  our  birth  into  in- 
dividual life,  is  really  the  second  individual  epoch  of 
our  being,  and  when  we  are  forced  to  depart  from  our 
final  physical  form,  in  what  we  call  death,  is  nature's 
greatest  effort  to  hatch  out  the  flower  of  the  individual 
consciousness  into  a  new  and  higher  plane. 

In  the  first  stages  known  as  our  foetal  life  we  sleep 
in  the  dual  parental  mind.  At  birth  the  individual  mind 
has  begun,  and  constructed  by  our  environments  and 
sense  preception,  thought  by  thought,  feebly  at  first^ 
but  stronger  and  stronger  as  the  individual  mind  grows, 
and  from  the  period  of  what  we  call  birth  to  the  event 
we  call  death,  we  think  one  thought  at  a  time,  and  main- 
tain over  ninety-nine  and  a  half  per  cent  of  our  con- 
sciousness in  the  sleep  state.  When  the  event  comes  we 
call  death,  all  consciousness  is  a  birth  out  of  the  physi- 
cal form. 

The  question  is,  have  we  the  power  and  capacity  to 
continue  active  organic  centers,  and  the  perception  of 
continuation  of  personal  awareness? 

If  we  are  to  be  governed  by  Nature's  Laws,  individ- 
uality begins  at  fecundation,  and  so  far  as  the  individual 
is  concerned,  inherits  continuity,  because  we  are  the 
fruit  of  a  type  line  continuity,  not  because  we  are  born 
and  developed  to  the  full  physical  being,  although  a  full 
rounded  out  physical  life  has  its  merits.  But  because 
we  are  the  fruit  of  the  thing  established.  The  principle 


208  Chapter  Xlll. 

of  individual  life  is  the  maintenance  of  its  primordial 
center — the  primary  mind  and  character.  If  each  indi- 
vidual had  to  depend  upon  his  own  power  and  capacity 
in  order  to  develop,  maintain  and  continue  personal 
power  of  individual  endurance  and  awareness,  there 
would  be  few  indeed  that  could  attain  it.  But  individ- 
uals are  not  separate  from  the  race,  they  are  a  part,  and 
each  of  us  have  an  individual  capacity,  because  we  are 
fruit  units  of  the  long  life  line  of  the  ages.  Hence 
we  are  dependent  for  our  present  individual  powers  and 
capacities,  while  our  destiny  is  within  our  own  hands. 

We  are  dependent  upon  the  past,  and  independent 
regarding  our  destiny.  The  great  question  then  is,  What 
shall  we  do  to  promote  the  building  of  the  Spiriutal 
Man?  And  what  powers  and  capacities  are  we  need- 
ing to  accomplish  the  desired  end  of  continued  personal 
awareness,  and  the  experiences  and  joys  that  continued 
individual  consciousness  bring? 

In  the  process  of  the  building  of  the  Spiritual  Man  we 
can  arrive  at  true  conclusions,  provided  we  use  basic 
premises.  There  is  no  question  about  continuity;  the 
only  question  is  the  power  to  continue  personal  aware- 
ness, and  what  is  necessary  to  promote  individual  or- 
ganized continuity. 

Mankind  has  had  a  material  conception  of  things.  As 
a  rule  it  has  regarded  itself  as  physical  being.  And 
what  was  known  of  the  inner  Man  was  but  a  vague  idea. 
Mankind  has  not  taken  into  account  that  the  indwelling 
organized  consciousness  has  all  along  been  the  real, 
and  that  the  physical  form,  while  having  served  as  a 
vehicle  to  express  and  evolve  the  Spiritual  Man,  is 
builded  in  conformity  to  the  requirements  of  the  desires 
from  within.  It  is  true  that  the  beginning  was  auto- 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  209 

matic'and  remains  automatic  in  its  development  until 
the  arbritrary  mind  becomes  developed  within,  and  that 
where  the  arbitrary  mind  begins  to  assert  desire,  new 
and  larger  steps  of  evolutionary  progress  are  made. 

The  physical  form  while  the  most  tangible  is  the 
least  permanent.  And  truly  speaking  the  inner  man  is 
also  physical,  although  we  do  not  always  call  it  so 
because  of  its  intensified  fineness.  But  matter  in  its 
completeness  reaches  back  to  force,  and  where  one  begins 
the  other  ends.  The  point  most  apparent  is  that  within 
the  organism  of  the  individual  man,  which  is  both  matter 
and  force,  and  the  finer  the  matter  the  nearer  the 
approach  to  force,  and  in  like  manner  a  condition  less 
susceptible  to  change  and  decomposition.  The  molecules 
of  the  physical  body  are  constantly  being  broken  down 
and  cast  off.  While  the  mind  or  Soul  within  remains 
fixed  in  its  memory,  changing  only  by  growth  and  has 
a  capacity  we  call  mental  force. 

It  is  due  to  the  mental  force  that  the  physical  form  is 
constructed  to  meet  requirements.  The  effort  of  the 
mind  to  accomplish  anything  sets  in  motion  the  power 
to  attain  the  result.  A  movement  to  accomplish  a  de- 
sired end  sets  in  motion  mental  lines  and  also  stimulates 
muscles  to  action  and  development.  While  this  subtle 
force  is  at  work  to  accomplish  a  desired  end  in  the  effort 
of  the  individual,  its  surplus  energy  is  projected  into  the 
seed  of  re-generation  and  it  there  comes  out  more  fully 
expressed  than  that  of  the  effort  effecting  the  construc- 
tion of  the  powers  and  capacities  of  the  individual  ex- 
pressing it.  Where  the  mind  has  the  power  through  the 
function  of  desire  to  build  a  muscle  and  extend  its  sur- 
plus force  into  re-generations,  it  also  has  the  power  to 
extend  by  use  the  capacity  of  the  mind  itself  within  the 


210  Chapter  XIII. 

individual,  and  also  the  power  to  project  a  higher 
function  and  power  into  the  re-generation  that  follows. 
It  is  reminded  that  in  a  former  chapter  we  stated 
that  not  all  of  energy  is  transposed  to  matter  in  a  single 
cycle,  and  not  all  of  matter  in  one  cycle  is  transposed  to 
energy.  There  is  always  a  waste  in  the  process,  so  that 
the  desire  of  the  mother  to  develop  her  talents,  develops 
the  talents  of  her  offspring. 

It  is  not  necessary  that  the  person  desiring  to  accom- 
plish a  thing  shall  know  just  how  to  direct  the  forces, 
for  the  reason  that  the  desire  made  and  the  effort  ex- 
pended always  constructs  the  powers  and  capacities  in 
the  line  directed  whether  known  or  not.  It  is  not  oper- 
ated by  outline,  scheme  or  design,  but  by  Nature's  inv 
mutable  forces  of  establishing  lines  of  action  and  con- 
formity of  process.  We  are  accustomed  to  look  upon 
everything  from  our  own  view  point.  That  we  first  plan, 
then  move  to  conform.  This  we  call  human  intelligence 
and  its  proper  uses  we  call  wisdom.  But  it  is  different 
with  the  universal  intelligence,  for  that  is  an  immutable 
intellect  that  does  not  require  thought,  nor  change  of 
viewpoint,  for  within  the  realms  of  Nature  all  things 
become  normal  in  time,  when  brought  into  conformity 
through  gradual  process.  What  is  poison  to  one  genera- 
tion, if  its  use  be  persisted  in  becomes  food  supply  in 
generations  that  follow.  In  this  way  whatever  one  gen- 
eration sets  out  to  accomplish  is  normally  attained  in  the 
generations  thereafter. 

The  food  supply  has  had  much  to  do  with  the  develop- 
ment of  type  expressions.  The  climate  plays  its  part, 
which  is  plainly  seen  in  the  furs  of  animals.  A  cold 
climate  produces  finer  skin  pores  and  in  a  like  measure 
finer  fur.  Man  did  not  develop  fur  to  cover  his  body, 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  211 

and  in  order  to  survive  he  had  to  follow  the  climatic 
conditions  suiting  his  development.  The  result  was  to 
subsist  upon  products  that  such  a  climate  would  produce. 
In  the  case  of  giraffes  feeding  upon  branches  of  trees,  and 
reaching  high  up  for  their  food  supply,  the  scarcer  the 
branches  became  the  higher  the  animal  would  have  to 
reach,  and  the  desire  constantly  expressing  itself  to  reach 
the  higher  leaf,  expended  its  force  in  utilizing  and  de- 
veloping longer  necks,  and  longer  legs  upon  the  indivi- 
dual animals  and  unconsciously  the  process  constructed 
longer  necks  and  longer  legs  upon  the  offspring. 

The  crane  is  also  a  fair  example  of  how  the  law  of 
development  works.  This  bird  took  to  feeding  on  fish. 
It  would  secure  its  food  by  standing  along  the  shores  and 
watching  for  its  prey,  the  coming  fish.  It  learned  to  stand 
very  still,  and  when  necessary  to  move  about  to  do  so 
with  the  greatest  ease  and  quietude,  lest  it  disturb  the 
fish.  Not  that  it  knew  the  fish  would  be  frightened 
away,  because  it  was  not  a  development  of  intellect,  but 
because  the  crane  that  did  not  use  precaution  got  less 
fish  and  could  not  survive  in  life,  while  the  crane  that 
did  use  care  progressed  under  the  process  of  successful 
supply  and  lived  to  see  his  offspring  survive,  coming 
forth  with  long  slim  legs  for  deeper  wading  and  an  in- 
herited patience  for  quietude.  It  was  not  a  method  of 
intellectual  accomplishment,  but  was  the  work  of  the 
function  of  desire,  to  satisfy  hunger  expressed  by  Na- 
ture's process. 

In  the  case  of  man  he  had  to  secure  his  food  supply 
by  climbing  trees  for  fruits  and  nuts,  as  well  as  defend 
himself  against  the  common  enemy.  So  the  climbing  of 
trees  developed  his  hands,  and  with  development  the 
hand  became  a  feeler  as  well.  His  desire  for  fruits  and 


212  Chapter  XIII. 

nuts  alone  did  not  suffice,  so  he  developed  curiosity  to 
search  in  various  lines  through  the  process  of  feeling, 
and  as  curiosity  was  never  satisfied  until  desire  was  sup- 
plied, the  function  of  curiosity  took  its  place  side  by 
side  with  that  of  desire,  and  from  thence  on  the  mind 
of  Man  expanded.  Other  animals  used  hands  too,  and 
also  developed  desire,  such  is  the  case  of  the  ape  and 
monkey  type.  But  in  the  latter  the  characteristics  of 
re-generation  was  cut  out  to  a  great  extent  because  of 
the  fact  that  the  process  of  curiosity  with  the  short  lived 
animals  did  not  enable  the  life  line  of  the  monkey  type 
to  transpose  a  primary  mind  of  educational  capacity ;  for 
in  the  case  of  the  monkey  it  is  but  two  to  four  years, 
while  that  of  man  runs  from  20  to  50  years. 

There  is  little  or  no  curiosity  in  other  animals,  prob- 
ably for  the  reason  that  their  sense  of  feeling  was  in  the 
nose  instead  of  the  paw  or  hand.  The  result  was,  and 
still  is,  to  a  great  degree,  to  leave  the  curiosity  unsatis- 
fied, because  of  timidity  and  fear.  It  was  a  case  of  ex- 
posure to  put  the  head  and  nose  too  close  to  unaccus- 
tomed things,  while  if  they  could  have  found  satisfaction 
in  the  use  of  the  paw,  or  hand,  the  risk  would  be  at  a 
minimum.  But  Nature  provided  them  according  to  their 
own  particular  line  of  condition  and  power  of  subsist- 
ence; they  did  not  develop  the  safe  and  easy  method  of 
feeling,  nor  function  of  curiosity.  Without  the  function 
of  curiosity,  the  mind  is  left  in  contentment,  and  con- 
tentment means  mental  inertia. 

If  Man,  like  the  birds  or  animals,  could  have  clothed 
himself  with  feathers  or  wool,  he  would  be  content  to 
just  live,  but  it  so  happens  he  was  created  the  most 
naked  of  all  creation  and  the  most  helpless  in  his  aborig- 
inal origin.  Along  with  mental  activity  came  cunning 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  213 

and  cruelty.  And  as  the  animal  man,  he  was  the  most 
cruel  and  savage  expression  in  organic  life.  He  was 
never  known  to  be  content  with  his  pre-historic  existence, 
and  only  tentatively  so  now.  His  very  existence  on  earth 
today  depends  not  upon  his  generosity,  one  for  the  other, 
but  because  of  the  protective  influence  of  seas  and 
islands.  For  it  is  prone  in  him  to  annihilate  all  else 
but  his  own  tribe,  and  the  probability  is  there  has  been 
untold  numbers  of  aboriginal  races  of  man  obliterated 
from  the  face  of  the  earth,  for  time  after  time  the 
yellow  race  came  near  annihilating  the  white  man. 

The  question  might  arise :  Are  we  not  all  offspring  of 
a  single  pair  ?  The  answer  is,  No  !  Absolutely,  No ! ! 
Every  expression  of  organic  life  comes  into  existence  be- 
cause of  a  condition,  and  while  we  are  all  relative  in  the 
sense  that  we  are  all  products  of  the  same  universal  laws 
and  principles,  we  are  not  beings  of  the  same  type  lines, 
even  though  we  are  so  closely  allied  in  character  as  to 
form  a  union  in  re-generation. 

To  come  back  to  the  subject  concerning  the  cruelty  of 
man.  His  utter  helplessness  and  his  unceasing  struggle 
for  existence  against  his  common  enemy,  for  ages  kept 
him  in  constant  mental  agitation.  This  struggle  devel- 
oped the  mind  as  it  always  does,  yet  there  were  moments 
when  he  saw  the  light  of  contentment.  It  had  the  effect 
to  stimulate  desire  for  better  conditions.  He  learned 
that  there  was  something  to  be  desired  outside  of  just  the 
simple  food  supply.  It  was  the  comforts  of  protection, 
and  he  gradually  made  the  effort  to  clothe  and  shelter 
his  body.  He  learned  to  live.  He  began  to  know  he 
lived,  and  in  a  degree  felt  a  responsibility.  Here  is 
where  the  embryotic  spark  of  the  moral  law  came  into 
the  race,  and  at  this  point  began  the  Adamic  Man. 


214  Chapter  XIII. 

Events  come  and  go,  and  Man  for  probably  three 
hundred  thousand  years  lived,  struggled  and  fought  each 
other.  Step  by  step  he  developed  a  higher  mental  power. 
First  he  communed  by  gestures  and  ordinary  sounds, 
then  he  invented  words  and  symbols,  and  as  each  word 
was  invented  it  had  the  effect  to  increase  his  sense  of 
reason.  He  had  moments  of  pleasure  between  his  strifes. 
He  saw  daylight  grow  out  of  darkness,  happiness  and 
contentment  out  of  misery.  Life  became  sweeter  and 
dearer  to  him.  He  desired  to  live  for  the  good-  he  saw 
in  life.  He  at  last  knew  there  was  something  in  life  to 
be  desired.  He  knew  he  lived,  and  he  desired  to  continue 
to  live,  and  the  desire  to  live  produced  the  capacity  in 
conformity  with  Nature's  process  in  constructing  the 
mental  combination,  the  mental  body  with  the  capacity 
of  consuming,  and  with  the  consuming  develop  a  mental 
energy  embracing  the  capacity  of  maintaining  an  exist- 
ence outliving  its  connection  with  the  physical  body,  that 
it,  in  former  generations,  had  constructed  to  the  re- 
quirements of  conditions  and  expressed  desires. 

In  the  case  of  the  giraffe,  its  physical  body  was  de- 
veloped and  constructed  to  meet  the  demands  of  the 
mind,  although  the  giraffe  did  not  conspicuously  know  it. 
His  mind  was  only  bent  on  accomplishment.  The  same 
is  true  with  the  building  of  the  spiritual  man.  He  de- 
sired to  live,  and  to  continue  to  live,  but  knew  nothing 
of  a  spiritual  condition,  or  spirituality.  His  whole  mind 
was  fixed  upon  his  physical  being.  He  could  think  of 
nothing  his  eyes  could  not  see,  or  his  other  sense  organs 
cognize,  notwithstanding,  he  enjoyed  life  and  wished 
constantly  to  prolong  it.  Death  was  a  horror  to  him. 
His  desires  were  evolved  and  continued  active  and  his 
fear  of  death  kept  the  desire  keen  and  alert.  When  death 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  215 

did  cut  off  his  earthly  career  he  still  entertained  hope 
that  his  body  might  be  resurrected  and  that  he  could 
renew  a  life  of  activity  again.  Little  did  he  know  that 
his  desire  to  live  was  all  the  while  constructing  the  con- 
scious and  mental  powers  to  do  so.  And  why  not,  since 
the  desire  of  the  giraffe  to  reach  the  highest  twig  to 
satisfy  hunger  of  the  stomach,  constructed  for  him  the 
long  neck  and  long  legs,  and  it  was  unconscious  desire 
that  did  it.  How  much  more  ought  the  evolutionary 
law  construct  the  mind  in  capacity  for  a  continuity  of 
life  when  the  mind  consciously  directs  its  energies  to 
establish  the  motive  of  its  desire  with  the  direct  object 
constantly  in  view. 

Let  us  presume  for  a  moment  that  there  is  no  evidence 
of  a  continuity  of  life,  and  let  us  take  for  granted  that 
the  grave  is  the  goal  and  resting  place  of  every  mortal, 
and  that  we  stand  face  to  face  with  the  fate  that  awaits 
us.  And  what  is  Nature's  answer?  The  answer  is  what- 
ever the  arbitrary  mind  constantly  applies  in  time,  be- 
comes the  law  of  life.  In  other  words  it  takes  root  and 
lives.  Nature's  process  is  construct! vity,  multiplicity 
and  diversity.  And  its  ultimate  results  are  limitless. 
When  it  has  the  power  and  capacity  to  bring  into  ex- 
istence a  type  line  and  regenerate  it  down  through  the 
ages,  it  has  the  same  power  and  capacity  to  create  within 
the  individual  a  type  of  the  same  power  and  capacity. 
And  this  is  just  what  it  does.  Though  energy  produces 
invisible  but  enduring  lines,  and  lines  established  is  al- 
ways followed  as  tracks  by  energy  thereafter.  All  great 
things  started  from  an  infinitesimal  point  or  center  and 
automatically  increased  both  in  quantity,  quality  and 
momentum,  as  they  roll  on  through  time.  The  one  thing 
we  must  bear  in  mind  is  that  what  constitutes  continuity 


216  Chapter  XIII. 

of  life,  it-  not  life  itself,  but  organic  being,  and  its  con- 
tinuity is  not  a  question  of  life  but  a  question  of  main- 
taining a  consuming  power.  Awareness  does  not  depend 
upon  the  physical  body  for  its  perception,  although  it 
primarily  was  dependent  for  mind  perception  and  mind 
power  now  depends  upon  mental  organism  and  its  con- 
tinual composition  and  growth  depends  upon  consuming 
the  elements  of  thought. 

We  are  taught  that  from  the  spiritual  we  came,  and 
to  the  spiritual  we  must  go.  That  is  true,  but  not  in  the 
sense  commonly  interpreted.  Our  spirituality  is  born 
out  of  our  parental  spirituality  and  with  each  generation 
the  spiritual  or  spiritual  man  develops  union,  two  in  one, 
or  duality.  That  is  to  say,  the  spiritual  effort  of  two 
parents  centers  in  each  of  us,  and  if  we  are  not  more 
spiritual  thereby,  we  ought  to  be,  and  there  is  something 
wrong  if  we  are  not. 

Humanity  is  an  outgrowth  from  the  Animal  Man.  It 
is  the  extensive  and  widening  of  characteristics  to  the 
moral,  educational  and  spiritual  Man.  We,  like  the 
flower,  first  put  forth  root,  stem  and  branches,  then  fo- 
liage, perfume  and  fruit. 

Plant  fruitage  is  a  continuity  of  the  life  line.  In  the 
lower  plants  the  root,  stem  and  branch  cease  to  con- 
tinue further  as  plants  when  they  condense  their  energy 
into  the  seed.  But  in  the  higher  vegetable  growth  the 
individual,  tree  sends  forth  its  seed  while  retaining  con- 
tinuation of  conscious  growth  in  its  individual  self.  We 
therefore  know  of  the  continuation  of  the  life  lines  of 
every  specie  or  character.  The  only  question  that  rises  is, 
does  the  individual  maintain  mental  organization  and 
continued  self  consciousness  ?  The  answer  is,  Yes !  We 
have  outlived  our  primordial  cells  or  molecules,  have 


Animal  to   Spiritual   Man.  217 

outlived  our  forms  of  foetal  life,  our  childhood  and  the 
continuous  reconstructed  form  that  followed,  yet  we 
never  lose  our  marks,  scars,  character  or  memory.  Parts 
of  the  physical  form,  even  extending  to  some  of  the  vital 
organs,  may  be  separated  without  effecting  the  mental 
organization.  There  are  some  animal  species  in  existence, 
or  rather  have  been  in  existence,  that  were  able  to  sep- 
arate their  physical  body  at  will.  We  have  in  mind  the 
joint  snake  in  particular  which  grows  one  joint  each 
year  of  its  life.  The  head  and  body  proper  begin  when 
hatched  from  the  egg.  Then  each'  season  thereafter  it 
grows  another  extension,  which  can  be  separated  without 
vital  effect,  and  again  assemble  to  its  normal  condition. 

In  summing  up  the  combination  of  the  individual  man 
he  is  found  to  be  a  prototype  of  his  race.  First  he  sub- 
sists upon  that  from  which  he  was  created,  namely  vege- 
tation, either  by  consuming  vegetation  itself  or  by  con- 
suming the  animals  that  have  consumed  vegetation. 
What  he  now  physically  subsists  upon  is  what  proves 
to  be  the  base  substance  of  his  primordial  origin. 

By  virtue  of  the  Law  of  Affinity,  protoplasm,  or  di- 
gested vegetation,  became  the  fruitage  source  of  his 
amoebaic  life  and  his  physical  body  continues  to  be 
constructed  by  that  process. 

From  the  formation  of  amoebaic  animalcules  ring 
clusters  were  organized  and  united,  and  by  extending 
in  lengths,  the  rings  became  tubes,  taking  in  their  food 
supply  at  one  end  or  the  other,  one  of  which  assumed 
the  head.  And  the  physical  body  still  remains  a  tube. 

Tube  formation  taking  in  its  food  supply  from  its 
open  end,  consumed  all,  and  eliminated  that  which  was 
unfit  in  a  manner  to  set  in  motion  digestive  organs, 
eliminating  pores  and  discharging  apparatus.  The  open 


218  Chapter  XIII. 

end  being  the  receiving  end  to  supply  hunger,  in  the 
long  ages  it  had  to  exist,  constantly  butted  its  open  end 
into  roots  and  rocks  until  it  was  finally  battered  into  a 
head.  And  we  find  that  it  is  the  knocks  and  bumps 
that  we  receive  today  that  still  hardens  our  heads  and 
gives  strength  and  endurance. 

All  tube  life  was  dependent  wholly  upon  organized 
amoebaic  rings.  But  when  the  development  went  far 
enough  to  produce  the  cartilage  and  hinge,  in  the  evolu- 
tion of  the  spine  the  union  of  forces,  or  principle  of 
flower  life  took  place.  This  was  the  turning  point 
wherein  organic  man  was  enabled  to  project  his  energies 
into  another  sphere  or  plane  of  action.  That  of  union 
and  seed  state.  Not  suddenly  and  abruptly,  but  by  a 
slow,  tedious  process  for  ages.  For  in  animal  life,  like 
that  of  vegetable  life,  the  flowers  co-mingled  in  beauty, 
joy  and  harmony  for  ages  before  the  intermingling  could 
unite  a  projecting  force  to  that  of  re-generation.  In  the 
vegetable  kingdom  the  generative  function  is  still  in 
vogue.  The  tree  can  be  grown  both  from  branch  or 
seed. 

Moving  organic  characters,  in  order  to  get  about, 
had  to  construct  factors  of  locomotion.  There  were  but 
three  ways  to  do  this,  which  was  to  roll,  walk  or  hop. 
The  roll  process  is  used  in  the  gross  material  world.  The 
first  method  of  walking  is  the  worming  crawl,  or  the 
hop  as  is  practiced  by  some  birds  and  the  kangaroo.  At 
any  rate  the  vertebrate  generally  cultivated  four  limbs 
because  a  crawl  or  worming  movement  cannot  be  con- 
verted into  a  walking  movement  without  at  least  a  four 
point  contact. 

Aboriginal  man  moved  about  on  four  limbs.  His 
digestive  organs  became  accustomed  to  food  supply 


Animal   to   Spiritual   Man.  219 

furnished  by  the  trees.  He  learned  to  gaze  upward.  He 
gradually  arose  to  satisfy  mental  desire.  His  front  feet 
are  developed  into  hands.  In  climbing  trees  he  used 
them  constantly;  they  become  his  tools  of  defense,  and 
after  ages  he  arose  to  his  feet  to  finally  walk  erect.  At 
first,  probably  like  the  child  learning  to  walk,  he  reached 
from  object  to  object  until  his  confidence  was  supported 
by  his  capacity  to  continue  that  method  of  walking  a 
custom. 

Along  with  the  hardened  head  and  vertebra  came 
the  brain  and  nervous  system.  Man  is  also  a  quadruped. 
From  thence  on  the  hand  and  brain  developed  and 
worked  together,  as  they  do  today.  And  here  begins 
the  dawn  of  the  Adamic  Man. 

From  the  Adamic  Man  the  real  mental  struggle  be- 
gan. He  began  to  see  glimpses  of  moral  perception.  The 
germ  of  hope,  aspiration  and  desire  had  taken  root,  and 
the  animal  mind  widened  out  toward  a  human  aspect. 
He  began  to  feel  a  sense  of  right  and  wrong.  But  there 
was  still  a  wide  gulf  between  him  and  the  intellectual 
man,  which  for  ages — not  less  than  300,000  years — has 
struggled  for  food,  shelter  and  raiment. 

The  gulf  has  been  one  of  cunning,  greed,  treachery, 
savagry  and  barbarism.  Through  all  this  man  has  had 
to  come  before  he  could  reach  the  stage  of  intellectuality. 
The  value  of  anything  depends  upon  the  effort  required 
to  produce  it.  We  appreciate  happiness  by  the  misery 
we  have  experienced.  Our  joys  are  measured  by  the 
sorrows  we  know.  We  appreciate  the  light  when  we 
have  seen  the  darkness. 

The  mind  like  every  other  thing  is  strengthened  by 
struggle  and  effort.  Its  struggle  develops  the  capacity 
of  endurance.  The  human  mind  for  ages  has  sent  forth 


220  Chapter  XIII. 

an  untiring  effort  for  continuity  of  life — continuity  of 
consciousness.  We  know  that  the  desire  of  mind  can 
construct  the  physical  form  in  keeping  with  its  demand, 
and  also  know  that  the  mental  form  serves  as  a  matrix 
upon  which  the  physical  is  constructed.  Since  this  is 
true,  it  is  clearly  within  the  province  of  the  mind  to 
construct  its  own  form  and  capacity  within  the  scope 
of  its  own  functions  and  desires,  the  capacity  of  per- 
petual consciousness. 


CHAPTER  XIV. 
FUNCTIONS  OF  THE  HUMAN  MIND. 

The  individual  human  mind  is  a  unique  and  extremely 
intensified  combination.  It  is  an  organization  having 
departments  and  form.  In  fact  so  far  as  we  know  it  is 
the  most  elaborate  manifestation  evolved  out  of  the  con- 
structive forces  of  Nature. 

The  mind  is  not  a  principle,  but  a  combination,  hav- 
ing functional  capacities,  and  is  susceptible  to  growth 
and  arbitrary  powers.  Therefore  it  is  a  thing  of  form— 
a  body — hence  we  call  it  the  mental  body. 

It  also  is  a  thing  of  dimension;  having  a  center  and 
a  circumference. 

It  is  a  thing  of  action  and  a  thing  of  silence.  Its 
abode  is  in  all  the  spheres.  The  imagination  is  very 
active  and  far-reaching,  while  the  memory  is  silent  and 
fixed. 

Being  a  thing  of  silent  fixity  is  a  material  substance. 
Like  the  perfume  of  the  rose,  though  exceeding  fine,  it 
is  nevertheless  matter. 

The  mind  belongs  in  the  catagory  of  creation,  although 
in  its  developed  state  becomes  a  creator  itself.  At  first 
it  is  automatic,  but  winds  up  at  maturity  with  arbitrary 
power. 

Because  all  matter  bears  the  record  of  its  creation,  and 
maintains  its  every  characteristic  in  its  fixed  qualities, 
many  intellectual  people  assert  that  this  is  due  to  the 
fact  that  all  is  mind.  But  when  they  make  that  state- 
ment, they  do  so  without  thinking.  For  mind  has  char- 
acter and  record  just  as  everything  else  has. 


222  Chapter  XIV. 

But  the  mind  is  more  than  character  and  record. 
Basic  matter  has  one  of  the  functions  of  the  human 
mind ;  that  function  is  memory.  Beginning  in  basic 
matter  and  going  upward  through  the  vegetable  and 
animal  kingdoms.,  there  is  a  state  of  consciousness.  Very 
little  is  expressed  at  first,,  but  always  with  a  higher  and 
higher  degree,  which  also  is  a  function  of  mind,  but 
here  it  stops. 

There  are  six  grand  functions  of  the  human  mind, 
namely: — Memory,  Consciousness,  Will,  Reason,  Self 
Consciousness,  and  Imagination.  The  six  grand  func- 
tions are  subdivided,  into  about  ninety-odd  minor  func- 
tions. In  fact  as  many  as  there  are  elements  in  the 
material  universe  of  solidified  matter. 

The  first  grand  function  of  the  mind  is  Memory,  but 
though  a  basic  function  of  mind,  is  not  properly  ex- 
clusive of  mind.  It  is  found  in  everything.  In  fact  it 
is  Nature's  inertia;  the  Soul  Principle  of  all  creation. 
Memory  not  only  records  every  motion  of  energy  ex- 
pended, but  it  records,  environs  and  maintains  character, 
with  every  thought  and  action  into  a  formation  as  the 
basic  part  of  the  individual  Soul. 

Will  is  the  function  of  consent  that  may  reverse  its 
expression  to  that  of  a  negative  (will  not)  and  is  the 
first  appearance  of  an  arbitrary  power  within  the  realm 
of  Nature.  Will  is  a  development  through  the  law  of 
vibration,  wherein  it  at  first  finds  modes  of  expression 
through  the  Law  of  Affinity,  as  expressed  by  attraction 
and  repulsion,  effecting  things  with  harmony  on  the  one 
hand  and  discord  on  the  other,  between  which  the  vibrat- 
ing energy  plays,  until  the  consciousness  develops  to  a 
point  of  dictation,  and  while  consciousness  still  remains 
a  factor,  the  will  develops  into  being,  and  herein  lies  the 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  223 

first  fruit  or  distinctive  impulse  or  function  of  mind 
proper.  The  reason  we  state  that  Will  is  the  first  dis- 
tinction of  mind,  is  because  memory  and  consciousness, 
while  the  principle  factors  of  the  mind,  are  not  in  any 
sense  confined  to  mind,  but  are  to  be  found  as  common 
factors  in  everything. 

Will  is  the  most  highly  developed  in  man,  still  it  is 
not  an  exclusive  function  with  the  mind  of  man,  for  we 
find  it  expressed  all  the  way  down  the  animal  kingdom. 
The  higher  types  of  animals  have  an  expression  of  Will, 
and  make  their  choice  of  movements  along  the  line  of 
mental  directivity,  and  this  continues  all  the  way  down 
until  it  loses  its  function  in  the  environment  of  autom- 
atism, exemplified  in  the  movements  of  the  angle 
worm,  or  the  Amoeba,  which  moves  to  satisfy  hunger 
by  being  attracted  toward  that  which  will  satisfy  hunger, 
and  to  be  repelled  when  supply  is  attained.  A  step  fur- 
ther down  the  scale  of  development  and  we  reach  the 
vegetable  types  that  feed  upon  animal  forms,  known  as 
the  carnivorous  plants,  and  from  the  carnivorous  plants 
to  that  of  the  sensitive  plants,  that  are  not  attracted  to 
any  other  thing,  but  are  repelled  when  they  are  in  any 
way  in  contact  with  animated  forms  wherein  they  mani- 
fest a  degree  of  Will  in  expressing  self  preservation. 

The  higher  aspect  of  Will  reaches  a  stage  of  arbitrary 
directivity,  but  is  not  to  be  found  in  Nature  outside  of 
the  mental  world,  not  excepting  the  universal  intelli- 
gence which  acts  only  from  the  source  of  the  funda- 
mental and  cosmic. 

Where  the  Will  is  the  highest  function  of  the  mind, 
it  cannot  be  said  that  such  mind  possesses  the  quality 
of  equity  or  justice,  but  is  rather  the  element  that  moves 
to  satisfy  greed  and  personal  selfishness.  The  Will 


224:  Chapter  XIV. 

therefore  knows  no  feeling  for  others  and  does  not  in 
the  least  show  a  sense  of  relationship  to  that  human 
expression,  the  moral  law.  The  person  who  has  no 
greater  function  than  Will  has  not  attained  the  state 
of  moral  development,  or  could  he  in  any  sense  become 
cognizant  of  the  Spiritual  Man ;  the  line  of  destiny  lies 
before  him. 

The  function  of  Will  must  necessarily  play  between 
harmony  and  discord,  pain  and  pleasure,  for  ages  and 
generations  before  the  consciousness  can  develop  the 
capacity  to  send  forth  the  germ  of  a  new  and  higher 
function — that  of  Reason. 

Reason  is  purely  a  property,  as  well  as  the  highest 
function  of  the  individual  mind.  We  can  trace  Reason 
down  through  the  type  of  man  and  into  that  of  the 
higher  animals,  until  it  ceases  to  exist  entirely.  And 
when  Reason  fades  out,  along  with  it  goes  every  trace 
of  the  moral  law.  We  have  been  taught  that  Man  is  the 
only  being  that  possesses  an  independent  Will,  and  that 
to  man  alone  is  confined  the  moral  law.  Yet  it  is  easy 
to  trace  Will  down  into  the  animal  kingdom,  as  well  as 
along  with  it,  traces  of  the  moral  law.  We  notice  the 
stubbornness  of  some  animals  and  the  moral  strain  in 
others  when  they  express  a  sense  of  embarrassment  or 
shame. 

The  Will  is  an  important  function  of  the  mind,  but 
when  Reason  becomes  enthroned  as  a  directing  factor, 
a  rapid  process  of  a  higher  development  follows.  Rea- 
son is  the  highest  moral  function  and  purely  a  property 
of  mind.  With  Reason  enthroned  Man  becomes  the 
arch  type  of  Creation  with  unlimited  possibilities. 

Reason  is  the  directive  agency  of  the  function  of 
Desire,  the  greatest  function  of  mental  development,  the 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  225 

arbiter  of  the  moral  law.  It  is  the  fountain  head  of  the 
Spiritual  Man. 

Side  by  side  and  in  unison  with  Reason  the  function 
of  Awareness,  or  self  consciousness,  is  developed  in  Man, 
and  to  man  alone  does  this  new  function  become  a 
source  of  mental  directivity.  Self  consciousness  is  the 
source  of  many  of  the  preliminary  functions  of  the  mind, 
which  we  shall  hereafter  mention.  In  itself  it  becomes 
and  is  the  germ  of  Desire  for  a  continuity  of  life.  And 
to  it  more  than  any  other  source  is  due  to  a  mental, 
moral  and  spiritual  development. 

Imagination  is  the  most  active  function  of  the  mind 
and  is  the  forager  and  garnerer  of  mental  conceptions. 
It  is  not  limited  in  its  action,  like  that  of  Will  and 
Reason,  and  is  the  direct  opposite  function  to  that  of 
Memory.  Imagination  is  mental  activity.  While 
Memory  is  mental  silence.  One  is  a  generator,  the  other 
a  receiver  and  retainer.  Imagination  moves,  Memory 
does  not  move.  A  thing  that  moves  occupies  greater 
space  than  a  thing  that  does  not  move.  One  must  there- 
fore occupy  space  while  the  other  occupies  a  circum- 
scribed center.  Thus  a  thing  having  a  center  and  a  cir- 
cumference, has  form,  and  a  thing  of  form,  is  a  thing 
of  materiality,  which  in  its  very  nature  must  have  a  body 
though  its  component  parts  are  matter  of  exceeding  fine- 
ness. Properly  speaking  it  is  our  Mental  Body — the  in- 
dwelling Soul. 

The  Mental  Body  has  a  combination  composed  of  six 
grand  functions.  It  is  like  that  of  the  physical  body,  a 
grand  complication,  and  like  the  physical  body  is  con- 
structed and  maintained  by  the  power  of  consuming.  In 
the  case  of  the  physical  body  it  is  constructed  and  main- 
tained by  consuming  solid  food,  water,  air,  ether,  etc., 


226  Chapter  XIV. 

and  from  the  consuming  of  these  elements,  which 
through  the  process  of  digestion  are  transposed  to  energy, 
which  in  turn  is  suspended  to  matter  of  the  component 
parts  of  the  physical  body.  The  same  process  takes  place 
in  constructing  the  component  parts  of  the  mental  body. 
The  energy  that  the  mental  body  consumes  is  suspended 
to  the  construction  of  the  mental  functions,  thence  the 
functions  construct  the  mind  proper.  Imagination 
gathers  the  thought  energy,  Reason  digests  the  thought 
energy  which  is  conveyed  over  it  in  word  formation,  and 
then  suspends  its  force  into  the  sleep  state  of  the  mind- 
Memory.  So  it  will  be  seen  that  mental  energy  builds 
mental  forms.  Differing  in  fineness  as  they  differ  in 
planes  of  existence.  In  other  words,  thinking  is  the 
process  of  constructing  the  mind.  The  mind  itself  is 
a  combination — a  storage  of  recorded  events.  While  the 
functions  of  the  mind  are  refined  it  is  a  gigantic  mech- 
anism, composing  the  six  grand  functions  and  some 
eighty  odd  allied  functions,  some  of  which  are  construc- 
tive and  others  destructive. 

In  the  following  exhibits,  1,  2,  3,  and  4,  we  outline 
most  of  the  mental  factors  of  the  mind,  arranged  in  their 
order  of  importance. 

THE  HUMAN  MIND. 

Exhibit  1. — Grand  Functions  of  the  Human  Mind: 
Consciousness,  Imagination,  Will,  Reason,  Self  Aware- 
ness, Memory. 

Exhibit  2. — Constructive  Functions  of  the  Human 
Mind. — Apetite,  Curiosity,  Intuition,  Aspiration,  Hope, 
Faith,  Impulse,  Patience,  Cunning,  Greed,  Courage, 
Kindness,  Courtesy,  Compassion,  Sorrow,  Pity,  Sym- 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  227 

pathy,  Reverence,  Discretion,  Honor,  Personal  Respon- 
sibility, Moral  Accountability,  Desire,  Love. 

Exhibit  3. — Destructive  Functions  of  the  Human 
Mind :  Anger,  Revenge,  Hate,  Envy,  Animosity,  Bitter- 
ness, Impatience,  Mistrust,  Fanaticism,  Apprehension, 
Timidity,  Shyness,  Reverential  Fear,  Awe,  Consterna- 
tion, Suspicion,  Indignation,  Jealousy,  Disloyalty,  Self 
Pity,  Dread,  Dispondency,  Exasperation,  Dogmatism, 
Fury,  Rath,  Fear,  Cruelty. 

Exhibit  4. — Moral  and  Spiritual  Functions  of  the 
Human  Mind:  Intuition,  Aspiration,  Hope,  Desire, 
Faith,  Patience,  Courage,  Kindness,  Courtesy,  Compas- 
sion, Sorrow,  Pity,  Sympathy,  Reverence,  Love,  Per- 
sonal Responsibility,  Moral  Accountability. 

The  human  mind  is  a  wonderful  and  unique  mechan- 
ism having  its  central  "I  Am"  and  its  six  cabinet  of- 
ficial functions,  with  over  eighty  subsidiary  departments, 
making  up  a  complete  organiation. 

The  Will  is  the  dominating  factor  of  the  I  Am,  and  it 
is  within  the  province  of  the  Will  to  set  in  motion  any 
function  of  the  mind.  It  is  therefore  through  the  direc- 
tion of  the  Will  that  the  individual  mind  can  be  con- 
structive in  building  strong  mental  forces,  or  it  can  be 
directed  to  undermine  by  calling  into  activity  the  func- 
tion of  destruction.  All  of  which  comes  within  the  Law 
of  using  and  abusing. 

Every  normal  mind  has  all  the  functions  and  con- 
tains a  full  and  complete  category  of  all  the  human  and 
mental  characteristics.  Some  functions  are  more  active 
than  others,  and  at  times  appear  entirely  absent  in  some 
personalities.  In  each  case,  however,  every  function  may 
be  brought  out,  or  kept  suppressed.  It  is  a  case  of  hold- 
ing them  in  the  sleep  state  or  awaking  them  to  activity. 


228  Chapter  XIV. 

For  within  the  primary  mind  all  functions  are  enveloped 
within  the  sleep  state,  in  dual  essence. 

Each  and  every  person  has  within  him  the  power  to 
call  into  activity  the  functions  of  educational,  moral  and 
spiritual  development,,  or  he  can  suppress  the  functions 
of  the  higher  development  and  call  into  use  the  func- 
tions of  distructivity  and  gradually  lower  his  mental 
and  moral  personality  to  any  depth  that  a  continual 
practice  is  sure  to  bring.  The  individual  is  largely  a 
victim  to  the  faculties  and  tendencies  aroused  by  in- 
heritance, awakened  by  prenatal  influence,  which  re- 
quire the  greatest  care,  patience  and  practice  to  over- 
come, but  where  this  influence  is  not  active  the  indi- 
vidual can  readily  follow  the  dictates  of  Eeason  and 
thereby  govern  the  Will  toward  the  purely  constructive 
lines.  Every  normal  individual  is  the  savage  and  saint, 
the  criminal  and  angel,  the  ignoramus  and  the  embry- 
otic  Master  Mind. 

The  Will  is  a  good  servant  when  directed  by  the  func- 
tion of  Reason.  But  Will  once  establishing  a  precedent, 
does  not  readily  yield  to  Eeason.  Rather  Will  tries  to 
persuade  Reason  to  conform  to  its  plans,  and  the  average 
person  tries  to  make  Reason  conform  to  Will.  They 
have  not  learned  that  a  wrong  process,  although  tem- 
"porarily  agreeable,  must  be  retraced  and  rectified.  Rea- 
son to  be  at  its  highest  must  be  based  upon  equity. 
Reason  like  the  golden  rule  is  flexible.  It  rises  or  falls 
in  keeping  with  the  standard  of  moral  development. 

The  Mind  when  properly  directed  has  a  force  greater 
than  we  at  first  thought  will  concede.  The  Mind 
focused  upon  a  specific  line  can  be  projected  to  a  great 
distance,  as  is  practiced  in  telepathy.  It  has  a  wonderful 
potent  force,  one  mind  over  another,  as  in  the  case  of 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  229 

hypnotism,  which  in  most  cases  is  by  common  concent 
to  the  operator  by  his  subject.  When  carried  to  extreme 
cases  as  in  producing  cataleptic  sleep,  not  only  the  mind 
of  the  subject  is  placed  in  abeyance,  but  the  physical 
body  as  well. 

Subjects  at  times  have  been  locked  under  a  vice-like 
grip  for  days  at  a  time.  In  other  cases  the  nervous 
system  is  completely  locked  up,  and  the  mind  of  the  sub- 
ject left  wide  awake,  enabling  a  surgical  operation  to 
be  performed,  without  pain,  the  sense  of  feeling,  or  the 
loss  of  blood. 

The  Human  Mind  is  not  alone  remarkable  for  its 
powers,  these  qualifications  are  expressed  as  well  by  the 
lower  animals.  Snakes  can  charm  birds  and  draw  them 
within  their  grasp  as  mental  victims.  This  same  mental 
power  is  expressed  by  the  cat  kind. 

Birds  practice  telepathy,  more  perhaps,  than  any  other 
type  expression.  They  can  always  trace,  each,  their 
mate  or  offspring  in  the  forest  though  miles  apart. 

Carrier  pigeons  may  be  housed  in  darkness  and  carried 
hundreds  of  miles  away  from  home;  and  when  turned 
loose  will  rise  in  the  air,  circle  around  a  few  times  until 
they  get  the  line  of  mental  bearing,  when  they  strike 
out  in  a  straight  line  for  home. 

How  can  they  do  it  unless  by  the  mental  powers? 

The  honey  bee  flies  from  flower  to  flower  and  when 
loaded,  circles  around  until  she  gets  her  mental  bearing 
and  starts  for  the  hive  in  a  "bee"  line,  guided  by  the 
mental  power  within. 

The  carrier  pigeon  has  the  sublime  mental  power  to 
find  its  home  without  chart  or  compass. 

The  blood  hound  can  follow  the  foot  impact  of  the 
culprit  through  the  magnetic  energy  exhausted  into  the 


230  Chapter  XIV. 

soil  walked  over  as  long  as  three  days  thereafter.  Not 
by  the  sense  of  smell,,  as  the  world  generally  believes, 
but  by  the  soul,  mind  or  sense  it  possesses.  If  the  hound 
was  guided  by  smell,  how  should  he  be  able  to  follow 
the  foot  by  the  smell  of  the  cap,  glove,  or  handker- 
chief, in  lieu  of  the  sock  or  shoe  of  the  foot  he  was 
expected  to  follow?  If  smell  was  the  guiding  line 
of  the  hound,  instead  of  his  psychic  sense,  he  could  not 
find  his  culprit  across  lots  as  is  often  done  by  way  of 
short  cut,  neither  could  he  know  the  difference  of  a 
back  track  from -the  forward  track.  Furthermore  how 
can  smell  be  produced  by  walking  on  the  earth? 

The  truth  is  every  step  we  take,  we  exhaust  energy 
into  the  soil  we  walk  over.  The  energy  expended  carries 
with  it  the  character  of  the  person  expending  the  force 
and  the  blood  hound  comes  enrapport  with  this  char- 
acter in  a  mental  line,  or  soul  sense,  and  in  the  mind's 
eye  practically  knows  the  personality  he  seeks  and 
straightway  leaves  the  trail  for  a  short  cut  across  lots 
where  he  usually  comes  across  the  one  pursued  and 
hangs  fast  to  him. 

The  psychic  evidence  of  the  hound  is  more  potent  in 
a  criminal  court  than  that  of  the  evidence  of  a  human 
psychic. 

The  highest  mental  sense  of  animals,  which  is  neither 
sight  nor  smell,  is  an  inherited  psychic  force  that  is 
often  demonstrated  where  the  animal  approaches  danger 
— not  immediate  danger,  but  a  feeling  of  an  inherited 
danger.  Who  has  not  seen  a  horse  become  frightened 
when  approaching  an  elephant  the  first  time,  although 
the  horse  could  neither  see  nor  smell  the  elephant? 
Even  though  he  could  smell  the  elephant,  why  should  he 
fear  danger  through  a  smell  that  never  had  hurt  him? 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  231 

Human  beings  often  sense  danger,  outside  any  func- 
tion of  the  five  senses.  And  in  view  of  the  fact  that 
mankind  has  a  higher  sense  perception  than  any  other 
animal  he  should  have  the  soul  sense  better  developed 
than  that  of  any  other  animal.  This  would  be  the  case 
if  he  had  not  abandoned  the  natural  and  resorted  to  the 
artificial  methods  of  doing  things.  For  in  the  using  of 
a  thing  it  is  developed  and  in  non-use  it  goes  into  ex- 
tinction. Instead  of  calling  into  action  and  thereby 
creating  the  finer  senses  of  the  soul,  he  resorts  to  chart 
and  compass. 

This  wonderful  mind  we  possess  has  not  had  con- 
sideration given  it  by  the  people  in  general.  Their  at- 
tention has  been  directed  to  their  physical  bodies.  Most 
people  speaking  of  themselves  have  reference  to  their 
physical  body,  which  if  they  would  only  stop  to  consider 
would  realize  that  the  body  is  undergoing  so  rapid  a 
change,  that  they  do  not  possess  the  same  body  in  its 
entirety  any  great  length  of  time. 

When  we  think  of  our  mental  body  we  must  consider 
it  as  a  primary  dual  mind,  impressed  through  our  par- 
ents upon  a  single  molecule.  Then  we  must  think  of  it 
as  it  automatically  developed  a  physical  form  in  its 
embryotic  stage  before  birth.  From  birth  we  must  think 
of  it  as  a  dual  conglomerate  mind,  a  center  of  perception 
where  thought  after  thought  accumulates  in  the  con- 
struction of  individual  mind  around  that  center  of  per- 
ception. Then  we  must  think  of  our  mind  in  the  child 
body.  Following  the  child  to  the  matured  body  and 
finally  to  the  body  of  the  aged  man.  But  all  these  bodies 
with  the  one  and  continuous  mind  from  the  primordial 
molecule  to  the  final  separation  of  its  last  physical  form 
is  a  continuous  one,  which  having  separated  itself  from 


232  Chapter  XIV. 

all  its  past  physical  forms  must  also  separate  from  its 
present. 

The  mind  has  separated  from  all  its  former  physical 
forms  without  loss  of  mental  combination  and  organiza- 
tion hence  it  is  capacitated  to  mental  organized  con- 
tinuity. Furthermore  being  an  inheritance  of  continu- 
ity has  the  characteristics  of  continuity  established 
within. 

All  physical  forms  take  on  their  characteristics.  So 
also  does  the  mind  that  lives  in  and  through  the  physical, 
which  finally  buds  and  branches  out  into  a  higher  plane 
like  the  perfume  of  the  rose,  invisible  though  never- 
theless real. 

The  physical  form  was  builded  to  suit  the  demand 
and  uses  of  the  mental  form  within.  The  mental  form 
is  the  proprietor  of  the  physical. 

The  proprietor,  or  "I  Am"  within,  is  the  center 
around  which  all  the  functions,  both  mental  and  physical 
were  builded.  A  center  cannot  be  created,  but  is  a 
principle  of  the  absolute  that  exists  wherever  formation 
takes  place. 

•The  center  is  the  base  of  energy  and  point  from  which 
executive  orders  are  given.  At  first  it  was  the  base  of 
material  construction. 

The  mental  center  has  its  mental  organs  which  act  as 
the  matrix  around  which  the  physical  organs  are  con- 
structed and  the  mental  directs  the  physical. 

The  mental  brain  fills  the  physical  brain  and  acts 
as  the  triggers  to  set  loose  the  storage  energy  of  the 
brain  that  flow  down  over  the  nerves  filling  the  muscles 
and  compelling  them  to  move,  at  the  directivity  of  the 
mind  within.  Thus  it  is  that  the  "I  Am"  within  bids 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  233 

the  physical  form  to  serve  it,  and  expresses  proprietor- 
ship over  it. 

Tli is,  however,  must  all  he  accomplished  by  proper 
conditions.  We  note  that  mind  cannot  move  matter  of 
a  different  plane  than  its  own.  Hence  in  order  to  move 
physical  matter  such  as  composes  our  physical  body,  the 
mind  has  first  to  act  upon  mind  body  and  the  mind  body 
is  capable  of  setting  at  motion  matter  of  its  own  plane 
such  as  that  of  ether  under  a  temperature  of  98  degrees 
Fahrenheit.  A  lower  or  a  higher  temperature  would 
prove  futile. 

The  physical  brain  is  a  storage  battery  with  the 
stomach  and  lungs  generators  and  the  mind  within  the 
chief  engineer.  When  the  engineer  turns  loose  the  elec- 
trical storage  it  passes  down  over  the  nerves  filling  the 
muscle  to  which  it  is  connected  and  causes  expansion 
of  the  muscle,  and  hence  endwise  shrinkage,  and  its  de- 
sired effect  is  produced.  The  fluid  that  acts  when  the 
triggers  are  mentally  touched  is  that  fine  ether  substance 
that  fills 'the  immensity  of  space,  and  that  portion  that 
acts  upon  the  muscle  must  be  of  the  given  temperature 
as  mentioned  above.  In  the  case  of  cold  blooded  animals 
the  mental  forces  operate  with  a  temperature  of  65  de- 
grees or  less. 

It  may  seem  strange,  but  try  as  we  may,  the  mental 
energy  cannot  move  ether  out  of  its  storage  to  operate 
a  muscle  outside  of  its  normal  working  temperature. 

Appetite  is  the  function  that  constructs  and  main- 
tains the  physical  body.  Desire  is  the  function  that 
constructs  and  maintains  the  mental.  Desire  is  mental 
appetite.  Thoughts  to  the  mind  are  like  morsels  of  food 
to  the  physical  body. 

In  order  to  construct  the  mind,  thoughts  are  as  mental 


234  Chapter  XIV. 

food;  they  must,  like  physical  food,  be  digested  before 
they  can  be  utilized  in  the  building  and  maintaining 
the  mental  body.  Desire  is  the  appetite,  Reason  the 
mental  digestive  organ.  The  mental  body,  like  that  of 
the  physical  body,  partakes  largely  of  the  character  of 
the  food  it  assimilates.  Thoughts,  therefore  have  their 
relative  characteristic  bearing,  in  constructing  the  men- 
tal character. 

The  mind,  like  the  physical  body,  in  order  to  grow 
must  consume  its  food  supply  or  remain  at  a  standstill. 
Then  if  you  desire  to  move,  grow  and  advance  you  must 
consume  and  utilize  the  substance  that  feeds  in  either 
case. 

The  mental  body  grows  along  with,  and  within  the 
physical  body.  You  cannot  see  it,  but  it  is  there  in  all 
its  glory.  We  cannot  say  the  physical  created  the  men- 
tal, although  it  basicly  depends  upon  it  at  first,  after 
which,  like  the  hand  and  brain,  they  develop  together, 
with  the  mental  finally  outliving  and  predominating  the 
physical. 

The  mental  body  at  first  depends  upon  the  physical 
body.  Later  on  when  mental  organization  is  complete, 
it  directs  the  physical,  and  lastly  when  separated  from 
the  physical,  leaves  it  a  cold  and  helpless  form. 

He  who  thinks  himself  to  be  a  physical  form,  over- 
looks the  fact  that  in  death,  so  called,  his  thinking,  vital 
and  active  forces  have  simply  taken  birth  into  another 
plane  to  which  it  has  developed.  The  physical  action 
ceases  at  the  departure  of  the  director.  It  is  not  at  all 
strange,  for  Nature's  Invisible  Forces  are  working  by 
this  process  in  every  plane  of  existence  and  every  stage 
of  development.  For  out  of  the  carbons  came  the  vege- 
tables, out  of  the  vegetable  the  animal  and  out  of  the 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  235 

animal  the  mental,  and  out  of  the  mental  the  spiritual. 
Each  step,  each  plane  more  and  more  independent  as 
they  become  less  and  less  dependent. 

It  will  be  noted  that  the  physical  body  does  not  live 
by  consuming  minerals.  Nor  does  the  mental  body  live 
by  consuming  vegetables.  But  by  thoughts.  Its  con- 
tinuity, therefore  depends  upon  its  capacity  to  maintain 
organization  and  through  that  organization  the  power 
to  consume  thoughts. 

The  mental  body  has  formation — its  Reason  and 
Will  with  Memory  as  its  center  and  Imagination  as  its 
illuminary  surface — yet  it  cannot  be  measured  by  a 
square  or  rule,  but  by  another  and  different  dimension — 
a  measure  of  consciousness. 

The  nearest  conception  one  may  have  of  form  in  the 
mental  body  would  come  in  observance  of  its  accus- 
tomed use  in  physical  directivity.  Mentally  we  are  as 
we  think,  and  we  think  we  have  head,  hands,  feet,  etc. 
Then  it  is  quite  natural  that  we  should  mentally  retain 
this  form.  The  physical  form  is  builded  along  the  mental 
desire  and  physical  application  to  get  the  necessary  loco- 
motion and  carry  out  the  mental  and  physical  activities 
on  this  physical  sphere.  When  there  comes  a  separation 
of  the  mental  body  from  that  of  the  physical,  the  natural 
thing  would  be  to  maintain  its  established  form  and 
cling  to  its  established  form  until  a  change  is  required 
or  the  lack  of  a  demand  places  such  form  into  non-use. 
Tho  result  then  would  be  to  gradually  change  form  to 
suit  new  requirements  as  has  been  the  process  throughout 
the  growth  and  development  of  all  physical  animated 
life.  But  when  changes  are  made  they  never  fail  to  keep 
in  rudiment,  the  records  of  their  past. 


236  Chapter  XIV. 

Under  Chapter  XV.,  "Arts  and  the  Moral  Law,"  we 
will  try  to  elaborate  upon  the  mind  functions  more  fully. 
But  since  this  chapter  will  be  incomplete  without  giving 
the  functions  of  the  mind  in  detail,  we  will  briefly  touch 
the  question  concerning  the  differentiation  of  the  varied 
preliminary  functions  of  the  mind  and  their  uses  and 
effects. 

The  six  grand  functions  have  been  pretty  well  covered 
already,  and  we  will  now  call  your  attention  to  the  sub- 
sidiary functions,  all  of  which  are  largely  under  the 
dominion  of  Will  and  Reason.  Mental  appetite  is  the 
Law  of  Affinity  expressed  within  the  mind,  it  hungers 
for  thought  food  and  thinking  is  digesting.  Mental 
food — Curiosity — is  unsatisfied  mental  appetite.  Intui- 
tion is  the  sense  of  feeling  or  impression  from  without. 
Aspiration  is  a  mental  gaze  toward  higher  light.  Hope 
is  the  line  toward  a  thing  sought  for,  Faith  is  to  believe 
the  thing  will  be  attained.  Impulse  is  an  expansion 
from  within.  Patience  untiring  energy.  Cunning  is 
the  effort  to  evade,  Greed  is  unbridled  avarice, 
Courage  is  energy  expending  without  fear.  Kindness 
is  harmonious  equity.  Courtesy  is  extending  privilege 
to  others.  Compassion  is  extending  privilege  and  sym- 
pathy. Sorrow  is  mental  distress.  Pity  is  the  hope  it 
should  not  be  so.  Sympathy  is  extending  the  hope  with 
feelings.  Reverence  combines  Love  and  Honor.  Dis- 
cretion is  to  use  mental  analysis.  Honor  is  steadfast- 
ness to  what  seems  right.  Love  is  to  revere  and  adore. 
Desire  is  the  function  of  inspiration.  Inspiration  har- 
monizes with  the  forces  from  without.  Personality  as  a 
whole  is  the  mental  reservoir  of  known  responsibility. 
Morality  is  the  recognition  of  spiritual  development  and 
accountability. 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  237 

The  using  of  the  above  subsidiary  functions  means 
building  constructively  in  the  individual  mental  and 
moral  personality. 

The  use  of  the  following  named  functions  is  to  en- 
courage mental  and  moral  degradation. 

Anger  poisons  the  mind  and  body.  Revenge  culti- 
vates and  perpetuates  the  diseased  condition  that  Anger 
establishes,  hate  cements  and  seals  the  disease  within 
revenge  and  cultivates  and  encourages  it  to  live.  Envy 
is  enmity  and  selfishness;  it  destroys  generosity.  Ani- 
mosity causes  mental  sourness.  Bitterness  foments  the 
mind.  Impatience  weakens  the  nervous  system  and  de- 
stroys the  judgment.  Mistrust  destroys  faith.  Fanati- 
cism is  biased  judgment  and  a  curtailment  of  philan- 
thropy. Apprehension  is  the  forerunner  of  fear.  Tim- 
idity is  yielding  to  mental  weakness.  Shyness,  effort  to 
avoid.  Reverential  fear  creates  hypocritical  love.  Awe, 
mental  shock.  Consternation,  yielding  to  fear  and 
abandonment  of  judgment.  Suspicion,  questionable 
attitude.  Indignation,  pride  and  disgust.  Jealousy, 
selfish  honor.  Disloyalty,  mutability.  Self  Pity,  is 
moral  suicide.  Dread  leads  to  moral  weakness.  De- 
spondency destroys  hope  and  leads  to  mental  collapse. 
Exasperation  cultivates  meanness  and  loss  of  judgment. 
Dogmatism  leads  to  mental  inertia.  Fury  is  distructive 
to  reason.  Wrath  starts  a  mental  cyclone.  Fear  creates 
personal  weakness  and  Cruelty  destroys  spirituality. 

Man's  greatest  hope  and  accomplishment  lies  in  the 
proper  uses  of  the  constructive  functions.  For  man  is 
as  he  constantly  thinketh.  Intuition,  Aspiration,  Hope, 
Faith,  Patience,  Courage,  Desire,  Love,  Kindness,  Cour- 
tesy, Compassion,  Sorrow,  Pity,  Sympathy,  Honor  and 


238  Chapter  XIV. 

Reverence  is  the  functions  that  when  made  use  of  create 
a  moral  and  spiritual  development. 

In  concluding  the  subject  of  the  Human  Mind  we 
wish  to  give  it  a -somewhat  broad  survey. 

Starting  at  a  point  of  perhaps  a  grunt  or  mere  squeak, 
humanity  has  developed  a  vocabulary,  including  the 
whole  race,  of  not  less  than  three  hundred  thousand 
words. 

The  average  man  intellectually  uses  from  300  to  1000 
words.  The  business  man  not  less  than  2000.  The  pro- 
fessional man  7000  to  10,000  in  order  to  clothe  his 
mental  expressions.  Man  has  not  only  got  to  have  words 
to  express  himself,  but  must  know  them  and  use  them 
in  order  to  think. 

The  world  is  coining  words  at  not  less  than  40  per 
day.  So  the  mental  world  is  growing  and  thinking.  To 
use  words  without  a  knowledge  of  their  meaning  is  like 
eating  food  without  digesting  it.  It  means  mental 
dyspepsia.  A  healthy  mind  means  the  capacity  to  use 
and  properly  apply  words  within  their  correct  meaning 
and  bear  thoughts  of  concrete  understanding. 

The  pre-historic  man  used  little  or  no  words  at  first 
Every  word  now  in  use  can  be  traced  to  its  root  in  a 
form  of  its  first  mental  meaning.  And  so  we  note  with 
accuracy  the  long  tedious  process  that  the  human  mind 
has  been  evolving  into  being,  how  line  of  contact  with 
objects  produced  mental  thoughts,  and  the  thoughts 
clothed  words,  one  after  another,  until  the  almost  limit- 
less mind  and  vocabulary  of  man  has  become  the  key- 
stone to  the  arc  of  earth-plane  creation. 

The  human  mind  has  the  power  to  construct  invisible 
though  over  potent  lines  which  mental  energy  expresses. 
Although  we  may  not  know  it  these  lines  are  tracks  that 


Functions  of  the  Mind.  239 

we  actually  create,  "for  as  a  man  thinketh,  he  is."  A 
desire  constantly  pressed  and  expressed  for  health  lays 
lines  over  which  energy  will  be  able  to  travel  and  express 
health.  The  expression  of  self-pity  is  moral  suicide  and 
is  a  fertilizer  to  the  mental  or  physical  soil  over  which 
the  mental  lines  are  laid.  If  the  expression  is  continued 
long  enough  it  becomes  a  growth  of  reality  to  its  owner 
who  hugs  it  to  his  bosom,  the  property  he  creates  as 
his  own. 

To  think  dispondency  is  to  cultivate  it:  to  think  sui- 
cide and  think  it  often  is  to  laj  suicidal  mental  lines;  to 
utter  it  in  words  is  to  make  flesh  of  it,  and  when  one 
least  expects  it  and  the  occasion  arises,  the  mental  ex- 
plosion takes  place,  the  energy  passes  over  the  line  of 
least  insistence  and  he  becomes  a  suicide. 

Think  kill,  think  it  often,  and  one  will  mentally  lay 
the  lines  to  perform  the  act.  Express  kill  in  words  and 
we  indelibly  lay  mental  tracks  that  in  a  brain-storm 
explosion  the  mental  energy  will  express  itself  over  the 
tracks  laid  and  before  a  better  judgment  prevails  one 
may  have  killed  one's  best  friend.  This  is  the  power 
of  the  mind  for  good  or  ill.  Let  each  human  be- 
ing be  taught  the  truth  of  the  creative  power  of  the 
mind,  and  with  this  knowledge  profit  by  it  rather  than 
suffer  the -excruciating  agony  that  misguided  thinking 
mav  lead  to. 


CHAPTER  XV. 
ART  AND  THE  MORAL  LAW. 

In  considering  the  subject  of  Art  and  the  Moral  Law 
we  must  ever  bear  in  mind  that  they  are  the  result  of 
mental  conception,  and  must  not  be  confounded  with 
Nature's  Laws.  They  belong  to  the  world  of  things,  not 
sources  of  causation. 

Art  as  well  as  the  Moral  Law  depends  upon  Nature 
and  the  mental  world.  That  Nature  is  not  dependent 
upon  them  or  is  it  in  any  way  essentially  connected. 
Nature's  Laws  existed  prior  to  Art  and  the  Moral  Law. 

We  are  endeavoring  to  impress  this  thought  upon  the 
mind  of  the  reader,  for  the  reason  it  is  a  common  thing 
to  have  educated  persons  speak  of  the  subject  of  the 
Moral  Law  and  confound  it  with  Nature's  Laws. 

Nature's  Laws  are  casual  and  fundamental  fixities, 
without  beginning  or  end.  The  Moral  Law  is  comprised 
of  the  ideas  and  mandates  of  the  mental  world.  The 
Law  is  conceived  in  the  mental  world,  is  changed  or 
annulled  by  it,  and  like  the  golden  rule,  rises  and  falls 
with  the  highest  concepts  of  its  possessors.  It  is  human- 
ity's flexible  rule  of  practice. 

Art  and  the  Moral  Law  conditions  a  plane  for  man 
above  the  line  of  the  lower  animals.  And  just  to  the 
extent  we  abandon  Art  and  the  Moral  Law,  do  we  ally 
ourselves  to  the  animal  world  beneath  us. 

Although  mankind  in  the  highest  sense  is  the  posses- 
sor of  Art  and  the  Moral  Law  we  must  not  overlook  the 
fact  that  it  reaches  a  considerable  distance  into  the 
lower  animal  kingdom. 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  241 

In  order  to  treat  the  subject  intellectually  we  must 
first  define  what  is  meant  by  Art  and  the  Moral  Law. 
Art  is  anything  expressed  or  implied  by  mental  direct- 
ivity. The  Moral  Law  is  the  mental  sense  of  justice, 
expressed  and  implied.  It  is  a  sort  of  fourth  dimension. 
A  measure  of  and  an  expression  of  consciousness. 

The  expression  and  implication  of  mind  can  be  done 
only  through  the  functions  of  the  mind.  The  principle 
functions  are  Will,  Reason,  Perception,  Conception,  Im- 
agination, Consciousness  and  Memory. 

Most  of  these  mental  functions  are  traceable  down 
into  the  animal  kingdom.  For  instance  the  horse  is  said 
to  possess  horse  sense.  It  feels  a  sense  of  right  and 
wrong,  some  have  good  characters,  others  bad.  They  all 
possess  a  certain  amount  of  Will,  sometimes  even  to  be 
very  balky.  They  have  reason  which  they  readily  express 
when  they  become  frightened  and  after  finding  that  the 
object  that  frightened  them  was  only  a  stump,  they  reach 
passivity  and  are  satisfied. 

Dogs  have  faith  in  and  love  their  masters,  and  a  deep 
sense  of  moral  principle  of  right  and  wrong  as  they 
readily  express  in  shame  or  glee. 

Beavers  have  the  sense  of  art  and  their  needs  when 
they  build  their  dam  across  a  stream,  plaster  it  with  mud 
and  riprap  it  with  sticks  of  wood  and  stone. 

Bees  build  their  combs  of  wax  cells  in  which  they 
hermetically  seal  away  their  honey.  They  construct  their 
cells  on  plans  of  geometrical  law,  by  making  one  cell  and 
six  other  cells  around  it,  forming  complete  adjacent 
circles  within  dimension  of  space. 

Birds  build  their  nests  with  sticks,  mud  or  anything 
to  which  they  form  a  habit  or  fashion.  Some  birds  sew 
leaves  together  as  a  tailor  would  do.  Most  birds  sing, 


24:2  Chapter  XV. 

giving  mental  expression  to  moments  of  pleasure.  Some 
birds  mock  every  other  bird  of  song,  while  other  birds 
actually  talk. 

Monkeys  play  tricks  upon  each  other  and  do  all  man- 
ner of  stunts  in  order  to  draw  attention.  Monkeys  have 
been  known  to  construct  bridges,  ride  on  bicycles,  roll 
balls,  play  cards,  smoke  a  pipe,  as  well  as  sometimes 
express  sense  of  shame. 

We  personally  witnessed  a  bunch  of  steers  form  a 
conspiracy  and  collectively  drive  another  innocent  flock 
through  a  fence  that  they  might  get  into  a  neighboring 
corn  field. 

Most  all  domestic  animals  speak  some  words  of  their 
own  which  have  mental  meaning  to  them,  and  in  which 
they  each  can  understand.  Xearly  every  animal  has 
gestural  expression  and  emotion. 

Humanity  is  not  the  only  living  thing  expressing 
mental  directivity  or  art  and  the  moral  law.  Although 
they  exceed  by  far  every  other  living  character. 

Good  and  evil,  right  and  wrong,  is  purely  a  concept 
of  relative  mind.  It  has  no  place  outside  the  moral  law, 
the  whole  of  which  is  but  a  mental  sense  of  justice  while 
the  process  of  Nature  is  in  constant  progress  to  perfect 
adjustment  regardless  of  what  we  may  think  or  do.  The 
pendulum  constantly  swings  to  and  fro  with  a  perfect 
stopping  point  in  the  center. 

Our  ideas  of  right  and  wrong  are  from  our  own  men- 
tal viewpoint,  and  what  we  do  not  want  to  be  done  to 
ourselves,  our  moral  sense  teaches  us,  to  not  do  to  others. 
It  is  like  climbing  a  ladder  with  the  upper  rung  just 
above  us,  which  when  reached  gives  us  greater  view  of 
the  mental  horizon  with  always  another  rung  still  a  step 
higher;  for  each  rung  of  the  ladder  we  climb,  our  at- 


Art  and  the  Moral  Laiv.  243 

titude  changes,  and  what  is  good  today  may  seem  bad 
tomorrow. 

There  is  a  tie  in  the  Moral  Law  that  binds  all  mankind 
together.  Usually  man-made  laws  are  no  better  than 
the  people  that  enact  them,  and  it  is  certainly  true  that 
the  people  in  a  general  way  are  no  better  than  the  laws 
by  which  they  are  governed.  While  this  is  specifically 
true  in  national  affairs,  with  our  present  facilities  for 
news  and  travel,  and  international  relationship,  it  is 
general;  so  that,  like  persons  of  evil  intent  can  disturb 
a  community,  nations  of  bad  laws  and  evil  intent  can 
effect  the  world  at  large. 

So  it  is  if  one  nation  be  possessed  of  the  most  noble 
quality  and  highest  sense  of  justice,  it  cannot  always 
deal  in  harmony  with  other  nations  unless  they  be  of 
the  same  moral  standard. 

Usually  when  there  is  trouble  between  nations  as  be- 
tween individuals,  the  imposing  one  has  the  lowest 
standard  of  morals,  and  there  is  no  such  thing  as  rais- 
ing the  standard  in  that  time  of  dispute.  The  result  is 
the  one  possessing  the  highest  standard  must  drop  down 
to  the  lower,  for  there  can  be  no  settlement  in  language 
the  offender  does  not  understand.  To  look  for  reason 
where  it  does  not  exist  is  wasted  effort.  So  if  the  one 
knows  only  shot  and  shell  in  a  settlement  of  dispute 
the  other  must  meet  them  on  common  grounds  or  suffer 
defeat. 

The  question  under  a  moral  status  is  how  to  avoid 
individual  or  wholesale  crime.  The  world  has  usually 
consented  to  wholesale  murder  and  looked  upon  indi- 
vidual murder  with  horror.  The  question  of  moral 
status  is  altogether  in  the  motive.  If  the  nation  pro- 
tects the  individual  he  need  not  resort  to  crime.  And 


244  Chapter  XV. 

where  the  moral  status  of  nations  are  established  on 
grounds  of  equity,  justice  and  reason,  nations  will  not 
need  resort  to  wholesale  murder.  The  latter  will  take 
place  when  reason,  instead  of  will,  is  enthroned.  Will 
is  the  function  of  might  and  under  the  dictum  of  will, 
might  is  right.  How  then  can  reason  deal  with  will? 
Simply  by  providing  might  to  counteract  might.  So 
it  is  that  a  nation  possessing  will  and  might,  whose 
language  is  shot  and  shell,  must  be  dealt  with  through 
shot  and  shell. 

Humanity  today,  regardless  of  the  fact  that  we  have  a 
conception  of  morality,  has  not  as  yet  enthroned  Reason. 
When  a  child  we  were  taught  that  one  vicious  animal 
could  start  a  fracas  in  a  whole  flock.  This  story  is  made 
plain  to  us  when  we  see  two  nations  indulge  in  a  fracas 
that  finally  involves  the  whole  world. 

It  is  not  within  the  choice  of  man  to  say  we  shall 
have  peace  until  the  morals  of  the  world  shall  be  de- 
termined through  the  expression  of  Reason.  The  route 
mankind  is  traveling  is  from  the  animal  mind  to  the 
spiritual  mind  and  it  is  a  long,  tedious  struggle.  It  is  a 
process  of  intellectual  development.  It  does  not  come 
up  spontaneously  and  everywhere  alike,  but  grows  in 
individual  minds  and  patches. 

The  intellectual  must  rule  the  ignorant,  or  those  who 
have  no  intellect,  and  that  is  to  be  expected.  But  when 
intellect  rules  it  also  becomes  selfish,  and  as  the  mental 
world  grows  it  must  set  aside  selfish  rulers,  even  though 
they  have  surrounded  themselves  with  military  power. 
For  the  world  must  grow  ancl  cannot  be  stayed.  The 
moral  canker  must  be  cut  out,  as  with  the  surgeon's 
knife.  To  do  so  the  moral  law  must  cut  through  healthy 
flesh.  The  sentiment  today  prevails,  that  neither  man 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  245 

or  nations  shall  be  immoral,  inhuman  or  barbarous, 
even  in  self  defense. 

A  people  of  a  nation  have  a  perfect  right  to  form  such 
government  and  make  such  laws  as  the  majority  of  the 
people  thereof  may  agree  to,  but  if  their  government 
and  laws  become  a  menace  to  the  progress  of  the  world 
at  large  they  are  no  longer  within  their  rights.  Here 
is  where  mankind  as  a  whole  must  weed  out  such  nations, 
even  though  they  have  it  to  do  against  the  wish  of  the 
people  who  in  their  ignorance  stubbornly  fight  to  main- 
tain their  own  incarceration. 

Art,  the  work  of  mental  genius,  is  the  effort  of  man- 
kind to  supply  personal  requirements  and  comforts.  Just 
to  the  extent  we  advance  in  the  moral  laws  and  arts  we 
depart  from  Nature.  The  laws  of  man  are  but  the 
mandates  to  protect  him  as  he  lives  in  an  artificial  world. 
And  as  a  matter  of  fact  no  law  is  a  just  law  that  does 
not  conform  to  the  establishment  of  the  greatest  good 
to  the  greatest  number.  The  selfishness  and  mental 
cunning  is  always  alert  to  seek  personal  gains  at  the  ex- 
pense of  others.  Hence  it  is  that  every  statute  book,  the 
world  over,  is  full  of  unjust  laws,  as  well  as  the  fact  that 
there  are  always  a  class  of  people  directly  and  personally 
interested  in  their  own  selfish  gains,  and  those  through 
favoritism  who  will  lay  down  their  lives  to  maintain 
injustice  to  the  masses  as  of  divine  right  for  a  few  to 
arbitrarily  rule  over  the  many.  They  have  reason,  yes, 
but  they  bend  reason  to  conform  with  their  will.  So  that 
in  order  to  meet  the  world's  requirement  of  moral  status, 
it  must  be  in  conforming  affairs  in  the  interest  mentally 
and  physically  of  the  mass  of  the  people  as  against  the 
interest  of  the  few. 

There  was  a  time  when  one  could  commit  a  crime 


246  Chapter  XV. 

and  atone  for  it  by  settlement  in  the  third  person.  There 
was  a  time  when  man  had  to  pay  his  personal  debt  with 
his  own  flesh.  There  was  a  time  when  it  was  right  to 
sell  spoiled  meats  to  people  afar  off.  There  was  a  time 
when  it  was  considered  right  to  collectively  raise  a  mob 
and  plunder  a  foreign  nation  for  its  spoils,  and  was 
justified  in  placing  its  victims  into  slavery  because  they 
resisted.  There  was  a  time  when  one  nation  could  over- 
run another  and  if  resistance  was  offered,  terrorize  them 
by  burning  their  cities,  taking  their  leading  citizens  to 
firing  lines  and  shooting  them  in  cold  blood.  If  the 
populace  objected  they  would  imprison  their  most  be- 
loved as  hostages  for  good  behavior  in  submitting  to 
servitude  and  the  payment  of  heavy  indemnities  for  the 
cost  of  their  own  outrage  and  for  being  so  impudent  as 
to  offer  to  defend  themselves. 

But  that  day  is  passing  by.  The  evils  of  the  one  age 
become  the  virtues  of  the  next,  as  the  darkness  of  the 
night  contrast  the  light  of  the  day. 

Art  and  the  Moral  Law  must  always  work  hand  in 
hand,  as  it  has  in  the  past  with  an  ever  evolving  effort 
to  the  good  of  man. 

Art  to  supply  the  personal  needs,  and  the  moral  con- 
cept to  meet  out  equality  and  justice  to  all. 

The  highest  concept  of  the  Moral  Law  is  the  accom- 
plishment of  the  greatest  good  to  the  greatest  number, 
and  in  an  individual  way  the  personal  responsibility  and 
moral  accountability  of  every  child  of  Nature. 

The  gulf  over  which  mankind  must  travel  from  the 
animal  man  to  the  civilized  man  is  a  gulf  of  barbarism. 
The  potent  factor  of  the  civilized  man  is  Art  and  the 
Moral  Laws,  and  neither  Art  or  the  Moral  Law  can  be 
evolved  faster  than  the  race  itself.  Hence  it  must  come 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  247 

gradually  and  by  personal  and  collective  effort,  just  as 
intelligence  dawns,  it  asserts  its  right  over  ignorance 
and  usurps  its  power.  It  centralizes  and  organizes  itself 
into  power  and  control.  Selfishness  and  pride  domi- 
nate its  whole  being  for  it  is  impossible  for  the  age  of 
centralized  intellect  to  see  the  civilized  motto  of  the 
greatest  good  to  the  greatest  number,  and  fights  all  such 
human  advancement  by  its  self  styled  divine  rights  to 
the  very  death. 

War  is  one  of  the  arts  of  human  genius.  To  the  moral 
mind  it  is  hellish,  because  the  moral  mind  feels  that  all 
disputes  can  be  settled  by  reason.  But  when  combatants 
of  contending  nations  do  not  both  alike  have  the  function 
of  reason,  how  is  reason  to  be  used?  It  simply  cannot 
be  used  when  it  is  not  to  be  found.  What  then  happens  ? 
The  nation  possessing  reason  must  see  that  it  has  to 
meet  the  combatant  from  one  of  two  standpoints, 
namely:  Either  to  abandon  reason  and  use  will  and 
might  to  protect  its  rights,  or  submit  to  the  will  and 
might  of  its  selfish  enemy  and  become  servants  under 
them.  In  other  words,  stand  idly  by  and  allow  the 
evolving  light  of  reason  and  intellect  to  be  crushed  from 
the  hopes  of  humanity.  It  is  cowardly  to  surrender 
reason  and  intellect  to  will  and  might;  and  even  more, 
it  is  immoral  to  not  defend  in  any  and  all  advance 
stages  of  civilization  and  the  moral  laws. 

War  is  not  a  crime  when  used  as  a  weapon  in  support 
of  the  right.  Not  what  strained  reason  would  suggest, 
but  the  rights  expressing  the  greatest  good  to  the  greatest 
number. 

Most  wars  have  been  in  support  of  personal  aggran- 
dizement, the  struggle  of  the  individual  to  curtail  the  on- 
ward march  of  the  mental  world.  The  self  chosen  peers 


248  Chapter  XV. 

of  authority  have  always  laid  down  their  creeds  and 
plans  with  hands  of  restraint  to  progress,  which  served 
as  dams  to  the  stream  of  progress,  that  curtailed  the 
stream  until  its  banks  overflowed,,  sweeping  everything 
before  it.  Such  has  been  the  experience  of  mental 
growth  in  the  world,  until  now  the  world  asserts  itself 
against  further  checking  by  placing  reason  upon  the 
throne  of  authority  and  with  it  fight  the  final  battle  of 
war  against  wars. 

When  that  time  comes,  as  it  surely  must,  the  moral 
law  will  find  its  expression  in  a  central  head,  as  the  voice 
and  choice  of  the  whole  people  and  whose  mandate  will 
be  expressed  and  determined  in  the  battle  of  reason, 
wherein  the  vanquished  as  well  as  victor  will  alike  be 
benefited. 

It  was  a  common  thing  in  years  gone  by  to  find  in 
every  community  an  individual  possessing  more  strength 
than  others  of  his  neighbors,  and  this  overbearing  young 
man  was  usually  called  the  bully  of  the  neighborhood. 
But  when  art  produced  the  pistol,  it  put  him  out  of 
business,  for  the  little  fellow  had  a  chance,  and  the 
death-dealing  pistol  civilized  the  bully. 

War  in  action  does  not  exhibit  all  its  terrors  to  view. 
Hatred  that  is  generated  and  which  follows  does  man- 
kind an  untold  amount  of  injury  by  burning  out  the 
kindred  relationship  one  people  should  hold  unto  an- 
other and  more  particularly  is  this  true  where  the  strug- 
gle was  not  for  humanity  and  the  right. 

It  so  happens  that  Man  came  into  being  the  most 
helpless  of  all  creatures  and  being  the  most  helpless, 
his  needs  in  a  like  measure  the  most  far-reaching.  Had 
he  been  amply  clothed,  he  would  not  have  needed  ar- 
tificial shelter.  Had  his  appetite  and  digestive  appa- 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  249 

ratus  been  capable  of  surviving  on  weeds  or  even  grass, 
his  struggle  would  have  been  exceedingly  small.  He 
would  not  have  cultivated  selfishness  from  which  he, 
in  his  higher  aspect  would  have  to  break  off.  If  his  lot 
had  been  a  state  of  full  and  complete  satisfaction  his 
function  of  curiosity  and  cunning  would  not  have  been 
aroused.  For  perfect  contentment  would  be  perfect 
stagnation.  But  this  was  not  the  case,  for  he  found  him- 
self in  constant  nakedness  and  want.  To  satisfy  those 
wants  he  had  to  move.  To  protect  his  body,  he  had  to 
shelter  it,  and  to  do  so  by  an  act  of  the  mind,  for  there 
was  no  other  way.  An  act  of  the  mind  carried  into 
execution  is  an  act  of  art.  It  was  not  essential  that  he 
should  spin  and  weave  a  coat,  but  even  the  skinning 
of  an  animal  and  the  donning  of  that  animal's  coat 
was  an  act  of  art. 

Before  mankind  could  have  performed  the  cunning 
act  of  covering  his  body  with  the  skins  of  animals  he 
must  first  conceive  the  idea,  and  it  was  to  gratify  the 
demands  of  this  first  idea  for  satisfying  his  needs  that 
he  started  out  of  the  animal  kingdom  toward  that  of 
Man.  Little  as  this  first  act  was,  it  formed  the  central 
spark  that  lit  up  the  way,  step  by  step,  until  man  has 
become  a  master  in  the  expression  of  his  desires,  from 
shelter  of  his  coat  to  his  magnificent  mansions  and  tem- 
ples that  followed.  But  by  the  effort  of  his  ceaseless 
inquiry  and  the  work  of  his  tireless  hands  he  has  di- 
rected nature  itself  in  supplying  his  endless  appetite 
for  food,  as  well  as  the  process  of  cooking  same  to 
practically  digest  it  before  eating.  Not  alone  content 
with  shelter  and  food,  but  his  mind  has  so  enlarged 
that  he  coined  hundreds  of  thousands  of  word  symbols 
in  order  to  record  and  convey  his  thoughts  as  well  as 


250  Chapter  XV. 

the  marvelous  scheme  of  printing  and  publishing— the 
art  of  arts — or  art  preservative  of  all  arts.  Beginning 
in  the  small  first  needs  for  a  coat  to  shelter  him,  his 
hand  and  brain  has  worked  out  the  marvelous  commerce 
of  the  world,  till  we  float  upon  the  water,  travel  be- 
neath it,  travel  upon  the  surface  of  the  land  and  tun- 
nel through  it,  as  well  as  fly  through  the  air.  We  talk 
over  wires  and  talk  over  space  without  wires.  Think 
what  we  may,  prophesy  what  we  will,  and  abide  the 
time,  for  the  destiny  of  man  will  answer  the  demand 
in  the  fulfillment  of  every  ideal. 

Necessities  are  demands,  and  demands  create  action 
which  means  growth  and  results  follow.  And  by  the 
process  of  evolution  the  building  of  the  tomorrow  on 
the  today,  makes  for  each  decade  a  larger  growth,  and 
its  pro  rata  of  advanced  speed.  So  it  is  truly  said  that 
the  last  25  years  has  advanced  the  world  more  in  art  and 
the  moral  law  than  any  previous  century,  and  the  last 
century  has  advanced  the  world  more  than  all  the  ages 
of  the  past. 

Individual  development,  like  universal  development, 
must  be  gradual  with  an  ever-increasing  capacity  and 
volume.  As  the  mass  depends  upon  the  units,  we  feel 
it  essential  to  deal  with  this  phase  of  the  question  in 
detail. 

Collectively,  the  highest  Moral  Ideal  is  "The  greatest 
good  to  the  greatest  number."  Individually  the  highest 
ideal  means  "Personal  responsibility  and  Moral  account- 
ability." 

We  must  each  learn  that  it  is  impossible  for  us  to 
have  our  own  way  about  everything  in  life.  Indeed, 
we  should  be  quite  content  if  the  majority  of  events 
turn  the  favorable  sides  toward  us.  When  we  have 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  251 

learned  these  truths  our  route  through  life  will  be  made 
smooth  indeed.  If  we  ask  our  own  way  regardless  of 
the  rights  of  others,  we  become  moral  thorns  and  find 
ourselves  entangled  at  every  turn  of  the  road.  A  life 
thus  lead  profits  little  to  the  individual  directing  it, 
and  abides  no  good  to  the  antipathy  it  meets. 

The  knowledge  that  we  have  success,  with  the  ma- 
jority of  events  coming  our  way  is  to  possess  the  key 
to  happiness.  To  know  that  the  world  does  not  owe  us 
homage  is  a  safeguard  against  personal  demoralization. 

In  the  broadest  sense,  the  greatest  advantage  is,  by 
consent,  to  the  will  of  majorities.  Each  one  should  ap- 
prove the  method  that  provides  it,  and  be  patriotic  to 
their  own  country.  Not  that  their  own  country  is  al- 
ways right,  but  because  it  is  nearest  and  the  most  vital 
to  them.  Patriotism  in  the  past  has  been  to  love  one's 
own  country  and  despise  all  others.  But  as  the  whole 
world  becomes  more  and  more  united  in  the  common 
cause  of  humanity,  the  despising  of  other  nations  will 
fade,  and  the  final  motto  will  be:  The  world  is  our 
country  and  a  perfect  humanity  our  ideal. 

Give  to  each  individual  the  intellect,  the  art  and 
morals  of  the  world,  and  you  give  to  that  individual  the 
Master  Mind.  Strip  him  of  his  intellect  and  of  Art 
and  the  Moral  Law,  and  he  becomes  a  naked  helpless 
form.  Take  from  his  vocabulary  of  speech,  his  words 
and  symbols,  pictures  and  mental  ideals,  and  at  once  he 
is  an  animal  man. 

All  normal  individuals  have  within  themselves  the 
character,  combination  and  power  of  expressing  life. 
They  have  the  power  of  directing  their  energies  to  a 
destiny  of  their  own  choice. 

We  must  learn  that  each  individual   is  the  embodi- 


252  Chapter  XV. 

ment  of  bad  as  well  as  of  good;  and  that  the  desirable 
can  be  developed  and  the  undesirable  kept  in  abayance, 
that  motive  becomes  the  all-important  question  in  the 
thoughts  and  actions  under  the  Moral  Law. 

The  highest  sense  of  morality  is  not  in  the  act  of 
doing  right  because  of  the  fear  of  punishment,  nor  is 
it  to  be  condoned  for  its  anticipation  of  reward,  for 
the  truly  moral  fort  lies  in  the  motive  of  the  act  rather 
than  its  hopes  and  fears. 

Being  good  because  we  fear  the  result  of  doing 
wrong  will  bring  punishment  is  not  a  true  moral  act, 
because  the  restraint  is  made  by  an  outside  safeguard. 
Being  good  for  the  thing  itself,  and  because  it  is  good 
to  be  good,  and  right  to  be  right,  is  a  fitting  choice. 
It  is  expressing  a  moral  motive  itself.  The  culprit  be- 
hind bars  can  do  no  wrong,  for  the  bars  defend  him. 
The  defense  is  a  physical,  not  a  moral  one.  To  test 
the  moral  character  is  to  have  the  restraint  within  the 
character  itself.  It  must  first  be  tempted  to  test  the 
moral  strength.  Like  a  machine,  it  must  be  tried  be- 
fore its  qualities  are  known.  To  stand  in  fear  of  the 
pain  of  the  lash  may  prevent  an  act  of  evil,  but  the  good 
it  accomplishes  is  artificial  restraint  and  lacks  the  moral 
motive. 

Every  thought  and  every  act  one  has,  goes  into  the 
personal  character  of  that  individual  being.  It  all  be- 
comes an  integral  part  of  self.  It  is  easier  to  cultivate 
the  good  than  it  is  the  bad,  because  to  practice  good 
deeds  breeds  contentment  and  happiness,  where  the 
thinking  of  and  doing  evil  things  creates  mental  dis- 
cord, doubt  and  fear;  all  of  which  goes  into  our  personal 
make-up  as  an  indelible  fixity. 

The  idea  that  one  can  think  wrong,  act  wrong  and 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  253 

commit  evil  against  others,  and  then  get  forgiveness,  as 
though  the  thoughts  or  acts  were  never  committed,  is 
mental  deception,  a  thing  not  supported  in  Nature  any- 
where, for  continuity  is  the  Law  of  Life.  There  are  no 
arbitrary  laws  in  Nature  to  select  the  good  from  the 
evil  and  annihilate  one  and  save  the  other,  for  all  alike 
conforms  to  Law  by  materializing  into  character  and 
record  of  one's  self.  Therefore  think  not  of,  or  prac- 
tice the  act  that  you  will  not  enjoy  in  memory.  For 
each  and  every  individual  must  constantly  pass  judg- 
ment upon  his  own  personal  makeup,  and  he  shall  be 
either  proud  or  ashamed,  as  his  consciousness  enlarges, 
and  he  reviews  his  own  memory  while  he  is  absolutely 
helpless  to  in  any  manner  change  it. 

In  the  weakness  of  our  intellect,  we  can  pass  over 
wrongdoing  without  question.  But  when  reason  de- 
velops, it  is  a  sun  of  light  unto  itself  that  illuminates 
the  dark  spots  of  life,  over  which  we  ourselves  must 
review  and  render  judgment  as  our  mental  capacity 
grows.  And  there  will  be  no  way  open  in  which  we 
can  get  around  our  own  selves. 

We  are  constantly  reminded  that  the  worst  of  crimes 
are  committed  by  intelligent  or  educated  people.  That 
they  are  shrewd  and  cunning,  therefore  better  able  to 
commit  crimes  and  avoid  the  consequence. 

Let  us  examine  the  case  from  a  scientific  point  of 
view  and  see  if  the  statement  is  true.  In  the  first  place, 
we  all  agree  that  nearly  every  crime  is  planned  in  secret, 
and  all  being  done  in  secret,  therefore  no  one  outside 
of  themselves  will  ever  become  wise  of  their  game  or 
discover  the  facts.  Secondly,  that  usually  criminals 
believe  that  they  can  become  forgiven  for  any  crime 
they  commit,  and  even  though  they  be  detected,  that 


254  Chapter  XV. 

their  case  will  not  be  hopeless,  and  that  in  some  manner 
the  bankrupt  court  of  heaven  will  discharge  them  for  al  I 
evil  they  have  committed,  by  the  simple  asking. 

In  the  first  instance,  one  cannot  concoct  a  wrong  or 
commit  the  act  without  knowing  it  himself.  If  he  knows 
it,  which  he  does,  he  had  the  thoughts  and  deeds  re- 
corded in  his  own  memory — his  own  Soul.  And  there 
it  will  remain,  and  although  he  personally  may  not  be 
imprisoned,  he  nevertheless  becomes  a  self -convicted 
criminal  and  imprisons  his  own  soul  in  company  with 
the  knowledge  of  the  crimes  he  has  committed.  No 
one  outside  of  himself  need  be  the  accuser,  for  as  his 
consciousness  rises  to  a  higher  plane  than  where  it 
lived  when  the  crime  was  committed,  he  will  become  his 
own  accuser.  Forgiveness,  if  he  gets  it,  will  not  erase 
the  memory  record  of  the  facts;  neither  is  it  possible 
for  him  to  get  away  from  himself,  or  his  own  con- 
sciousness, while  memory  and  awareness  are  his  lot  in 
life.  If  man  is  truly  educated  or  wise,  he  will  not  be 
a  shrewd  criminal.  He  will  not  commit  crime,  for  it 
will  remain  on  record,  and  crime  cannot  be  cheated  out 
of  existence. 

The  idea  advanced  that  one  can  commit  crime  against 
another  and  be  forgiven  for  the  offense  through  provi- 
dence, or  the  third  person,  is  deceiving  in  the  extreme. 
It  is  impossible  to  settle  a  debt  without  the  payment  is 
made  to  the  one  to  whom  it  is  due.  To  commit  crime 
and  atone  for  it  to  the  one  offended,  is  full  satisfaction, 
but  does  not  wipe  it  from  the  akasic  records;  the  fact 
of  the  crime  remains.  It  is  soothing  to  be  pardoned 
by  the  offended  and  commendable  to  seek  such  pardon. 
Still  for  all  this,  individual  life  is  made  up  by  debits 
and  credits,  and  crime  and  immorality  can  only  be 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  255 

atoned  when  the  debts  are  paid  to  the  uttermost  farth- 
ing, and  the  credited  side  of  the  ledger  of  life  show  a 
balance  that  we,  each  for  ourselves,  can  look  on  with 
pride  and  be  not  ashamed. 

There  are  crime  under  the  moral  Law  that  cannot 
be  atoned  in  the  slightest  degree.  And  this  is  true  in 
every  case  where  one  should  commit  offense  against  an- 
other he  cannot  restore.  For  we  cannot  recall  past 
events  or  erase  the  records. 

It  is  a  common  practice  for  the  criminally  inclined 
to  justify  their  acts,  by  first  provoking  the  ones  they 
would  offend,  and  then  after  having  provoked  them  to 
resentment,  commit  desperate  acts  under  a  pretense  of 
self-defense.  When  their  better  judgment  prevails, 
they  will  discover  that  the  measure  of  good  and  evil  is 
fixed  in  the  motive  and  not  their  subterfuge. 

The  questions  of  right  and  wrong,  good  and  evil,  are 
mooted  ones  indeed.  Courts  have,  throughout  the  civ- 
ilized ages,  tried  to  determine  just  where  the  line  shall 
be  drawn.  There  never  can  be  a  fixed  line,  neither  can 
we  reach  an  ideal  so  long  as  decisions  are  rendered  on 
precedents,  for  the  reason  that  the  past  events  cannot 
offer  the  moral  standard  to  guide  the  present,  nor  can 
the  present  claim  precedent  over  the  future. 

According  to  our  standard  of  morality  today,  it  is 
impossible  for  one  to  commit  a  crime  and  go  free  of  its 
consequences  by  asking  forgiveness,  and  in  some  un- 
explained way  transfer  his  guilt  onto  the  shoudlers  of 
a  third  party.  He  should  know  that  each  of  us  are  per- 
sonally responsible  for  what  we  do  within  the  scope  of 
our  knowledge  and  are  held  accountable  for  our  evil 
thoughts  and  deeds  to  the  extent  of  our  moral  devel- 
opment. The  record  is  kept  within  our  own  souls,  and 


256  Chapter  XV. 

we  cannot  escape  what  we  ourselves  personally  generate, 
develop,  characterize  and  materialize,  for  it  is  a  part  of 
our  own  very  being. 

It  is  not  a  hard  proposition  to  determine  what  is 
good  or  what  is  evil.  It  is  habits  that  promote  evil,  as 
well  as  good,  and  the  one  is  as  easy  to  live  as  the  other. 
Living  itself  is  but  a  habit  of  repeating.  It  takes  prac- 
tice to  live  a  moral  life.  It  also  takes  practice  to  live 
an  evil  life.  It  is  just  as  hard  for  a  moral  person  to 
commit  a  crime  as  it  is  for  an  immoral  person  to  com- 
mit a  good  deed.  When  you  know  this  truth,  the  liv- 
ing of  it  will  be  your  reward. 

In  all  the  annals  of  life,  knowingly  or  unknowingly, 
man  reaps  what  he  sows.  He  not  only  reaps  what  he 
sows,  but  in  his  sowing  others  reap  what  he  sows,  as  he 
in  turn  must  reap  what  others  sow.  And  thus,  the 
whole  human  race  must  rise  or  fall  together. 

In  dealing  with  the  Moral  Law,  we  have  no  refer- 
ence to  the  sexual  question,  for  this  question,  like  all 
other  ac"ts  of  Life,  has  only  its  own  part  to  play  in  the 
general  index  of  character  building.  The  question  re- 
ferred to  in  this  chapter  of  Art  and  the  Moral  Law 
covers  the  entire  scope  of  Human  Life. 

Our  experiences  and  struggles  of  life  are  the  base 
line  of  intelligence  and  happiness.  He  who  has  tasted 
no  sorrow  has  not  the  capacity  to  measure  joy. 

The  trials,  tribulations  and  seeming  troubles  of  life, 
are  the  measure  of  the  pleasures  in  the  liberty  that  fol- 
lows. We  cannot  have  or  even  know  one  without  the 
other,  any  more  than  we  can  know  and  enjoy  the  light 
without  having  seen  or  experienced  the  darkness. 

In  conclusion,  let  us  repeat,  that  Art  and  the  Moral 
Law  is  an  outgrowth  of  the  Mental  World.  Its  very 


Art  and  the  Moral  Law.  257 

existence  depends  upon  arbitrary  mind,  individually 
and  collectively.  It  is  not  only  the  expression,  but  the 
condition  and  home  of  the  immortal  Soul. 

As  man  rises,  the  moral  concept  rises  step  by  step, 
and  with  each  step  upward  a  greater  mental  horizon  is 
brought  into  view. 

With  hope,  aspiration  and  desire,  man's  upward  trend 
will  ever  be  toward  the  goal  of  happiness  and  bliss  in  the 
light  of  eternal  truth. 


CHAPTER  XVI. 
POLITICAL  ECONOMY. 

Oui  present  status  of  education  is  not  along  the  line 
of  pure  intellectual  advancement,  or  how  to  provide  the 
largest  success  for  the  individual  or  the  human  prog- 
ress. What  is  generally  practiced  in  educational  work, 
to  say  the  least,  is  not  up  to  the  highest  standard  of 
wisdom.  The  highest  aim  of  the  educator  is  not  for 
the  general  good  of  all,  but  to  the  individual.  The  pol- 
icy is  that  the  individual  shall  be  an  educated  success, 
with  the  aim  and  object  of  that  being  a  commercial 
success. 

Individual  success  carried  to  extremes  is  often  at  the 
expense  of  the  masses,  while  on  the  other  hand,  if  we 
curtail  the  individual,  we  destroy  frugality  and  ambi- 
tion. Laws  are  passed  to  encourage  the  individual,  but 
are  too  often  special  privilege  laws.  The  result  is  that 
injustice  is  done  the  masses. 

The  people  of  a  nation  are  divided  into  two  general 
classes:  the  useful  and  the  useless.  Among  the  useful 
of  the  first  importance  are  producers  of  food,  raiment 
and  shelter.  Second:  the  professional  and  educational. 
Third :  the  producers  of  enjoyment,  experience  and  pro- 
tection. Among  the  useless  are  those  who  produce  noth- 
ing; who  live  on  what  they  have  inherited;  those  who 
scheme  by  gambling  and  otherwise  extract  their  liveli- 
hood out  of  the  savings  of  others,  and  those  who  think 
that  the  world  owes  them  a  living,  and  that  it  is  their 
right  to  eat  their  daily  bread  by  the  sweat  of  other  brows. 

The  greater  part  of  the  world's  immorality  is  cul- 


Political  Economy.  259 

tured  in  the  minds  of  the  useless  classes,  for  usually 
the  useful  classes  have  their  minds  engaged  in  their 
daily  vocations,  while  the  idle  scheme  to  rob  the 
useful  while  they  are  asleep.  The  world  will  take  a 
great  step  forward  when  it  provides  the  basic  remedy 
that  the  habitual  criminal  shall  not  be  permitted  longer 
to  propagate. 

Under  the  subject  of  "Political  Economy,"  there  is 
no  question  of  greater  importance  than  that  of  money. 
In  spite  of  the  fact  of  its  importance  and  under  our 
present  civilization,  its  general  usefulness,  we  have  met 
but  few  persons  that  know  what  money  really  is.  The 
general  public  may  think  that  money  is  a  medium  of 
exchange — a  commodity  of  value.  It  is  not  a  medium 
of  exchange,  in  a  true  sense  of  the  word,  nor  is  it  a  com- 
modity of  value,  for  it  has  no  value  in  itself.  Others 
say  it  is  a  commodity  with  purchasing  power.  Even 
this  qualification  is  lacking  when  we  try  to  purchase 
what  the  other  fellow  won't  sell.  So  what  is  it?  It 
is  the  blood  of  commerce.  It  has  but  one  function,  and 
no  intrinsic  value.  For  value  is  not  in  the  money,  but 
in  the  demand  for  its  use.  Its  only  function  is  that  of 
debt  paying,  and  the  power  is  not  in  the  money,  but 
the  credit  of  the  nation  and  law  behind  it.  In  fact,  it 
is  a  legal  tender  and  debt  payer  and  nothing  more. 

You  contract  a  debt  by  making  a  purchase,  and  when 
the  agreement  is  consummated  either  at  the  time,  or 
later,  as  might  be  agreed  upon,  you  settle  the  debt  by 
presenting  that  which  the  law  calls  legal  tender  and 
the  debt  is  satisfied,  not  by  the  power  of  the  money, 
but  by  its  being  a  genuine  evidence  of  the  law  behind  it. 

Money,  when  properly  used  within  the  function  it 
contains,  is  the  blood  of  commerce,  and  is  essential  to  its 


260  Chapter  XVI. 

mobility  as  blood  is  to  the  physical  body,  or  the  nerve 
fluid  is  to  the  nervous  system. 

In  order  that  money  shall  fully  perform  its  legal 
function  its  volume  should  be  maintained  in  constant 
circulation  and  in  quantity  to  meet  every  legitimate  de- 
mand upon  it  daily.  That  which  may  be  hoarded  up 
or  hid  away  while  so  hoarded,  or  placed  in  hiding  for 
the  time  being,  does  not  serve  as  the  circulating  blood 
of  commerce. 

Money  placed  in  banking  accounts  to  meet  current 
payments  may  be  said  to  be  in  circulation.  Savings 
accounts  that  are  loaned  out  are  also  thereby  placed  in 
circulation.  But  money  that  is  arbitrarily  locked  up 
is  like  unto  stagnant  blood  of  the  physical  body.  It 
means  commercial  congestion.  Money  lost  by  fire  or 
ship  sinking  is  a  bleeding  process  to  commerce  and  in 
order  to  retain  normal  conditions  must  be  replaced. 

Money  has  a  unit  base  which  fixes  the  price  of  things 
according  to  the  supply  and  demand  of  the  unit  quan- 
tity of  money  in  circulation.  To  decrease  the  volume 
of  money  below  the  amount  that  will  settle  accounts 
of  daily  transactions  increases  the  demand  for  it,  and 
in  a  like  measure  reduces  the  price  on  commodities.  For 
where  money  is  demanded  to  settle  debts,  it  first  must 
be  purchased  in  exchange  for  product?,  and  where  the 
demand  upon  money  is  high  the  prices  of  products  are 
low,  for  the  reason  that  they  rest  each  upon  opposite 
ends  of  the  commercial  lever. 

Whenever  it  is  possible  for  individuals,  single  or 
jointly,  to  artificially  cut  down  the  circulating  medium 
of  commerce,  the  act  automatically  cuts  down  the  rela- 
tive price  of  all  commodities.  Thus  individuals  can 
purchase  commodities  on  a  depleted  market,  and  when 


Political  Economy.  261 

money  is  forced  into  circulation,  it  stimulates  com- 
merce, and  property  prices  raise;  but  the  latter  state 
of  affairs  is  carefully  guarded  against  and  is  manifest 
only  under  times  of  stress,,  of  emergency,  or  when  prod- 
uct gamblers  wish  to  sell  out. 

In  our  nation  we  possess  about  one  hundred  billions 
of  wealth,  based  upon  the  money  measure  as  kept  at 
about  fifty  dollars  per  capita.  Per  capita,  however,  is 
not  the  true  base  to  serve  as  a  normal  guide.  The  most 
reasonable  governing  point  should  be  a  circulating  me- 
dium maintained  equivalent  to  settle  each  day's  aver- 
age purchase  throughout  the  country.  For,  while  some 
dollars  will  settle  several  debts  each  day,  other  dollars 
will  sleep  in  some  pockets  for  several  days  without  set- 
tling any  debts. 

Some  people  think  that  money  should  have  an  in- 
trinsic value  and  they  try  to  give  this  quality  to  it, 
but  that  cannot  be  done.  The  function  of  money  lies 
in  the  credit  of  the  nation  and  the  law  back  of  it.  To 
coin  money  upon  silver  or  gold  does  not  effect  its  func- 
tion (although  it  might  add  to  the  credit  of  a  weak 
nation  that  issues  it),  for  the  reason  that  in  using  the 
money  you  cannot  use  the  coin.  And  if  you  use  the 
coin  you  destroy  the  money. 

Bullion  always  has  a  commercial  value,  but  when 
stamped  as  coin,  loses  its  value  as  bullion.  It  also  loses 
its  commercial  value  by  wear,  and  when  transferred 
in  quantity  loses  its  monetary  value  also,  for  it  is  always 
sold  by  weight. 

Where  a  government  issues  a  full  legal  tender  with- 
out the  attempt  of  procuring  intrinsic  value,  the  money 
quality  does  not  shrink  by  wear,  tear,  fire  or  other 


262  Chapter  XVI. 

losses,  wherein  the  numbers  are  registered  and  guar- 
anteed. 

The  ordinary  politician  knows  little  or  nothing  about 
the  function  of  money.  It  is  a  matter  that  statesmen 
alone  are  able  to  cope  with,  and  because  of  our  lack 
of  statesmen  heretofore,  the  monetary  system  had  to 
rest  upon  confidence.  When  confidence  got  a  jar,  the 
system  failed,  commerce  then  became  weak  and  ill  for 
the  lack  of  a  healthy  circulation. 

It  is  not  he  who  has  large  quantities  of  money  that 
does  injury  to  man,  but  he  who  fails  to  use  it  to  pro- 
mote the  development  of  food,  raiment  and  shelter.  It 
is  not  he  who  wears  the  diamonds  and  pearls,  lives  in  a 
stately  mansion,  sits  in  his  office  behind  the  teller's 
counter,  or  rides  in  palace  cars  that  becomes  the  enemy 
to  man,  but  he  who  uses  his  wealth  to  the  injury  of 
others. 

It  is  not  the  amassing  of  great  wealth  by  the  indi- 
vidual that  injures  man,  for  nature  limits  the  time  of 
the  hoarder  and  he  passes  on,  leaving  the  wealth  behind. 
The  massing  is  injurious  only  to  the  extent  of  its  en- 
tail ment,  and  the  extent  it  increases  the  number  of  the 
useless  classes. 

It  is  not  the  accumulation  of  great  national  debts 
that  we  should  fear,  because  as  a  whole  the  human  fam- 
ily is  a  unit  and  we  can  owe  no  national  debt  to  other 
sources  than  man.  It  is  the  losses  we  sustain  in  the 
destructive  process  that  strike  the  vital  interest,  for 
what  is  destroyed  must  be  reproduced  by  the  use- 
ful classes.  The  injury  done  mankind  by  debts  is 
in  the  bonding  of  the  producer  to  pay  tribute  to  an 
increased  useless  class  in  interest  paid  on  such  debts. 
For  just  in  proportion  to  what  individuals  are  able 


Political  Economy.  263 

to  collect  from  the  nation,  means  that  much  less  for 
themselves  to  produce,  and  in  the  same  measure  as  one 
gains,  he  inclines  to  the  useless  class,  and  demands  just 
that  much  more  from  the  useful  class. 

Man  as  a  rule  does  not  labor  because  he  wants  to, 
but  taeause  he  finds  it  expedient  to  do  so.  What  he 
wants  in  this  life  is  food,  raiment,  shelter,  education, 
pleasure  and  experience.  That  much  he  is  entitled  to, 
and  more  than  that  he  cannot  make  good  use  of  if  he 
had  it. 

Whatever  the  useless  classes  fail  to  produce  toward 
their  own  needs  in  life,  but  use,  must  be  made  up  by 
the  useful  classes,  and  to  that  extent  increases  the 
burdens  of  the  producers. 

The  greatest  menace  that  the  useless  classes  exercise 
over  the  useful  classes  is  the  stand  taken  between  the 
producer  and  the  consumer.  They  do  not  purchase  prod- 
ucts for  storage  or  preservation,  nor  do  they  enter  the 
vocation  as  a  legitimate  purchasing  and  distributing 
business.  Their  efforts  are  always  to  grab  the  products 
that  are  inclined  to  be  pcarce  as  they  are  about  to  be 
passed  from  the  hands  of  the  producers  to  the  consum- 
ers, and  hold  up  the  delivery  until  they  collect  a  high 
tribute  before  permitting  the  transfer  to  be  made.  They 
do  nothing  toward  the  producing,  but  stand  guard, 
barring  a  legitimate  transfer,  until  they  collect  a  ran- 
som. Such  collection  adds  nothing  to  the  general  pro- 
duction, but  supports  further  expanding  of  the  useless 
classes,  and  increases  further  the  burdens  of  the  pro- 
ducers. 

It  should  be  considered  high  treason  to  engage  in 
gambling  with  the  necessaries  of  life,  for  as  much  as 
it  may  seem  legitimate  to  the  speculator,  his  methods 


264  Chapter  XVI. 

are  nevertheless  like  withholding  the  spoon  from  the 
mouth  of  the  child  until  the  mother  pays  a  ransom  for 
each  precious  morsel  fed.  Our  present  moral  status  per- 
mits this  gambling  today,  but  it  will  be  a  crime  to- 
morrow. 

There  is  a  supreme  struggle  on  the  part  of  a  growing 
number  to  depart  from  the  present  competitive  system 
in  political  economy,  and  adopt  government  owner- 
ship, instead.  Where  government  ownership  has  been 
adopted,  it  has  proven  a  success,  particularly  so  in  the 
postoffice  and  mail  system,  and  in  the  public  school 
system  and  a  few  minor  branches  in  municipalities. 

There  is  no  question  but  that  the  greatest  good  will 
result  to  the  greatest  number,  when  all  things  used  in 
common  shall  be  owned  in  common,  leaving  individual 
ownership  and  individually  used  properties  under  the 
competitive  system.  For  without  personal  ownership, 
there  would  be  no  personal  ambition,  and  without  per- 
sonal ambition,  there  would  be  no  personal  effort  or 
personal  gratification. 

Give  to  the  individual  every  right  that  will  encour- 
age and  develop,  for  the  development  of  one  individual 
is  an  object  lesson  to  others.  See  to  it,  however,  that 
the  individual  does  not  override  his  rights  at  the  ex- 
pense of  his  fellow-men. 


CHAPTER  XVII. 
UNIVERSAL  CONSCIOUSNESS. 

The  Universe,  although  composed  of  myriads  of  Solar 
Systems,  divided  by  many  Planes  and  sub-Planes,  is 
nevertheless  tied  together  as  the  one  grand  whole  by 
bonds  of  contact. 

The  lines  of  contact  are  invisible,  but  potent,  and  it 
is  due  to  these  lines  that  everything  has  a  degree  of 
feeling,  is  conscious  of,  and  influenced  by,  every  other 
thing,  making  it  impossible  for  any  one  thing  to  exist 
absolutely  alone  in  the  Universe. 

Consciousness  is  due  wholly  to  the  fact  that  things 
are  influenced  by  all  other  things,  and  the  influences 
are  a  result  of  actual  lines  of  contact. 

In  the  primary  expressions  it  is  purely  mechanical, 
but  we  shall  be  able  to  show  that  it,  like  other  po- 
tentialities, is  subject  to  development,  and  that  it  finally 
reaches  a  state  of  arbitrary  capacity. 

The  consciousness  that  pervades  all  creation  is  a  fac- 
tor of  perfect  accuracy.  Some  call  it  Supreme  Intel- 
ligence, or  Over-Soul.  A  better-  name,  probably,  is 
Universal  Consciousness. 

Only  a  few  minds  seem  to  have  realized  that  there 
is  such  a  thing  as  a  Universal  Consciousness,  for  the 
reason  that  they  have  sought  for  Nature's  intelligence 
in  a  personality,  and  pass  it  by  without  seeing  that  it 
is  in  everything.  They  have  looked  for  the  Infinite, 
expecting  to  find  it  like  the  finite.  They  have  sought 
the  Absolute  with  a  relative  mind  from  a  relative  stand- 
point, with  the  idea  that  it,  too,  was  relative. 


266  Chapter  XVII. 

The  supreme  Intellect  does  not  need  to  reason,  scheme 
or  plan ;  for  it  is  the  base  of  the  Absolute,  conforming 
to  eternal  progress  by  immutable  process.  It  is  the 
Intellect  that  provides  that  a  circumference  shall  be 
larger  than  a  center;  that  2  and  2  shall  be  4  and  not  5. 
It  does  not  have  even  to  think,  that  it  might  change, 
for  it  is  changeless.  It  is  the  spirit  of  immutable  Laws. 

Intellectual  contact  is  truth  itself.  It  is  not  separate 
and  apart  from  things,  but  pervades  all  things  even  to 
itself. 

It  is  not  a  blind  force,  for  its  Universal  contact  is 
itself  Universal  sight.  It  is  not  deaf,  for  it  is  the  em- 
bodiment of  Universal  rythmic  tone.  Its  will  is  the 
mandate  of  Immutable  Law. 

The  finite  mind  differs  from  that  of  the  Universal 
as  a  center  differs  from  endless  space;  as  the  infinitesi- 
mal from  the  Infinitude. 

Individual  consciousness — individual  mind — is  a  min- 
iature reflection ;  a  relative  effect,  embodied  with  person- 
ality. Universal  consciousness  is  impersonal  and  bound- 
less. 

If  there  was  not  a  Universal,  there  could  not  be  a 
personal  consciousness  any  more  than  a  sight  line  could 
rest  upon  that  which  does  not  exist. 

Universal  consciousness  embraces  basic  causation. 
Personal  consciousness  is  the  result  of  personal  contact 
with  things  that  do  exist.  Thoughts  generate  within 
persona]  consciousness  by  virtue  of  contact  with  things. 
A  combination  of  thoughts  are  the  mental  units  of 
organic  mind.  Organic  mind  is  result,  not  cause.  We 
might  have  a  thinker,  but  with  nothing  to  think  about 
he  could  not  create  a  thought,  and  without  thoughts 
there  could  be  no  finite  mind.  The  Universal  does  not 


Universal  Consciousness.  <J67 

think,  does  not  have  to  think.  It  becomes  the  embodi- 
ment of  the  whole.  Whatever  there  has  been,  whatever 
exists  is  Universal. 

Personal  consciousness  takes  form  around  a  finite  cen- 
ter. It  grows  and  becomes  a  part  of  the  whole.  It  is 
a  microcosm  of  the  macrocosm.  The  one  thinks;  the 
other  has. 

Personal  consciousness  develops  in  personal  aware- 
ness reflecting  the  Universal.  Its  distinction  is  to  com- 
pile the  whole  in  miniature  essence.  The  very  fact  that 
mind  does  conceive  and  perceive  is  positive  proof  of 
its  function  and  capacity. 

Aspiration,  desire  and  harmonious  relation,  constant- 
ly and  persistently  maintained,  will  accomplish  results 
for  every  normal  mind.  The  greatest  hindrance  is  er- 
roneous and  fixed  ideas ;  supported  by  injustice  and  per- 
sonal selfishness. 

To  be  in  tune  with  eternal  truth  and  fact,  you  must 
possess  equity  and  harmony  in  self.  In  order  to  trans- 
mit wireless  intelligence,  the  receiver  must  be  in  tune 
with  the  transmitter. 

It  has  been  said  that  "you  must  become  as  a  little 
child  before  you  can  comprehend."  It  is  not  that  one 
shall  become  meek  or  mentally  weak,  but  that  one  shall 
rid  the  mind  of  prejudice  and  false  ideas  that  have  no 
foundation  in  fact. 

When  one  is  enabled  to  clean  up  one's  mental  house- 
hold, the  very  soul  becomes  receptive  to  the  eternal  truth. 
When  one  knows  one's  self  in  that  attitude,  one  becomes 
a  mental  magnet,  a  receiver  and  receptacle  of  Universal 
consciousness,  and  the  compensation  is  attained,  not 
because  a  favor  has  been  granted,  but  because  one  has 


268  Chapter  XVII. 

cleared  the  debris  from  the  lines  of  contact,  between 
soul  consciousness  and  that  of  the  Universal. 

In  using  the  lines,  one  has  not  laid  them.  They 
were  already  there.  One  may  not  know  it,  perhaps,  hav- 
ing never  used  them  before.  The  Law  is  universal;  no 
man  has  a  monopoly  over  lines  leading  to  eternal  truth. 

Who  are  the  Master  Minds,  if  not  those  who  are  in 
touch  with  the  Universal?  Our  first  duty  to  ourselves 
is  to  know  the  truth,  and  the  truth  will  set  us  mentally 
free. 

Mental  freedom  means,  not  freedom  from  ignorance, 
for  ignorance  is  mental  vacuum.  It  means  freedom 
from  falsehood,  error  and  corrupt  thinking.  Every  in- 
dividual starts  to  think  from  the  point  of  personal 
ignorance  and  ofttimes  inherited  falsehood,  but  when  a 
mind  is  loaded  down  with  that  which  is  not  true  it  has 
a  mental  deadweight,  which  it  is  bound  to  rid  itself  of 
before  it  can  digest  healthy  mental  food,  from  which 
to  construct  a  mind  in  harmony  with  the  light  of  eternal 
truth. 

It  is  almost  frightful  to  contemplate  that  when  we 
have  time  to  reflect  and  examine  ourselves,  we  find  that 
most  all  we  know  is  either  false,  visionary  or  immoral. 
That  it  does  not  conform  to  Nature  and  must  give  way 
to  facts.  For  facts  and  facts  only  survive  in  the  intel- 
lectual realm.  The  maxim  that  one  fact  is  worth  a  thou- 
sand theories,  holds  good. 

What  we  believe  is  our  preliminary  self.  What  we 
know  is  our  real  self.  What  we  do  not  as  yet  know, 
is  our  prospective  self. 

If  you  would  know  the  truth,  seek  it  in  Nature 
through  your  own  Soul's  Consciousness  in  the  realm  of 
the  Universal.  It  will  never  deceive  you.  Man  is  the 


Universal  Consciousness.  269 

only  teacher  of  falsehood,  the  only  deceiver.  Mankind 
is  Man's  only  enemy. 

Our  trials  and  tribulations  are  the  result  of  injustice 
to  one  another.  Miseries  and  fears  are  cultivated  into 
apparent  realities  through  the  scheming  and  cunning  of 
Man  to  Man. 

Our  minds  have  been  constantly  loaded  with  the 
fabulous  and  fictitious  frailties.  We  inherit  the  de- 
moralizing thoughts  of  our  ancestors.  To  that  extent 
we  are  mentally  weak  and  moral  cowards.  Our  super- 
stitions have  made  us  afraid  to  open  our  eyes  and  rea- 
son to  Nature  for  her  boundless  store  of  knowledge  and 
enlightenment.  Not  being  able  to  comprehend  the  real, 
we  seek  comfort  in  the  myths  and  fables. 

Falsehood  lives,  as  well  as  truth,  but  it  does  so  by 
the  artificial  energy  behind  it.  It  probably  has  a  mission 
to  fill,  so  that  we  shall  know  the  distinction  of  truth. 
Truth  is  the  builder  of  concrete  mind.  Knowledge  is 
mind  in  harmony  with  Nature.  Error  must  fade  away 
before  the  light  of  eternal  truth,  as  darkness  vanishes 
with  the  coming  day. 

The  animal  world  surpasses  Man  in  some  things.  The 
bloodhound  can  see  the  culprit  with  the  eye  of  his  soul. 
He  knows  the  direction  to  travel  and  knows  the  person- 
ality when  he  finds  him.  His  evidence  is  better  than 
that  of  Man,  in  the  courts,  for  psychic  powers.  The 
carrier  pigeon  can  line  up  the  direction  of  his  home  and 
fly  straight  to  it  without  chart  or  compass.  Most  of  the 
animals  can  find  their  mates,  though  lost  in  the  wilder- 
ness. Man  has  lost  those  faculties.  His  mind  has  been 
calloused  by  the  scars  of  erroneous  teaching.  He  has 
left  off  Nature  and  lives  in  a  world  of  art. 

We  think  today  in  words,  pictures  and  symbols.    As 


270  Chapter  XVIL 

carriers  and  constructors,  if  they  are  laden  with  truth, 
then  the  mind  is  builded  concretely.  If  laden  with  fic- 
tion and  fable  it  could  be  no  better  than  the  material 
used  in  its  construction. 

A  perfect  individual  consciousness  depends  upon  a 
perfect  individual  mind.  A  perfect  individual  mind  is 
a  prototype  of  the  universal  consciousness  embodied  with 
Will  and  Eeason. 

The  Universal  is  opened  to  every  normal  mind.  "Knock 
and  it  shall  be  opened  unto  you.  Seek  and  ye  shall  find." 
In  other  words,  what  you  wish  to  know  and  what  you 
are  entitled  to  know,  ask  your  innermost  self  the  ques- 
tion. It  will  be  answered  unto  you.  Should  you  fail, 
ask  again  and  again.  When  the  line  is  opened  the  an- 
swer is  yours. 

Remember  that  consultation  with  the  Universal  is 
an  innermost  prayer.  ISTot  that  the  Universal  shall 
do  something  for  us,  or  change  its  modus  operandi  to 
suit  our  ideas,  for  it  is  already  right  in  all  things. 
What  we  each  need  is  to  be  placed  aright  ourselves,  and 
since  we  are  miniature,  it  is  easier  to  move  into  line 
with  the  Universe  than  to  have  the  Universe  move  into 
line  with  us.  The  result  would  be  the  same.  Prayers 
are  always  answered,  when  we  ourselves  are  aligned 
with  Universal  truth  and  consciousness. 


14  DAY  USE 

RETURN  TO  DESK  FROM  WHICH  BORROWED 

LOAN  DEPT. 

This  book  is  due  on  the  last  date  stamped  below,  or 
on  the  date  to  which  renewed. 
Renewed  books  are  subject  to  immediate  recall. 

^.^^^^A^^^^^^A^^^t 

•<**  ^&Ja^^^t9 

REC'D  LD 

JAM    3'64-2PM 

UHII       ^             M  s 

LD  2lA-40m-ll,'63 
(E1602slO)476B 


General  Library 

University  of  California 

Berkeley 


